SOUTHDOWN INC
10-Q, 1994-08-10
CEMENT, HYDRAULIC
Previous: DREYFUS MUNICIPAL MONEY MARKET FUND INC, 497, 1994-08-10
Next: PRICE T ROWE INTERNATIONAL FUNDS INC, N-30D, 1994-08-10










         _________________________________________________________________
         _________________________________________________________________

                          SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
                                Washington, D.C. 20549


                                      FORM 10-Q

                [ X ] QUARTERLY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d)
                        OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

                For the quarterly period ended June 30, 1994

                                          OR

                [   ] TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d)
                        OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

                For the transition period from _______ to __________


                            Commission File Number 1-6117


                                   SOUTHDOWN, INC.
                (Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)


                       Louisiana                     72-0296500
            (State or other jurisdiction of       (I.R.S. Employer
             incorporation or organization)      Identification No.)


                   1200 Smith Street
                       Suite 2400
                     Houston, Texas                     77002
                 (Address of principal
                   executive offices)                 (Zip Code)


           Registrant's telephone number, including area code:(713)650-6200


               Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed
          all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the
          Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months
          (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to
          file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing
          requirements for the past 90 days.   Yes   X      No      

               At July 31, 1994 there were 17.3 million common shares
          outstanding.


          _________________________________________________________________
          _________________________________________________________________<PAGE>






                       SOUTHDOWN, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY COMPANIES

                                        INDEX




                                                                    Page
                                                                     No.
          Part I.  FINANCIAL INFORMATION

          Item 1.  Financial Statements (unaudited)

                Consolidated Balance Sheet
                 June 30, 1994 and December 31, 1993                 1

                Statement of Consolidated Earnings 
                 Three months and six months ended
                 June 30, 1994 and 1993                              2

                Statement of Consolidated Cash Flows 
                 Six months ended June 30, 1994 and 1993             3

                Statement of Consolidated Revenues
                 and Operating Earnings
                 by Business Segment 
                   Three months and six months ended
                  June 30, 1994 and 1993                             4

                Statement of Shareholders' Equity 
                 Six months ended June 30, 1994                      4

                Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements           5

                Independent Accountants' Review Report               7

          Item 2.  Management's Discussion and Analysis of
                 Financial Condition and Results of Operations       8


          Part II. OTHER INFORMATION

          Item 1.  Legal Proceedings                                 17

          Item 6.  Exhibits and Reports on Form 8-K                  18<PAGE>





                           PART I.   FINANCIAL INFORMATION

          Item 1.  Financial Statements

                       SOUTHDOWN, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY COMPANIES
                              CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
                                           
                                     (unaudited)
                                                         (in millions)
                                                    ----------------------
                                                    June 30,   December 31,
                                                    ---------  ------------
                                                        1994         1993
                                                    ---------  ------------

          ASSETS
          Current assets:
           Cash and cash equivalents                  $   8.6      $   7.4
           Accounts and notes receivable,
             less allowance for doubtful accounts
             of $10.4 and $7.0                           84.3         75.7
           Inventories (Note 2)                          69.1         54.7
           Deferred income taxes                         22.0         25.5
           Prepaid expenses and other                     2.3          3.6
                                                      --------     --------
             Total current assets                       186.3        166.9
          Property, plant and equipment, less
           accumulated depreciation, depletion
           and amortization of $290.8 and $276.9        587.0        593.2
          Goodwill                                       72.1         74.5
          Other long-term assets:
           Long-term receivables                         19.8         20.6
           Other                                         48.6         51.8
                                                      --------     --------
                                                      $ 913.8      $ 907.0
                                                      --------     --------
                                                      --------     --------

          LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY
          Current liabilities:
           Current maturities of long-term debt       $   0.9      $  19.9
           Accounts payable and accrued liabilities      92.1         91.9
                                                      --------     --------
             Total current liabilities                   93.0        111.8
          Long-term debt                                222.1        274.0
          Deferred income taxes                         124.0        127.6
          Minority interest in consolidated
           joint venture                                 29.8         28.8
          Long-term portion of postretirement
           benefit obligations                           82.9         83.8
          Other long-term liabilities and
           deferred credits                              15.8         18.8
                                                      --------     --------
                                                        567.6        644.8
                                                      --------     --------
          Shareholders' equity:
           Preferred stock redeemable at
             issuer's option (Note 3)                   152.0         67.9
           Common stock, $1.25 par value                 21.6         21.3
           Capital in excess of par value               124.5        127.6
           Reinvested earnings                           48.1         45.4
                                                      --------     --------
                                                        346.2        262.2
                                                      --------     --------
                                                      $ 913.8      $ 907.0
                                                      --------     --------
                                                      --------     --------


                                         -1-<PAGE>





                       SOUTHDOWN, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY COMPANIES
                          STATEMENT OF CONSOLIDATED EARNINGS
                                     (unaudited)

                                      (in millions, except per share data)
                                     -------------------------------------
                                         Three Months        Six Months
                                           June 30,           June 30,
                                     ------------------  -----------------
                                        1994     1993      1994     1993
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------

          Revenues                    $ 157.6   $ 144.4  $ 277.0  $ 250.5 
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
          Costs and expenses:
            Operating                   110.0     102.4    197.1    178.1 
            Depreciation, depletion
              and amortization           10.9      10.7     21.8     21.5 
            Selling and marketing         4.8       4.6      9.0      9.1 
            General and
              administrative             11.3      11.2     21.8     23.2 
            Other (income) 
              expense, net               (4.1)      0.4     (2.8)     0.3 
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
                                        132.9     129.3    246.9    232.2 
          Minority interest in
            earnings of consolidated
            joint venture                 1.1       0.8      1.0      0.8 
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
                                        134.0     130.1    247.9    233.0 
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
          Operating earnings             23.6      14.3     29.1     17.5 
          Interest                       (7.5)    (10.4)   (16.2)   (20.8)
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
          Earnings (loss) before
            income taxes and 
            cumulative effect of a
            change in accounting
            principle                    16.1       3.9     12.9     (3.3)
          Federal and state income
            tax (expense) benefit        (5.1)     (1.3)    (4.1)     1.5 
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
          Earnings (loss) before
            cumulative effect of a
            change in accounting
            principle                    11.0       2.6      8.8     (1.8)
          Cumulative effect of a
            change in accounting
            principle, net of taxes         -         -        -    (48.5)
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
          Net earnings (loss)         $  11.0   $   2.6  $   8.8  $ (50.3)
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
          Dividends on preferred
            stock (Note 3)            $  (2.4)  $  (1.2) $  (4.5) $  (2.5)
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
          Earnings (loss) available
            for common stock          $   8.6   $   1.4  $   4.3  $ (52.8)
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
          Earnings (loss) per
            common share (Note 3
            and Exhibit 11):
            Primary -
            Earnings (loss)
              before cumulative
              effect of a change

                                         -2-<PAGE>





              in accounting
              principle               $  0.48   $  0.08  $  0.24  $ (0.26)
            Cumulative effect of
              a change in
              accounting principle,
              net of taxes                  -         -        -    (2.86)
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
                                      $  0.48   $  0.08  $  0.24  $ (3.12)
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------

            Fully diluted -
            Earnings (loss) 
              before cumulative
              effect of a change
              in accounting
              principle               $  0.46   $  0.08  $  0.24  $ (0.26)
            Cumulative effect of
              a change in
              accounting principle,
              net of taxes                  -         -        -    (2.86)
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
                                      $  0.46   $  0.08  $  0.24  $ (3.12)
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------


          Average shares outstanding (Exhibit 11):
              Primary                    17.9      16.9     17.9     16.9 
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
              Fully diluted              23.8      16.9     17.9     16.9 
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------
                                     --------  --------  -------  --------



































                                         -3-<PAGE>





                       SOUTHDOWN, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY COMPANIES
                         STATEMENT OF CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOWS

                                     (unaudited)
                                                          (in millions
                                                      --------------------
                                                         Six Months Ended
                                                             June 30,
                                                      --------------------
                                                        1994        1993
                                                      -------      -------
          Operating activities:
           Net earnings (loss)                         $  8.8       $(50.3)
           Adjustments to reconcile net loss
             to net cash provided by (used in)
             operating activities:
              Cumulative effect of a
                change in accounting principle              -         48.5 
              Depreciation, depletion
                and amortization                         21.8         21.5 
              Deferred income tax provision               1.0         (1.8)
              Amortization of securities
                issuance costs                            2.1          1.6 
              Changes in operating assets
                and liabilities                         (26.2)        (4.7)
              Other adjustments                           1.0          0.8 
                                                      -------      -------
          Net cash provided by operating activities       8.5         15.6 
                                                      -------      -------

          Investing activities:
           Additions to property, plant and equipment   (13.8)       (10.5)
           Proceeds from asset sales                      1.2          6.3 
           Other                                         (2.1)         0.7 
                                                      -------      -------
          Net cash used in investing activities         (14.7)        (3.5)
                                                      -------      -------

          Financing activities:
           Additions to long-term debt                   39.6           -  
           Reductions in long-term debt                (110.6)       (10.3)
           Proceeds from sale of preferred stock         86.3            - 
           Dividends                                     (3.3)        (2.5)
           Securities issuance costs                     (4.6)          -  
           Changes in minority interest                     -         (0.5)
                                                      -------      -------
          Net cash provided by (used in)
           financing activities                           7.4        (13.3)
                                                      -------      -------

          Net increase (decrease) in cash
           and cash equivalents                           1.2         (1.2)
          Cash and cash equivalents at
           beginning of period                            7.4         12.5 
                                                      -------      -------

          Cash and cash equivalents at end of period   $  8.6       $ 11.3 
                                                      -------      -------  
                                                      -------      ------- 

             Cash payments for income taxes totaled $300,000 and $200,000,
          respectively,  in 1994 and 1993.  The Company received a $15.7
          million Federal income tax refund in 1993 from the carryback to
          prior years of the 1992 tax loss.  Interest paid, net of amounts
          capitalized, was $16.7 million and $19.3 million in 1994 and
          1993, respectively.  The $48.5 million noncash operating charge
          in 1993 for the cumulative effect of a change in accounting
          principle also resulted in a noncash charge to deferred income

                                         -4-<PAGE>





          taxes of $25.9 million and a noncash credit to the long-term
          portion of postretirement benefit obligations of $74.4 million. 
          Noncash investing activities in 1993 included the sale of a
          hazardous waste processing facility for $5.6 million face value
          of a new issue of the purchaser's preferred stock.  
































































                                         -5-<PAGE>





                       SOUTHDOWN, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY COMPANIES
              STATEMENT OF CONSOLIDATED REVENUES AND OPERATING EARNINGS
                                 BY BUSINESS SEGMENT
                                     (unaudited)
                                                  (in millions)
                                     -------------------------------------
                                         Three Months        Six Months
                                           June 30,           June 30,
                                     -----------------   -----------------
                                        1994     1993      1994     1993
                                     --------  -------   -------  --------
          Contributions to revenues:
            Cement                    $ 107.7   $ 101.4  $ 181.4  $ 168.0 
            Concrete products            53.6      42.9    103.2     80.6 
            Environmental services        7.9       9.3     15.7     19.2 
            Intersegment sales          (11.8)    (9.4)    (23.7)   (17.6)
            Corporate and other           0.2       0.2      0.4      0.3 
                                     --------  -------   -------  --------
                                      $ 157.6   $ 144.4  $ 277.0  $ 250.5 
                                     --------  -------   -------  --------
                                     --------  -------   -------  --------
          Contributions to operating earnings (loss)
            before interest expense and income taxes:
              Cement                  $  27.6   $  24.7  $  44.5  $  39.3 
              Concrete products           3.7      (0.4)     2.9     (1.6)
              Environmental services     (1.7)     (0.4)    (3.1)    (0.2)
              Corporate                       
                General and
                  administrative         (7.6)     (8.2)   (14.5)   (17.2)
                Depreciation,
                  depletion and
                  amortization           (1.2)     (1.1)    (2.4)    (2.2)
                Miscellaneous income
                  (expense)               2.8      (0.3)     1.7     (0.6)
                                     --------  -------   -------  --------
                                      $  23.6   $  14.3  $  29.1  $  17.5 
                                     --------  -------   -------  --------
                                     --------  -------   -------  --------

                       SOUTHDOWN, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY COMPANIES
                          STATEMENT OF SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY
                                     (unaudited)
                                           (in millions)
                            -----------------------------------------------
                                                          Capital
                              Preferred       Common        in 
                                Stock          Stock      excess     Re-
                            -------------  -------------  of par  invested
                            Shares Amount  Shares Amount   value  earnings
                            ------ ------  ------ ------  ------  ---------
          Balance at
          December 31, 1993   3.0  $ 67.9   17.0  $ 21.3  $127.6   $ 45.4
          Net earnings         -       -      -       -      -        8.8
          Issuance of Series
            D Preferred
            Stock (Note 3)    1.7    86.3     -       -      -         -
          Dividends on
            preferred 
            stock (Note 3)     -       -      -       -      -       (4.5)
          Issuance expenses
            of capital
            stock              -       -      -       -     (4.2)      -
          Exercise of
            stock options      -       -     0.2     0.2    (0.2)    (1.5)
          Other              (0.1)   (2.2)   0.1     0.1     1.3     (0.1)
                            ------ ------  ------ ------  ------  ---------
          Balance at
          June 30, 1994       4.6  $152.0   17.3  $ 21.6  $124.5   $ 48.1   

                                            -6-<PAGE>





                            ------ ------  ------ ------  ------  ---------
                            ------ ------  ------ ------  ------  ---------     



































































                                            -7-<PAGE>





                         SOUTHDOWN, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY COMPANIES

                        NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

                                        (unaudited)


          Note 1 - Unaudited Consolidated Financial Statements:

               The Consolidated Balance Sheet of Southdown, Inc. and subsidiary
          companies (the Company) at June 30, 1994 and the Statements of
          Consolidated Earnings, Consolidated Cash Flows, Consolidated Revenues
          and Operating Earnings by Business Segment and Shareholders' Equity
          for the periods indicated herein have been prepared by the Company
          without audit.  The Consolidated Balance Sheet at December 31, 1993 is
          derived from the December 31, 1993 audited financial statements, but
          does not include all disclosures required by generally accepted
          accounting principles.  It is assumed that these financial statements
          will be read in conjunction with the audited financial statements and
          notes thereto included in the Company's 1993 Annual Report on Form 10-
          K, as amended by Form 10-K/A dated May 11, 1994.

               In the opinion of management, the statements reflect all
          adjustments necessary for a fair presentation of the financial
          position, results of operations and cash flows of the Company on a
          consolidated basis and all such adjustments are of a normal recurring
          nature.  The interim statements for the period ended June 30, 1994 are
          not necessarily indicative of results to be expected for the full
          year.

          Note 2 - Inventories:

                                                 (unaudited, in millions)
                                                 ------------------------
                                                   June 30,   December 31,
                                                 ----------   -----------
                                                     1994        1993
                                                 ----------   -----------
                                                      
               Finished goods                      $ 21.2      $ 15.4
               Work in progress                      14.8         7.0
               Raw materials                          6.0         6.0
               Supplies                              27.1        26.3
                                                ----------   -----------
                                                   $ 69.1      $ 54.7
                                                ----------   -----------
                                                ----------   -----------

               Inventories stated on the LIFO method were $25.6 million at June
          30, 1994 and $20.4 million at December 31, 1993 compared with current
          costs of $33.5 million and $28.3 million, respectively.

          Note 3 - Capital Stock:

             Common Stock

               At June 30, 1994, the Company had 17,258,000 shares of common
          stock issued and outstanding.











                                            -8-<PAGE>





             Preferred Stock Redeemable at Issuer's Option

               Series A Preferred Stock - The Company had 1,994,000 shares of
          Preferred Stock, $0.70 Cumulative Convertible Series A (Series A
          Preferred Stock) issued and outstanding at June 30, 1994, and
          1,999,000 shares issued and outstanding at December 31, 1993 and June
          30, 1993.  Dividends paid on the Series A Preferred Stock were
          approximately $350,000 and $700,000, respectively, during each of the
          three and six month periods ended June 30, 1994 and 1993.

               Series B Preferred Stock - The Company had 917,000 shares of
          Preferred Stock, $3.75 Convertible Exchangeable Series B (Series B
          Preferred Stock) issued and outstanding at June 30, 1994, and 959,000
          shares issued and outstanding at December 31, 1993 and June 30, 1993. 
          Dividends accrued on the Series B Preferred Stock were approximately
          $800,000 and $900,000, respectively, during the three months ended
          June 30, 1994 and 1993.  Dividends paid on the Series B Preferred
          Stock were approximately $1.7 million and $1.8 million, respectively,
          during the six months ended June 30, 1994 and 1993.

               Series D Preferred Stock - On January 27, 1994, the Company
          issued 1,725,000 shares of Preferred Stock, $2.875 Cumulative
          Convertible Series D (Series D Preferred Stock) all of which were
          outstanding at June 30, 1994.  The net proceeds of approximately $82
          million were utilized to reduce long-term debt and to fund working
          capital requirements.  Dividends accrued on the Series D Preferred
          Stock were approximately $1.2 million and $2.1 million, respectively,
          during the three and six month periods ended June 30, 1994.

          Note 4 - Contingencies:

               See Item 2. "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial
          Condition and Results of Operations - Liquidity and Capital Resources
          - Known Events, Trends and Uncertainties" for discussion of certain
          contingencies.

          Note 5 - Review by Independent Accountants:

               The unaudited financial information presented in this report has
          been reviewed by the Company's independent public accountants.  The
          review was limited in scope and did not constitute an audit of the
          financial information in accordance with generally accepted auditing
          standards such as is performed in the year-end audit of financial
          statements.  The report of Deloitte & Touche on its limited review of
          the financial information as of June 30, 1994 and for the three and
          six month periods ended June 30, 1994 and 1993 follows.























                                            -9-<PAGE>





                          INDEPENDENT ACCOUNTANTS' REVIEW REPORT




          To the Shareholders and
             Board of Directors of
             Southdown, Inc.
             Houston, Texas


               We have reviewed the accompanying consolidated balance sheet of
          Southdown, Inc. and subsidiary companies as of June 30, 1994, and the
          related statement of consolidated earnings and the statement of
          consolidated cash flows for the three and six months ended June 30,
          1994 and 1993 and the statement of shareholders' equity for the six
          months ended June 30, 1994.  These financial statements are the
          responsibility of the Company's management.

               We conducted our review in accordance with standards established
          by the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants.  A review
          of the interim financial information consists principally of applying
          analytical procedures to financial data and making inquiries of
          persons responsible for financial and accounting matters.  It is
          substantially less in scope than an audit conducted in accordance with
          generally accepted auditing standards, the objective of which is the
          expression of an opinion regarding the financial statements taken as a
          whole.  Accordingly, we do not express such an opinion.

               Based on our review, we are not aware of any material
          modifications that should be made to such consolidated financial
          statements for them to be in conformity with generally accepted
          accounting principles.

               We have previously audited, in accordance with generally accepted
          auditing standards, the consolidated balance sheet of Southdown, Inc.
          and subsidiary companies as of December 31, 1993 and the related
          consolidated statements of earnings, stockholders' equity, and cash
          flows for the year then ended (not presented herein); and in our
          report dated January 27, 1994, we expressed an unqualified opinion on
          those consolidated financial statements.  In our opinion, the
          information set forth in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet
          as of December 31, 1993 is fairly stated, in all material respects, in
          relation to the consolidated balance sheet from which it has been
          derived.







          Deloitte & Touche 
          Houston, Texas
          July 25, 1994   














                                           -10-<PAGE>





          Item 2.   Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition
                    and Results of Operations.


          Results of Operations

             Consolidated Second Quarter Earnings

               Operating earnings for the second quarter of 1994 were $23.6
          million compared with $14.3 million in the prior year quarter.  Net
          earnings for the second quarter of 1994 were $11 million, $0.46 per
          share fully diluted, compared with $2.6 million, $0.08 per share fully
          diluted, for the comparable quarter in 1993.

               Second quarter 1994 revenues improved 9% compared with the prior
          year quarter primarily because of higher ready-mixed concrete sales
          volumes and prices combined with a 7% improvement in cement sales
          prices.  Second quarter 1994 operating earnings improved $9.3 million
          over the same quarter of the prior year.  The improvement reflects
          record quarterly earnings of $27.6 million achieved by the Cement
          segment in 1994 and a $4.1 million increase in earnings from the
          Concrete Products operating segment over the comparable 1993 quarter. 
          The record results in cement earnings were attributable to a weighted
          average $3.66 per ton increase in cement sales prices reflecting price
          increases implemented in virtually all of the Company's markets except
          for southern California.  Higher cement revenues for the period were
          offset to some extent by higher costs compared with the prior year
          period.  The Concrete Products segment's continued improvement was
          primarily attributable to higher sales volumes and prices from ready-
          mixed concrete.  The Florida concrete products operation demonstrated
          marked improvement while the California concrete products operation
          registered only a meager improvement in their slowly recovering
          regional economy.  Second quarter 1994 results for the Concrete
          Products segment, however, also benefited from the sale of thirty-five
          surplus used ready-mixed concrete mixer trucks by the California
          operation in June 1994 for a $1.1 million gain.  The Environmental
          Services segment continued to experience difficulties as the loss
          reported by the segment for the second quarter of 1994 increased $1.3
          million over the comparable quarter in 1993 because of lower earnings
          from the hazardous waste processing facilities and higher losses from
          the resource recovery operations in 1994.  Miscellaneous income in the
          second quarter of 1994 included $2.3 million  from the realization of
          a gain contingency stemming from the 1988 acquisition of Moore
          McCormack Resources, Inc. (Moore McCormack).

               The decline in interest expense reflects significantly lower debt
          levels from the prior year quarter resulting from the early retirement
          of $90 million of 12% Senior Subordinated Notes Due 1997( 12% Notes);
          $45 million in January 1994 and the remainder in May 1994. 

             Consolidated Year-to-date Earnings

               Operating earnings for the six months ended June 30, 1994 were
          $29.1 million compared with $17.5 million for the prior year period. 
          Net earnings for the six months ended June 30, 1994 were $8.8 million,
          $0.24 per share fully diluted, compared with a net loss of $1.8
          million, $0.26 per share, in the prior year excluding the $48.5
          million, $2.86 per share, initial charge related to the 1993 adoption
          of new accounting rules for postretirement benefits (SFAS No. 106).

               Consolidated revenues in the 1994 period increased 11% over the
          prior year period primarily because of improvements in sales volumes
          and prices from the Concrete Products segment and improved prices in
          the Cement segment.   The year-over-year improvement in net earnings
          resulted from a 13% increase in cement earnings, a $4.5 million
          improvement in the results reported by Concrete Products (including
          the aforementioned gain on the truck sale) and a 13% reduction in
          corporate expenses.  The Cement segment benefited from a 7%

                                           -11-<PAGE>





          improvement, or $3.44 per ton, in the weighted average sales price
          combined with a slight increase in sales
          volumes.   Even without the gain on the sale of the surplus concrete
          mixer trucks, operating results from the Concrete Products segment
          were significantly improved as a result of a substantial upturn in the
          Florida market.  All of the resource recovery operations and hazardous
          waste processing facilities in the Environmental Services segment,
          except Alabama, reported poorer operating results compared with the
          prior year period. 

               General and administrative expenses declined because the prior
          year period included a $3.5 million charge to accrue benefits under
          SFAS No. 106, while additional accruals have not been necessary
          subsequent to the July 1, 1993 effective date of the Company's amended
          postretirement benefits plan.  The increase in miscellaneous income
          reflects the previously mentioned $2.3 million gain.  The reduction in
          interest expense reflects the early retirement of the 12% Notes also
          mentioned above.  The Company's effective tax rate, which includes
          state taxes, was lower than the federal statutory rate for 1994
          because of the favorable impact of statutory depletion in excess of
          cost depletion, primarily as related to the Company's limestone mining
          operations.  The effective tax rate for 1993 was higher than the
          statutory rate because of the impact of statutory depletion relative
          to an estimated improvement in annual operating results.

          Segment Operating Earnings

             Cement

               Second quarter - Operating earnings for the three month period
          ended June 30, 1994 of $27.6 million, which represented a record
          quarter, improved over the $24.7 million reported in the prior year
          quarter.  Higher operating earnings primarily resulted from a $3.66
          per ton increase in average cement sales prices on essentially flat
          volume.  All cement manufacturing plants reported improved year-to-
          year results except for the Victorville, California and Kosmosdale,
          Kentucky plants.  The California plant was impacted by lower average
          sales prices (primarily the result of a higher proportion of current
          period sales under a large volume, lower margin contract) while the 
          Kentucky plant experienced operating difficulties which resulted in
          higher costs.

               Year-to-date - Operating earnings for the six months ended June
          30, 1994 were $44.5 million compared with $39.3 million in the prior
          year period.  Despite higher per unit operating costs attributable to
          unplanned kiln outages and two months of abnormally severe winter
          weather in many markets, operating earnings improved over the prior
          year period primarily because of a $3.44 per ton increase in average
          cement sales prices.

               Sales volumes, average unit price and cost data and unit
          operating profit margins relating to the Company's cement operations
          appear in the following table:

                                        Three Months        Six Months
                                            Ended              Ended
                                     -------------------  ------------------
                                           June 30,           June 30,
                                     -------------------  ------------------
                                       1994       1993     1994      1993
                                     --------   --------  -------   --------
               Tons of cement
                sold (thousands)       1,678      1,689     2,918     2,853 
                                     --------   --------  -------   --------
                                     --------   --------  -------   --------
               Weighted average per ton data:
                  Sales price 
                  (net of freight)    $55.61    $ 51.95   $ 54.07   $ 50.63 

                                           -12-<PAGE>





                  Manufacturing and
                   other plant
                   operating costs(1)  40.19      39.97     40.86     39.49 
                                     --------   --------  -------   --------
               Margin                 $15.42    $ 11.98   $ 13.21   $ 11.14 
                                     --------   --------  -------   --------
                                     --------   --------  -------   --------
               _____________
               (1)  Includes fixed and variable manufacturing costs,
                    selling expenses, plant general and administrative
                    costs, other plant overhead and miscellaneous costs.


               The increases in the average sales price per ton for the three
          and six months ended June 30, 1994 reflect the partial realization of
          price increases implemented in most of the Company's markets during
          the previous twelve months.  The increase in operating costs per ton
          for the six months ended June 30, 1994 compared with the prior year
          period was attributable to higher maintenance and repair costs of
          several of the manufacturing facilities, some of which were related to
          abnormally severe weather conditions, and to various major repairs
          undertaken in the first quarter of 1994.


             Concrete Products

               Second quarter  - Operating earnings for the Concrete Products
          segment were $3.7 million in the second quarter of 1994 compared with
          an operating loss of $395,000 in the prior year quarter.  Revenues
          increased 25% from the prior year quarter primarily because of
          improved sales volumes and prices from the Florida concrete products
          operation.

               In addition to ready-mixed concrete, segment operating results
          include the sale of concrete block, aggregate, fly ash, various
          masonry supplies and other income.  Results for the southern
          California operation improved only marginally with the reported year-
          over-year improvement almost entirely attributable to a $1.1 million
          gain realized on the 1994 sale of thirty-five used concrete mixer
          trucks.  Operating results for the Florida operations improved
          significantly, reflecting a 17% increase in sales volumes and an 8%
          improvement in sales prices from the ready-mixed concrete operation as
          well as continuing improvement from the concrete block, resale and fly
          ash operations.

               Year-to-date - The Concrete Products segment's operating earnings
          for the six months ended June 30, 1994 were $2.9 million compared with
          a $1.6 million operating loss reported in the prior year period. 
          Revenues increased 28% over the prior year period as sales volumes and
          prices from all of the product lines showed improvement.

               The loss at the southern California operation declined $1.3
          million primarily because of the aforementioned gain on the sale of
          thirty-five mixer trucks.  Florida's operating results increased by
          approximately $2.9 million compared with the prior year period
          reflecting higher sales volumes and sales prices from the ready-mixed
          concrete operation as well as continuing improvement from the block,
          resale and fly ash operations.  Ready-mixed concrete sales volumes and
          prices improved by 19% and 6%, respectively, reflecting the continued
          economic recovery in the Florida market area.









                                           -13-<PAGE>





               Sales volumes, unit price and cost data and unit operating profit
          (loss) margins relating to the Company's ready-mixed concrete
          operations appear in the following table:


                                        Three Months        Six Months
                                            Ended              Ended
                                     -------------------  ------------------
                                           June 30,           June 30,
                                     -------------------  ------------------
                                       1994       1993     1994      1993
                                     --------   --------  -------   --------

               Yards of ready-mixed
                concrete sold
                (thousands)              919        795     1,812     1,500 
                                     --------   --------  -------   --------
                                     --------   --------  -------   --------

               Weighted average per cubic yard data:
                  Sales price         $47.76    $ 43.95   $ 46.49   $ 43.94 
                  Operating costs(1)   46.81      45.75     46.91     45.89 
                                     --------   --------  -------   --------
               Margin                 $ 0.95    $ (1.80)  $ (0.42)  $ (1.95)
                                     --------   --------  -------   --------
                                     --------   --------  -------   --------
               ______________
               (1)  Includes variable and fixed plant costs, delivery,
                    selling, general and administrative and
                    miscellaneous operating costs, but excluding the
                    $1.1 million gain realized on the 1994 sale of
                    trucks.


               The increase in the weighted average sales price per yard for the
          three and six months ended June 30, 1994 compared with the 1993
          periods reflects higher sales prices in both the Company's Florida and
          southern California markets.  The increase in the weighted average
          operating costs per yard for the three and six months ended June 30,
          1994 compared with the 1993 periods is attributable to higher material
          costs in Florida ( primarily  the cement sales prices which increased
          as discussed under   Cement  above).


             Environmental Services

               Second quarter - The operating loss of the Environmental Services
          segment for the three months ended June 30, 1994 was $1.7 million
          compared with a loss of approximately  $400,000 in the prior year
          quarter.  The hazardous waste processing facilities had operating
          earnings of $76,000 in the current year quarter compared with $1.1
          million in the prior year quarter as operating results from all but
          one facility in 1994 were lower than the previous year because of
          lower sales volumes and, on solid hazardous waste derived fuel, lower
          margins.  Losses from resource recovery operations increased compared
          with the prior year quarter because of lower revenues and increased
          depreciation charges.

               Year-to-date - The Environmental Services segment reported an
          operating loss of $3.1 million for the six months ended June 30, 1994
          compared with an operating loss of $217,000 in the prior year period. 
          The hazardous waste processing facilities had operating earnings of
          $244,000 in the current period compared with $2.2 million in the prior
          year period as operating results from all facilities were lower than
          the previous year because of abnormally severe winter weather
          conditions and lower sales volumes and, on solid hazardous waste
          derived fuel, lower margins.  In March 1994, the Company sold its
          Illinois hazardous waste processing facility for $1 million.  No gain

                                           -14-<PAGE>





          or loss was recognized on the transaction.  Resource recovery
          operations declined $1.3 million to an operating loss of $590,000 in
          the current period primarily as a result of a 14% decrease in solid
          hazardous waste derived fuel volumes burned and higher professional
          fees.  The decrease in solid hazardous waste derived fuel volumes was
          primarily the result of shortages of available volumes because of
          competitive market conditions. 

             Corporate

               Second quarter - Corporate general and administrative expenses
          were $7.6 million in the second quarter of 1994 compared with $8.2
          million in the same period of the prior year which included a $1.7
          million charge to accrue the estimated postretirement health care
          benefits calculated under SFAS No. 106 in excess of claims incurred. 
          No such charge was required in the current period.

               Miscellaneous income in the second quarter of 1994 included  $2.3
          million from realization of a gain contingency stemming from the 1988
          acquisition of Moore McCormack.

               Year-to-date -  Corporate general and administrative expenses for
          the first six months of 1994 were  substantially below the prior year
          period primarily because 1993 included a $3.5 million charge to accrue
          the estimated postretirement health care benefit calculated under SFAS
          No. 106.

               Miscellaneous income and expense during 1994 included the $2.3
          million gain mentioned above and first quarter charges totaling $1.7
          million in conjunction with the disposition of lawsuits.


          Liquidity and Capital Resources

             The discussion of liquidity and capital resources included on pages
          37 through 47 of the Company's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year
          ended December 31, 1993, as amended by Form 10-K/A dated May 11, 1994,
          should be read in conjunction with the discussion of liquidity and
          capital resources contained herein.

             The Company's Revolving Credit Facility totals $200 million and
          matures in November 1996.  The Revolving Credit Facility includes $20
          million of borrowing capacity that is restricted solely for contingent
          obligations under an agreement between the Company and the U.S.
          Maritime Administration related to certain shipping operations owned
          previously by Moore McCormack.  The facility also includes the
          issuance of standby letters of credit up to a maximum of $95 million. 
          Substantially all of the Company's assets are pledged to secure this
          facility.  At June 30, 1994, $58.6 million of borrowings and $50.3
          million of letters of credit were outstanding under the Revolving
          Credit Facility, leaving $71.1 million of unused and unrestricted
          capacity.

             On May 1, 1994 the Company utilized borrowings under its Revolving
          Credit Facility to redeem the remaining $45 million outstanding
          principal amount of the Company's 12%  Notes.  The Company had
          previously utilized borrowings under its Revolving Credit Facility to
          redeem $45 million of the 12% Notes in January 1994.  Other borrowings
          under the Company's Revolving Credit Facility were utilized to fund
          working capital requirements (primarily seasonal increases in
          inventory and accounts receivable) and to invest approximately $13.8
          million in plant, property and equipment.  In late January 1994, the
          Company realized approximately $82 million in net proceeds from the
          sale of 1,725,000 shares of a new issue of preferred stock.  The net
          proceeds were used to prepay an $18 million promissory note due in
          March 1994 and to reduce borrowings under the Company's Revolving
          Credit Facility.


                                           -15-<PAGE>





             During the first half of 1993, the Company utilized internally
          generated cash flow from operations, including a $15.7 million federal
          income tax refund from the carryback to prior years of the 1992 tax
          loss and $6.3 million from asset sales primarily to (i) finance the
          seasonal build-up of inventories, (ii) make scheduled debt principal
          payments of $10.3 million and (iii) make investments of approximately
          $10.5 million in property, plant and equipment.

             Changes in Financial Condition

               The change in the financial condition of the Company between
          December 31, 1993 and June 30, 1994 reflects the realization of
          approximately $82 million in net proceeds from the sale of a new issue
          of preferred stock which was used to pay down debt, including $18
          million classified as current maturities of long-term debt, and to
          fund working capital requirements and capital expenditures.  Accounts
          and notes receivable increased because of the additional sales
          activity occurring in the summer construction season relative to the
          slower winter months.  The increase in inventories reflects the
          typical seasonal build-up in cement inventories in preparation for the
          peak selling months in the second and third quarters.  Other
          liabilities and deferred credits decreased because of  payments made
          in conjunction with the shipping operations formerly owned by Moore
          McCormack and other obligations.

             Known Events, Trends and Uncertainties

               Environmental Matters

               The Company is subject to extensive Federal, state and local air,
          water and other environmental laws and regulations.  These constantly
          changing laws regulate the discharge of materials into the environment
          and may require the Company to remove or mitigate the environmental
          effects of the disposal or release of certain substances at the
          Company's various operating facilities.

               The Federal Water Pollution Control Act, commonly known as the
          Clean Water Act, provides comprehensive federal regulation of various
          sources of water pollution.  The Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990
          provided comprehensive federal regulation of various sources of air
          pollution, and established a new federal operating permit program for
          virtually all manufacturing operations.  The Clean Air Act Amendments
          will likely result in increased capital and operational expenses for
          the Company in the future, the amounts of which are not presently
          determinable.  By 1995, the Company's U.S. operations will have to
          submit detailed permit applications and pay recurring permit fees.  In
          addition, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA) is
          developing air toxics regulations for a broad spectrum of industrial
          sectors, including portland cement manufacturing.  U.S. EPA has
          indicated that the new maximum available control technology standards
          could require significant reduction of air pollutants below existing
          levels prevalent in the industry.  Management has no reason to
          believe, however, that these new standards would place the Company at
          a competitive disadvantage.  The Comprehensive Environmental Response,
          Compensation, and Liability Act of 1980 (CERCLA), as amended by the
          Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986 (SARA), as well
          as analogous laws in certain states, create joint and several
          liability for the cost of cleaning up or correcting releases to the
          environment of designated hazardous substances.  Among those who may
          be held jointly and severally liable are those who generated the
          waste, those who arranged for disposal, those who owned the disposal
          site or facility at the time of disposal and current owners.

               Hazardous waste processing facilities and the cement plants that
          burn hazardous waste derived fuel (HWDF), by definition, involve
          materials that have been designated as hazardous wastes.  The
          Company's utilization of HWDF in some of its cement kilns has
          necessitated the familiarization of its work force with the more

                                           -16-<PAGE>





          exacting requirements and varying interpretations of applicable
          environmental laws and regulations with respect to human health and
          the environment.  The failure to observe the exacting requirements of
          these laws and regulations could jeopardize the Company's hazardous
          waste management permits and, under certain circumstances, may expose
          the Company to significant liabilities and costs of cleaning up
          releases of hazardous wastes into the environment or claims by
          employees or others alleging exposure to toxic or hazardous
          substances.  Management believes that the Company's current procedures
          and practices for handling and management of materials are generally
          consistent with industry standards and legal requirements and that
          appropriate precautions are taken to protect employees and others from
          harmful exposure to hazardous materials.  However, because of the
          complexity of operations and legal requirements, there can be no
          assurance that past or future operations will not result in
          operational errors, violations, remediation liabilities or claims by
         employees or others alleging exposure to toxic or hazardous materials.
          Owners and operators of industrial facilities and those who handle,
          store or dispose of hazardous substances may be subject to fines or
          other actions imposed by the U.S. EPA and corresponding state
          regulatory agencies for violations of laws or regulations relating to
          those substances.  The Company has incurred fines imposed by various
          environmental regulatory agencies in the past.

               In June 1992, the Company's Knoxville, Tennessee cement plant
          submitted to the U.S. EPA a Boiler and Industrial Furnace Certificate
          of Compliance, a lengthy filing made to allow the plant to continue to
          burn hazardous waste derived fuels.  In a Notice of Violation (NOV)
          dated April 12, 1994, the U.S. EPA Region IV asserted that certain
          additional information should have been included in the Certificate of
          Compliance and, consequently, that the Company is in violation of
          certain requirements of RCRA.  The Company has filed a  response to
          the NOV.   Although U.S. EPA did not propose any fines or penalties in
          the NOV, the NOV noted that RCRA authorizes U.S. EPA to assess
          penalties of up to $25,000 per day for each violation of RCRA
          regulations.   The U.S. EPA has not yet indicated how it might proceed
          in pursuing its allegations or what penalties, if any, it might seek. 
          Based on information developed to date, the Company believes that this
          matter should be resolved without any material fines or penalties.

               Cement kiln dust - Industrial operations have been conducted at
          some of the Company's cement manufacturing facilities for almost 100
          years.  Many of the raw materials, products and by-products associated
          with the operation of any industrial facility, including those for the
          production of cement or concrete products, may contain chemical
          elements or compounds that are designated as hazardous substances. 
          Some examples of such materials are the trace metals present in cement
          kiln dust (CKD), chromium present in refractory brick formerly widely
          used to line cement kilns and general purpose solvents.  Under the
          Bevill amendment, CKD is currently exempt from management as a
          hazardous waste, except CKD which is produced by kilns burning HWDF
          and which fails to meet certain criteria.  In December 1993, as
          required by the Bevill amendment, the U.S. EPA issued a Report to
          Congress on CKD and hearings were held on February 15, 1994.  The U.S.
          EPA is expected to issue its decision on the regulatory status of CKD
          by January 31, 1995.   A change in the status of CKD would require the
          cement industry to develop new methods for handling this high volume,
          low toxicity waste.  Also, CKD that is infused with water may produce
          a leachate with an alkalinity high enough to be classified as
          hazardous and may also leach certain hazardous trace metals present
          therein.  Leaching has led to the classification of at least three CKD
          disposal sites of other companies as federal Superfund sites.  Several
          of the Company's inactive CKD disposal sites around the country have
          been under investigation by the Company, as well as in some cases by
          federal and state environmental agencies, to determine if remedial
          action is required at any of the sites and, if so, the extent of any
          such remedial action.  The Company has recorded charges totaling $9.7
          million as the estimated remediation cost for one of these sites.

                                           -17-<PAGE>





               On a voluntary basis, without administrative or legal action
          being taken, the Company is also investigating two other inactive Ohio
          CKD disposal sites.  The two additional sites in question were part of
          a cement manufacturing facility that was owned and operated by a now
          dissolved cement company from 1924 to 1945 and by a division of USX
          Corporation (USX) from 1945 to 1975.  On September 24, 1993, the
          Company filed a complaint against USX, alleging that USX is a
          potentially responsible party under CERCLA and under applicable Ohio
          law, and therefore jointly and severally liable for costs associated
          with cleanup of the larger of the two sites (USX Site).  Based on the
          limited information available as of December 31, 1993, the Company has
          received two preliminary engineering estimates of the potential
          magnitude of the remediation costs for the USX Site, $8 million and
          $32 million, depending on the assumptions used.

               The Company intends to vigorously pursue its right to
          contribution from USX for cleanup costs under CERCLA and Ohio law. 
          The Company believes that USX is a responsible party because it owned
          and operated the USX Site at the time of disposal of the hazardous
          substances, arranged for the disposal of the hazardous substances and
          transported the hazardous substances to the USX Site.  Therefore, the
          Company believes there is a reasonable basis for the apportionment of
          cleanup costs relating to the USX Site between the Company and USX
          with USX shouldering substantially all of the cleanup costs because,
          based on the facts known at this time, the Company itself disposed of
          no CKD at the USX Site and is potentially liable under CERCLA only
          because of its current ownership of the USX Site.  These
          determinations, however, are preliminary, and are based only upon
          facts available to the Company prior to completing discovery.

               Under CERCLA and applicable Ohio law, a court generally applies
          equitable principles in determining the amount of contribution which a
          potentially responsible party must provide with respect to a cleanup
          of hazardous substances and such determination is within the sole
          discretion of the court.  In addition, no regulatory agency has
          directly asserted a claim against the Company as the owner of the USX
          Site requiring it to remediate the property, and no cleanup of the USX
          Site has yet been initiated.

               No substantial investigative work has been undertaken at other
          CKD sites.  Although data necessary to enable the Company to estimate
          total remediation costs is not available, the Company acknowledges
          that the ultimate cost to remediate the CKD disposal problem in Ohio
          could be significantly more than the amounts reserved.

               While the Company's facilities at several locations are presently
          the subject of various local, state and federal environmental
          proceedings and inquiries, including being named a potentially
          responsible party with regard to Superfund sites, primarily at several
          locations to which they are alleged to have shipped materials for
          disposal, most of these matters are in their preliminary stages and
          final results may not be determined for years.  Management of the
          Company believes, however, based solely upon the information the
          Company has developed to date, that known matters can be successfully
          resolved in cooperation with local, state and federal agencies without
          having a material adverse effect, either individually or in the
          aggregate, upon the consolidated financial statements of the Company. 
          However, because the Company's results of operations vary considerably
          with construction activity and other factors, it is possible that
          future charges for environmental contingencies could, depending on
          their timing and magnitude, have a material adverse impact on the
          Company's results of operations in a particular period.  Until all
          environmental studies, investigations, remediation work and
          negotiations with potential sources of recovery have been completed,
          however, it is impossible to determine the ultimate cost of resolving
          these environmental matters.

               Other Contingencies

                                           -18-<PAGE>





               Discontinued Moore McCormack Operations - In conjunction with the
          acquisition of Moore McCormack in 1988, the Company assumed certain
          liabilities for operations that Moore McCormack had previously
          discontinued.  These liabilities, some of which are contingent,
          represent guarantees and undertakings related primarily to Moore
          McCormack's divestiture of certain businesses in 1986 and 1987. 
          Payments relating to liabilities from these discontinued operations
          were $1.1 million in the first six months of 1994, $2.4 million in
          fiscal 1993 and $2.5 million in fiscal 1992.  The Company is either a
          guarantor or directly liable under certain charter hire debt
          agreements totaling approximately $9 million at June 30, 1994,
          declining by approximately $4 million per year thereafter through
          February 1997.  Although the estimated liability under these
          guaranties has been included in the liability for discontinued Moore
          McCormack operations, enforcement of the guaranty, while not resulting
          in a charge to earnings, would result in a substantial cash outlay by
          the Company.  However, the Company believes it currently has
          sufficient borrowing capacity under its Revolving Credit Facility to
          fund these guaranties, if required, as well as meet its other
          borrowing needs for the foreseeable future.

               Restructured Accounts Receivable - For many years, the Company
          has from time-to-time offered extended credit terms to certain of its
          customers, including converting trade receivables into longer term
          notes receivable.  This practice became more prevalent during 1992 and
          continued during 1993, particularly in the southern California market
          area where many of the Company's customers have been adversely
          affected by the prolonged recession in the construction industry in
          that region.  A group of four such customers were indebted to the
          Company at June 30, 1994 in the amount of $19.3 million.  All of the
          notes and a portion of the accounts receivable, approximately 80% of
          the $19.3 million, are collateralized.  Another customer, previously
          included in this group, retired its note receivable with a June 1994
          payment.

               During 1993, two of these customers defaulted on the payment
          terms of their notes.  The Company restructured its agreement with one
          of the defaulting customers late in the second quarter of 1993 and
          that customer was in compliance with the terms of the restructured
          agreement as of June 30, 1994.  The Company has stopped selling cement
          on credit to the other customer in default and is presently evaluating
          its options for collection of outstanding balances.

               A third customer in the California group, while not in default on
          its note, had difficulty in maintaining prompt payment for its cement
          purchases and restructuring discussions were commenced in late 1993. 
          In March 1994, the Company withdrew a preliminary purchase proposal to
          acquire certain ready-mixed concrete and aggregate assets of this
          customer but restructuring discussions are continuing.  The Company is
          contractually committed to supply up to 90% of the cement requirements
          of the other non-defaulting customer on extended credit terms,
          provided this customer remains current with respect to both current
          purchases and payments on its note.

               In the opinion of management, the Company is adequately reserved
         for credit risks related to its potentially uncollectible receivables.
          However, the Company continues to assess its allowance for doubtful
          accounts and may increase or decrease its periodic provision for
          doubtful accounts as additional information regarding the
          collectibility of these and other accounts become available.

               Labor Matters - The drivers at the Company's Transit Mixed
          Concrete Company (Transmix) ready-mixed concrete operations in
          southern California are represented by Local Union No. 420 of the
          International Brotherhood of Teamsters (the Teamsters).  Transmix's
          Collective Bargaining Agreement with the Teamsters expired in April
          1994 and on May 23, 1994, a new three year Collective Bargaining
          Agreement with the Teamsters was accepted by its union members. 

                                           -19-<PAGE>





             The hourly workers at the Company's Fairborn, Ohio cement plant are
          represented by the International Brotherhood of Boilermakers, Cement,
          Lime, Gypsum and Allied Workers Division Local Lodge No. D-357 (the
          Boilermakers).  On March 1, 1994 the Fairborn plant's collective
          bargaining agreement with the Boilermakers expired.  The Boilermakers
          are continuing to work under the expired agreement while negotiations
          on a new contract are underway.






























































                                           -20-<PAGE>





                               PART II.   OTHER INFORMATION

          Item 1.  Legal Proceedings

          (a)  The information appearing under "Management's Discussion and
               Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations -
               Liquidity and Capital Resources - Known Events, Trends and
               Uncertainties - Environmental Matters" is incorporated hereunder
               by reference, pursuant to Rule 12b-23. 

          (b)  In early March 1994, the Company and a number of other cement
               producers and industry associations received requests for
               information (Civil Investigative Demand or CID) relating to the
               period from 1991 to April 1994 from the Antitrust Division of the
               U.S. Department of Justice (DOJ).  The DOJ is investigating
               possible price-fixing and market allocation by cement producers.
               The commencement of such an investigation does not necessarily
               indicate that an enforcement action will be commenced against any
               cement producer.  The Company has produced documents and answered
               certain interrogatories in response to the CID.  Because of the
               early stage of the investigation, it is not possible to predict
               the outcome of this matter.

          (c)  Litigation was initiated in 1992 by former shareholders of a
               Browning-Ferris Industries, Inc. (BFI) subsidiary acquired from
               BFI by the Company and included claims asserting, among other
               things, that an installment of a conditional deferred payment
               obligation which the Company believed to be in the amount of $9.0
               million was actually in the amount of $10.0 million, that
               adjustments to the purchase price and certain additional amounts
               aggregating approximately $500,000 were payable to such
               shareholders, that an accounting must be provided to such
               shareholders, and that the defendants acted intentionally and
               maliciously and therefore that the shareholders were entitled to
               punitive damages.  (Benita H. O'Meara, an individual; Ernest O.
               Roehl, an individual, v. Southdown Environmental Systems, Inc., a
               Delaware corporation, aka BFI Environmental Treatment Systems,
               Inc., a Delaware corporation, aka Southdown Environmental
               Treatment Systems, Inc., a corporation; Does 1 through 50,
               inclusive) (Superior Court of the State of California for the
               County of Los Angeles - Case No. BC 056904) The Company notified
               BFI of its claim for indemnity under the stock purchase agreement
               but BFI denied the Company's claim.  The Company responded timely
               to the suit and filed a cross-complaint and a new lawsuit against
               BFI seeking judicial clarification as to BFI's liability under
               the indemnity agreement, damages and other relief.  (Southdown,
               Inc., a Louisiana corporation, v. Browning-Ferris Industries,
               Inc., a Delaware corporation; CECOS International, Inc., a New
               York corporation; and Does 1 through 50, inclusive) (Superior
               Court of the State of California for the County of Los Angeles -
               Case No. BC 063261)  On January 3, 1994 the parties orally agreed
               to an out-of-court settlement pursuant to which all claims of the
               former shareholders were resolved.  A dispute arose, however,
               between BFI and the Company as to which party between them would
               bear what portion of the up to $1 million additional amount
               potentially owed to the former shareholders.  Following a hearing
               on the matter, the trial court confirmed in June 1994 that BFI
               was liable for 70% of the additional amount potentially owed to
               the former shareholders.

          (d)  The Company owns two inactive CKD disposal sites in Ohio that
               were formerly owned by a division of USX.  In September 1993, the
               Company filed a complaint against USX alleging that with respect
               to the larger of these two sites (the USX Site), USX is a
               potentially responsible party and therefore jointly and severally
               liable for costs associated with cleanup of the USX Site. 
               (Southdown, Inc. v. USX Corporation, Case No. C-3-93-354, U.S.
               District Court, Southern District of Ohio Western Division)  USX

                                           -21-<PAGE>





               answered the complaint in November 1993 by filing a motion to
               dismiss the lawsuit.  In March 1994 the Magistrate Judge issued a
               report recommending denial of USX's motion to dismiss.   In April
               1994, the Court recommitted the Magistrate Judge's report to the
               Magistrate Judge for reconsideration of all matters raised by
               USX's objections and the Company's response thereto.   On July 5,
               1994, the Court consolidated this case with the case captioned
               Greene Environmental Coalition v. Southdown, Inc., Case No. C-3-
               93-270 under the caption In Re Southdown, Inc., Litigation, Case
               No. C-3-93-270.   On July 13, 1994, the Magistrate Judge issued a
               Supplemental Report and Recommendation recommending that USX's
               motion to dismiss be denied in its entirety, reconfirming his
               previous recommendation.   Based on advice of counsel, the
               Company believes there is a reasonable basis for the
               apportionment of cleanup costs relating to the USX Site between
               the Company and USX, with USX shouldering substantially all of
               the cleanup costs because, based on the facts known at this time,
               the Company itself disposed of no CKD at the USX Site and is
               potentially liable under CERCLA because of its current ownership
               of the USX Site.  These determinations, however, are preliminary,
               and are based only upon facts available to the Company prior to
               completing discovery.  As noted below, a court-supervised
               settlement conference has been ordered by the Court for September
               9, 1994 in the consolidated case In Re Southdown, Inc.,
               Litigation.

          (e)  In late July 1993, a citizens environmental group brought suit in
               U.S. District Court for the Southern District of Ohio, Western
               Division (Greene Environmental Coalition, Inc. (GEC), an Ohio
               not-for-profit corporation v. Southdown, Inc., a Louisiana
               corporation - Case No. C-3-93-270) alleging the Company is in
               violation of the Clean Water Act by virtue of the discharge of
               pollutants in connection with the runoff of stormwater and
               groundwater from an inactive cement kiln dust disposal site (the
               USX Site) and is seeking injunctive relief, unspecified civil
               penalties and attorneys' fees, including expert witness fees.  In
               August 1993, the Company moved to dismiss the complaint. 
               Pursuant to a preliminary pretrial conference order issued by the
               court, the environmental group provided the Company with a
               written settlement demand in early October 1993.  On November 12,
               1993, the Company rejected the environmental group's settlement
               demand without offering a counterproposal.  On March 30, 1994,
               the court denied the Company's motion to dismiss.  Subsequently,
               the Company filed an answer to the GEC complaint and also filed a
               third-party complaint against USX alleging that: (i) the Company
               is entitled to be indemnified by USX for all costs and civil
               penalties the Company may incur; and (ii) the Company is entitled
               to contribution from USX for USX's proportionate share of the
               costs and civil penalties the Company may incur.  On June 30,
               1994, third-party defendant USX filed a motion to dismiss the
               third-party complaint filed against it by the Company.  The
               Company will respond to USX's motion on or before August 24,
               1994.  A court-supervised settlement conference has been ordered
               by the Court for September 9, 1994 in the consolidated case In Re
               Southdown, Inc., Litigation.

          Item 6.  Exhibits and Reports on Form 8-K.

          (a)  Exhibits

             11     Statement of Computation of Per Share Earnings.
             99.1   Southdown, Inc. Pension Plan as adopted on May 19, 1994.
             99.2   Southdown, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan as amended and
                    restated on July 1, 1990.

          (b)  Reports on Form 8-K
             


                                           -22-<PAGE>





             No reports on Form 8-K were filed during the quarter ended June 30,
             1994.



































































                                           -23-<PAGE>





                                        SIGNATURES

             Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of
          1934, the Registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its
          behalf by the undersigned thereunto duly authorized.



                                                    SOUTHDOWN, INC.  
                                                      (Registrant)



          Date:  August 10, 1994                  By:  JAMES L. PERSKY
                                                    --------------------
                                                    James L. Persky
                                               Senior Vice President-Finance
                                               (Principal Financial Officer)




          Date:  August 10, 1994                  By:   ALLAN KORSAKOV
                                                     --------------------
                                                     Allan Korsakov
                                                  Corporate Controller
                                               (Principal Accounting Officer)










































                                           -24-<PAGE>


    EXHIBIT 11

                           SOUTHDOWN, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
                    STATEMENT OF COMPUTATION OF PER SHARE EARNINGS
                 (in millions, except per share amounts - Unaudited)

                                             Three Months     Six Months
                                                 Ended           Ended
                                               June 30,        June 30,   
                                           ---------------  ----------------
                                             1994    1993    1994     1993
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------
   Earnings (loss) for primary earnings
     per share:
      Earnings (loss) before cumulative
        effect of a change in accounting
        principle and preferred stock
        dividends                           $11.0   $  2.6  $ 8.8    $ (1.8)
     Preferred stock dividends               (2.4)    (1.2)  (4.5)     (2.5)
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------
      Earnings (loss) for primary earnings
       per share before cumulative effect
        of a change in accounting principle   8.6      1.4    4.3      (4.3)
     Cumulative effect of a change in
      accounting principle                     -        -      -      (48.5)
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------
   Net earnings (loss) for primary earnings
     per share                              $ 8.6   $  1.4  $ 4.3    $(52.8)
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------

   Earnings (loss) for fully diluted
     earnings per share:
      Earnings (loss) before cumulative
        effect of a change in accounting
        principle and preferred stock
        dividends                           $11.0   $  2.6  $ 8.8    $ (1.8)
      Antidilutive preferred stock
        dividends                              -      (1.2)  (4.5)     (2.5)
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------
        Earnings (loss) for primary earnings
         per share before cumulative effect
         of a change in accounting principle 11.0      1.4    4.3      (4.3)
     Cumulative effect of a change in 
      accounting principle                     -        -      -      (48.5)
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------
   Net earnings (loss) for fully diluted
     earnings per share                     $11.0   $  1.4  $ 4.3    $(52.8)
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------<PAGE>
   SOUTHDOWN, INC.
   EXHIBIT 11 - Page 2
   (in millions, except per share amounts - Unaudited)

                                             Three Months     Six Months
                                                 Ended           Ended
                                               June 30,        June 30,
                                           ---------------  ----------------
                                            1994     1993     1994     1993
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------

   Average shares outstanding:
     Common stock                            17.2     16.9   17.2      16.9
      Common stock equivalent from assumed
        exercise of stock options and
        warrants (treasury stock method)      0.7        -    0.7        - 
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------
     Total for primary earnings per share    17.9     16.9   17.9      16.9

     Other potentially dilutive securities:
        - Assumed conversion of Series A
         convertible preferred stock at
         one-half share of common stock       1.0      1.0    1.0       1.0
        - Assumed conversion of Series B
         convertible preferred stock at
         2.5 shares of common stock           2.3      2.4    2.4       2.4
        - Assumed conversion of the Series D
         convertible preferred stock at
         1.51 shares of common stock          2.6       -     2.2         -
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------
     Total for fully diluted earnings
      per share                              23.8     20.3   23.5      20.3

     Less:  Antidilutive securities
         Series A preferred stock              -      (1.0)  (1.0)     (1.0)
         Series B preferred stock              -      (2.4)  (2.4)     (2.4)
         Series D preferred stock              -        -    (2.2)       - 
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------
                                             23.8     16.9   17.9      16.9
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------

   Earnings (loss) per share:
   Primary
     Earnings (loss) before cumulative
      effect of a change in accounting
      principle                            $ 0.48  $ 0.08   $ 0.24  $(0.26)
     Cumulative effect of a change in
      accounting principle, net                -       -        -    (2.86)
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------
                                           $ 0.48  $ 0.08   $ 0.24  $(3.12)
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------
   Fully diluted
     Earnings (loss) before cumulative
      effect of a change in accounting
      principle                            $ 0.46  $ 0.08   $ 0.24  $(0.26)
     Cumulative effect of a change in
      accounting principle, net                -       -        -    (2.86)
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------
                                           $ 0.46  $ 0.08   $ 0.24  $(3.12)
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------
                                           ------  -------  -------  -------<PAGE>
































                                          SOUTHDOWN, INC.

                                     PENSION PLAN<PAGE>





                                  TABLE OF CONTENTS

                                      ARTICLE I
                                     DEFINITIONS

                                      ARTICLE II
                             TOP HEAVY AND ADMINISTRATION

          2.1  TOP HEAVY PLAN REQUIREMENTS                          21

          2.2  DETERMINATION OF TOP HEAVY STATUS                    21

          2.3  POWERS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMPLOYER          25

          2.4  DESIGNATION OF ADMINISTRATIVE AUTHORITY              25

          2.5  ALLOCATION AND DELEGATION OF RESPONSIBILITIES        26

          2.6  POWERS AND DUTIES OF THE ADMINISTRATOR               26

          2.7  RECORDS AND REPORTS                                  27

          2.8  APPOINTMENT OF ADVISORS                              27

          2.9  INFORMATION FROM EMPLOYER                            28

          2.10 PAYMENT OF EXPENSES                                  28
           
          2.11 MAJORITY ACTIONS                                     28

          2.12 CLAIMS PROCEDURE                                     28

          2.13 CLAIMS REVIEW PROCEDURE                              28

                                     ARTICLE III
                                     ELIGIBILITY

          3.1  CONDITIONS OF ELIGIBILITY                            30

          3.2  EFFECTIVE DATE OF PARTICIPATION                      30

          3.3  DETERMINATION OF ELIGIBILITY                         30

          3.4  TERMINATION OF ELIGIBILITY                           30

                                      ARTICLE IV
                              CONTRIBUTION AND VALUATION

          4.1  PAYMENT OF CONTRIBUTIONS                             32

          4.2  ACTUARIAL METHODS                                    32<PAGE>





                                      ARTICLE V
                                       BENEFITS

          5.1  RETIREMENT BENEFITS                                  33

          5.2  MINIMUM BENEFIT REQUIREMENT FOR TOP HEAVY PLAN       35

          5.3  PAYMENT OF RETIREMENT BENEFITS                       36

          5.4  DISABILITY RETIREMENT BENEFITS                       36

          5.5  DEATH BENEFITS                                       38

          5.6  TERMINATION OF EMPLOYMENT BEFORE RETIREMENT          39

          5.7  DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS                             42

          5.8  DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS UPON DEATH                  46

          5.9  TIME OF SEGREGATION OR DISTRIBUTION                  48

          5.10 DIRECT ROLLOVERS                                     48

          5.11 DISTRIBUTION FOR MINOR BENEFICIARY                   49

          5.12 MINIMUM BENEFITS PAYABLE                             49

          5.13 LOCATION OF PARTICIPANT OR BENEFICIARY UNKNOWN       49

          5.14 EFFECT OF SOCIAL SECURITY ACT                        50

          5.15 LIMITATIONS ON BENEFITS                              50

          5.16 SUSPENSION OF BENEFITS                               50

          5.17 RETIREMENT BECAUSE OF PLANT SHUTDOWN OR LAYOFF       53

                                      ARTICLE VI
                             CODE SECTION 415 LIMITATIONS

          6.1  ANNUAL BENEFIT                                       55

          6.2  MAXIMUM ANNUAL BENEFIT                               55

          6.3  ADJUSTMENTS TO ANNUAL BENEFIT AND LIMITATIONS        57

          6.4  ANNUAL BENEFIT NOT IN EXCESS OF $10,000              58

          6.5  PARTICIPATION OR SERVICE REDUCTIONS                  58

          6.6  MULTIPLE PLAN REDUCTION                              59 

          6.7  INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE                           61<PAGE>





                                     ARTICLE VII
                                    PLAN AMENDMENT

          7.1   AMENDMENT                                           63

                                     ARTICLE VIII
                                   PLAN TERMINATION

          8.1   TERMINATION                                         65

          8.2   LIMITATION OF BENEFITS ON EARLY TERMINATION         68

          8.3   PRE-TERMINATION RESTRICTIONS                        70

                                      ARTICLE IX
                     MERGER, CONSOLIDATION OR TRANSFER OF ASSETS

          9.1   REQUIREMENTS                                        73

                                      ARTICLE X
                                    MISCELLANEOUS

          10.1  PARTICIPANT'S RIGHTS                                74

          10.2  ALIENATION                                          74

          10.3  CONSTRUCTION OF PLAN                                75

          10.4  GENDER AND NUMBER                                   75

          10.5  LEGAL ACTION                                        75

          10.6  PROHIBITION AGAINST DIVERSION OF FUNDS              75

          10.7  BONDING                                             76

          10.8  EMPLOYER'S AND TRUSTEE'S PROTECTIVE CLAUSE          76

          10.9  INSURER'S PROTECTIVE CLAUSE                         76

          10.10 RECEIPT AND RELEASE FOR PAYMENTS                    76

          10.11 ACTION BY THE EMPLOYER                              77

          10.12 NAMED FIDUCIARIES AND ALLOCATION OF RESPONSIBILITY  77

          10.13 HEADINGS                                            77

          10.14 APPROVAL BY INTERNAL REVENUE SERVICE                78

          10.15 UNIFORMITY                                          78<PAGE>





                                   SOUTHDOWN, INC.
                                     PENSION PLAN

          THIS  PLAN,  hereby  adopted  this  19th  day  of  May,  1994, by
          Southdown, Inc. (herein referred to as the "Employer").

                                 W I T N E S S E T H:

          WHEREAS,  the  Employer  heretofore  established  a  Pension Plan
          effective  February  16, 1985, (hereinafter called the "Effective
          D a t e ")  known  as  Salaried  Employees'  Retirement  Plan  of
          Southwestern  Portland  Cement Company and which plan was renamed
          on  February  13,  1992  as  Southdown, Inc. Pension Plan (herein
          referred  to  as  the  "Plan") in recognition of the contribution
          made  to  its  successful  operation by its employees and for the
          exclusive benefit of its eligible employees; and

          WHEREAS,  the  Retirement  Income  Plan  for  Non-Bargaining Unit
          Employees  of  Milwaukee  Solvay  Coke Co.; the Retirement Income
          Plan  for  Hourly  Employees  of  Milwaukee  Solvay Coke Co.; the
          Pension  Plan  for  Production  and  Maintenance Employees of the
          Carbon  Brick  Plant  of  the Carbon Block Division of the Carbon
          Limestone  Company;  the Pension Plan for Non-Bargaining Salaried
          Employees  of  the Carbon Limestone Company; and the Pension Plan
          for  Bargaining  Unit  Employees  of the Carbon Limestone Company
          were  merged  into  the Plan effective December 31, 1988; and the
          Pension  Plan  for Employees of Pelto Oil Company was merged into
          the  Plan  effective  December 31, 1989; and the Pension Plan for
          Employees  of  Transmix Corp., and the Florida Mining & Materials
          Corporation  Amended Pension Plan and Trust Agreement were merged
          into  the  Plan  effective  December  31,  1990  (all  such plans
          aforementioned   as  being  merged  into  the  Plan  referred  to
          hereafter as the "Merged Plans"); and

          WHEREAS,  the  Plan  and  certain of the Merged Plans (the "Model
          Amendment  Plans") were amended in order to adopt Model Amendment
          3 of Internal Revenue Service Notice 88-131 and were subsequently
          amended  to  adopt  Model Amendment 2 of Internal Revenue Service
          Notice 88-131, as provided for in Internal Revenue Service Notice
          89-92,  which  provided  that  in calculating the Accrued Benefit
          (including  the  right to any optional benefit provided under the
          Model  Amendment  Plans)  of  any Participant in any of the Model
          Amendment  Plans  who  is a Highly Compensated Employee (a "Model
          A m e ndment  Plan  Highly  Compensated  Employee"),  such  Model
          Amendment  Plan  Highly  Compensated  Employee  shall  accrue  no
          additional  benefit  under  the Model Amendment Plans on or after
          May  31,  1989 to the extent that such additional benefit accrual
          exceeds  the  benefit  which would otherwise accrue in accordance
          with  the terms of the Model Amendment Plans as amended to comply
          with the Tax Reform Act of 1986; and

          WHEREAS, the Plan was previously amended and restated on February

                                          1<PAGE>





          13,  1992, effective January 1, 1989 except as otherwise provided
          in such restatement; and

          WHEREAS, the Employer wishes to amend the Plan in order to comply
          with the certain revisions to the Code and the Act; and

          WHEREAS,  under  the  terms  of  the  Plan,  the Employer has the
          ability  to  amend  the  Plan, provided the Trustee joins in such
          amendment if the provisions of the Plan affecting the Trustee are
          amended;

          NOW,  THEREFORE,  effective  January 1, 1989, except as otherwise
          provided,  the  Employer in accordance with the provisions of the
          Plan  pertaining to amendments thereof, hereby amends the Plan in
          its entirety and restates the Plan to provide as follows:

                                      ARTICLE I
                                     DEFINITIONS

          1.1  "Accrued  Benefit"  on  behalf  of  any Participant shall be
          determined as follows:

          (a)  (i)  For  a Former Participant who has no service under this
          Plan  after  December  31,  1988,  the  Accrued  Benefit  will be
          determined under the terms of the Plan in effect at the time such
          Former  Participant  was  entitled to earn benefit accruals under
          the  Plan;  (ii)  for  a  Participant  with  at least one Hour of
          Service  in  a Plan Year beginning on or after December 31, 1988,
          the  Accrued Benefit will be determined in accordance with all of
          the following paragraphs of this section 1.1.
               
          (b) Basic Formula

               (i)  Except  as  modified  by  other provisions of this
               section  1.1, the amount of Accrued Benefit, calculated
               as  a  monthly  benefit commencing at Normal Retirement
               Date,  shall  be  equal  to the sum of (1) 1.0% of such
               Participant's  Average  Monthly Compensation multiplied
               by  the Participant's total number of Years of Service,
               plus  (2)  .65% of such Average Monthly Compensation in
               excess   of   one-twelfth   of   Covered   Compensation
               multiplied  by  the Participant's total number of Years
               of  Service  (up to a maximum of 35 years), computed to
               the nearest dollar.

               (ii)  Adjustment  for Florida Mining & Materials:  With
               respect  to a Participant who was an active participant
               in the Florida Mining and Materials Corporation Amended
               Pension  Plan  and  Trust  Agreement  ("Florida  Mining
               Plan")  on the date such plan was merged into the Plan,
               except  as  modified  by  other  provisions herein, the
               Accrued  Benefit  shall  be  equal  to    (1) the basic

                                          2<PAGE>





               formula  of  (b)(i) herein, provided, however, that the
               excess  benefit  of  (b)(i)(2)  will  be  based only on
               Compensation  and  Years  of Service after December 31,
               1989.

               (iii) Adjustment for Transmix Corp.:  With respect to a
               Participant  who  was  an active participant ("Transmix
               Participant")  in  the  Pension  Plan  for Employees of
               Transmix  Corp. ("Transmix Plan") on the date such plan
               was  merged  into the Plan, except as modified by other
               provisions  herein,  the Accrued Benefit shall be equal
               to  (1)  the basic formula of (b)(i) herein, applied to
               Years  of Service and Average Monthly Compensation only
               for years on or after January 1, 1989 for such Transmix
               Participant  who  is  a  Model  Amendment  Plan  Highly
               Compensated  Employee,  or  only  for years on or after
               J a n u a ry  1,  1990  for  any  other  such  Transmix
               Participant,  plus  (2)  the  benefit  accrued  by such
               T r ansmix  Participant  while  a  participant  in  the
               Transmix  Plan.    (Benefit  accruals  ceased under the
               T r a nsmix  Plan  for  all  Transmix  Participants  in
               accordance  with  Model  Amendment  3 for the 1989 plan
               y e ar.    Transmix  Participants,  other  than  highly
               compensated  employees,  accrued  a  benefit  under the
               Transmix Plan for the 1990 plan year.) 
            
               (iv) Adjustment for Pelto Oil Company:  With respect to
               a  Participant  who  was  an  active participant in the
               Pension Plan for Employees of Pelto Oil Company ("Pelto
               Plan")  on the date such plan was merged into the Plan,
               except  as  modified  by  other  provisions herein, the
               Accrued  Benefit  shall  be  equal  to    (1) the basic
               formula  of  (b)(i) herein, applied to Years of Service
               and Average Monthly Compensation only for periods after
               December  31,  1989, plus (2) the accrued benefit under
               such Pelto Plan as of December 31, 1989.  

               ( v )   Adjustment  for  Southwestern  Portland  Cement
               S a laried  Plan  Participants:    With  respect  to  a
               Participant  who was an active participant in this Plan
               on  December  31,  1988,  the  Accrued Benefit shall be
               equal  to  the greater of (a) the benefit determined in
               accordance  with  the  basic  formula  of (b)(i) herein
               based on all of such Participant's Years of Service, or
               (b)  the  sum  of  the  Participant's benefit under the
               terms  of  the  Plan  as  of December 31, 1988 plus the
               benefit determined in accordance with the basic formula
               of  (b)(i)  above  calculated  with respect to Years of
               Service  beginning after December 31, 1988, except that
               the  number  of Years of Service taken into account for
               determining  the  excess  amount  in (b)(i)(2) shall be
               limited  to  thirty-five (35) minus the number of Years

                                          3<PAGE>





               of Service completed by the Participant as of the close
               of the Plan Year beginning prior to January 1, 1989. 

               (vi)  Adjustment  for  certain  collectively  bargained
               units:  Accrued Benefits determined under the Plan will
               be  modified  in accordance with Appendix A, Appendix B
               or Appendix C for certain collectively bargained units,
               as described in such appendices.

               (vii)  Offset  by  Other  Plans:  The  Accrued  Benefit
               otherwise determined under this Plan will be reduced by
               the  monthly    accrued  benefit  of  any other defined
               benefit  pension plan to which the Employer contributes
               on  behalf  of  such  Participant  and which covers any
               service covered by this Plan.

          (c)  Minimum  benefit:   Notwithstanding other provisions of this
          section  1.1, for employees who were Participants of this Plan on
          February  12, 1992, the Accrued Benefit under this Plan shall not
          be  less  than  (1)  the  accrued  benefit  determined  under the
          provisions  of  this Plan as in effect on February 12, 1992, plus
          (2)  the  benefit  determined  under  the basic formula of (b)(i)
          h e rein,  applied  to  Years  of  Service  and  Average  Monthly
          Compensation only for periods after February 12, 1992.  
           
          (d) Maximum excess:  In calculating benefits under this Plan with
          respect  to  Plan  Years  beginning after May 27, 1986 (or if the
          Plan  existed on May 27, 1986, effective for Plan Years beginning
          after December 31, 1986), to the extent that the basic formula of
          (b)(i)  above would not otherwise satisfy the requirements of the
          Code  and  regulations, the amount of the excess shall not exceed
          the  maximum  excess  otherwise allowable under the provisions of
          the Code and regulations, multiplied by a fraction (not to exceed
          one), the numerator of which is the Participant's actual Years of
          Service  at  retirement  or  termination  of  employment  and the
          denominator of which is 35.  Such excess shall be further reduced
          (on  a  monthly  basis  to  reflect  the  month in which benefits
          commence)  by  1/15th  for  each  of the first five (5) years and
          1/30th  for each of the next five (5) years by which the starting
          date  of such benefit precedes the Social Security Retirement Age
          of  the  Participant, and reduced actuarially for each additional
          year thereafter.

          (e)  Limit  on compensation:  Unless otherwise provided under the
          Plan,  each Participant who is a section 401(a)(17) employee will
          have  his  accrued  benefit  under  this  Plan  determined as the
          greater  of  the  accrued  benefit determined for the Participant
          under  (1)  or  (2)  as  follows:  (1)  the Participant's accrued
          benefit determined with respect to the benefit formula applicable
          for  the  Plan  Year  beginning  on  or after January 1, 1994, as
          applied  to  the  Participant's total Years of Service taken into
          account  under  the Plan for the purposes of benefit accruals, or

                                          4<PAGE>





          (2)  the  sum  of (a) the Participant's accrued benefit as of the
          last  day of the last Plan Year beginning before January 1, 1994,
          f r o zen  in  accordance  with  section  1.401(a)(4)-13  of  the
          regulations, and adjusted by multiplying such frozen benefit by a
          fraction,  the numerator of which is the average compensation for
          the  section  401(a)(17) employee determined for the current year
          (as limited by section 401(a)(17)), using the same definition and
          compensation  formula  in  effect  as  December 31, 1993, and the
          denominator of which is the employee's average compensation as of
          December  31, 1993, using the definition and compensation formula
          in  effect  as  of  December  31, 1993; and (b) the Participant's
          accrued  benefit  determined under the benefit formula applicable
          for  the  Plan  Year  beginning  on  or after January 1, 1994, as
          applied  to  the Participant's Years of Service credited for Plan
          Years  beginning  on  or  after  January 1, 1994, for purposes of
          benefit  accruals.    For  purposes  of this paragraph, a section
          401(a)(17)  employee  means  an  employee  whose  current accrued
          benefit  as of a date on or after the first day of the first Plan
          Year  beginning  on  or  after  January  1,  1994,  is  based  on
          compensation  for  a year beginning prior to the first day of the
          first  Plan  Year  beginning  on  or  after January 1, 1994, that
          exceeded $150,000.

          (f) Accrued Benefit After Normal Retirement Age:  Notwithstanding
          the  above,  for  Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1987, a
          Participant's  Accrued  Benefit  at  the  close  of any Plan Year
          coinciding  with  or  next  following  his  attainment  of Normal
          Retirement  Age  shall be equal to the monthly retirement benefit
          determined  pursuant  to  this  section  1.1  based upon Years of
          Service  and Average Monthly Compensation determined at the close
          of any such Plan Year.

          ( g )    T op  Heavy  Minimum:    Notwithstanding  the  above,  a
          Participant's Accrued Benefit derived from Employer contributions
          shall  not  be  less  than  the  minimum accrued benefit, if any,
          provided pursuant to Section 5.2.

          (h)   For  Plan  Years  beginning  before  Code  Section  411  is
          applicable  hereto,  a Participant's Accrued Benefit shall be the
          greater of that provided by the Plan, or 1/2 of the benefit which
          would  have  accrued  had  the provisions of this Section been in
          effect. In the event the Accrued Benefit as of the effective date
          of  Code  Section 411 is less than that provided by this Section,
          such difference shall be accrued pursuant to this Section.

          1.2  "Act"  means  the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of
          1974, as it may be amended from time to time.

          1.3  "Actuarial  Equivalent" means a form of benefit differing in
          time,  period,  or  manner  of  payment  from  a specific benefit
          provided  under  the Plan but having the same value when computed
          using  Unisex Pension Mortality Table (UP84) set forward one year

                                          5<PAGE>





          for  Participants  and  four  years  for  spouses  and contingent
          annuitants.   Provided, however, that for purposes of determining
          the  Actuarial Equivalent of a Participant's Local 49 Benefit, D-
          357  Benefit,  or D-476 Benefit, if applicable, as such terms are
          defined  in Appendix A, B, or C hereof, the mortality table shall
          be the 1971 Group Annuity Mortality Table.

          The  interest  rate  for  the purpose of determining an Actuarial
          Equivalent amount for distribution under a non decreasing annuity
          (as described in Regulation section 1.417(e)-l(d)(5)) payable for
          a  period  not  less  than the life of the Participant or, in the
          case  of  a  Pre-Retirement  Survivor  Annuity,  the  life of the
          surviving spouse, shall be 7 percent per annum.

          The  interest  rate  for  the purpose of determining an Actuarial
          Equivalent  amount for all other distributions including lump sum
          distributions  shall  be  7% or the "Section 417 interest rates,"
          whichever  produces  the  greater benefit, where the "Section 417
          interest rates" are:

          (a) the "applicable interest rate" if the resulting present value
          of the benefit is not greater than $25,000; and

          (b)  120%  of the "applicable interest rate" if the present value
          under  paragraph  (a)  exceeds $25,000, but in no event shall the
          present  value  calculated  under this paragraph (b) be less than
          $25,000.
           
          For  this  purpose, the "applicable interest rate" shall mean the
          interest rate which would be used, determined as of the first day
          of  the  Plan Year in which a distribution occurs, by the Pension
          Benefit  Guaranty  Corporation for the purpose of determining the
          present  value  of  a  lump-sum distribution on plan termination.
          However,  if  the  provisions of the Plan prior to this amendment
          and restatement so provided, the "applicable interest rate" shall
          be  determined  as of the date of distribution, rather than as of
          the first day of the Plan Year in which a distribution occurs.

          In the event this Section is amended, the Actuarial Equivalent of
          a  Participant's  Accrued  Benefit on or after the date of change
          shall   be  determined  as  the  greater  of  (1)  the  Actuarial
          Equivalent  of  the  Accrued  Benefit  as  of  the date of change
          computed on the old basis, or (2) the Actuarial Equivalent of the
          total Accrued Benefit computed on the new basis.

          1.4  "Administrator"  means the person designated by the Employer
          pursuant  to  Section 2.4 to administer the Plan on behalf of the
          Employer.

          1.5  "Affiliated Employer" means the Employer and any corporation
          which  is  a  member  of  a  controlled group of corporations (as
          defined  in Code Section 414(b)) which includes the Employer; any

                                          6<PAGE>





          trade  or  business  (whether or not incorporated) which is under
          common  control  (as  defined  in  Code  Section 414(c)) with the
          Employer; any organization (whether or not incorporated) which is
          a  member  of  an  affiliated  service  group (as defined in Code
          Section 414(m)) which includes the Employer; and any other entity
          r e quired  to  be  aggregated  with  the  Employer  pursuant  to
          Regulations under Code Section 414(o).

          1.6 "Age" means age at last birthday.

          1.7  "Aggregate Account" means, with respect to each Participant,
          the  value of all accounts maintained on behalf of a Participant,
          whether  attributable to Employer or Employee contributions, used
          to  determine  Top  Heavy  Plan  status under the provisions of a
          defined  contribution  plan included in any Aggregation Group (as
          defined in Article II).

          1.8 "Anniversary Date" means December 31st.

          1.9 "Average Monthly Compensation" means the monthly Compensation
          of  a Participant averaged over the five (5) consecutive Calendar
          Years  from  his  date of participation which produce the highest
          monthly  average.  If  a  Participant  has  less  than  five  (5)
          c o n secutive  Calendar  Years  of  Service  from  his  date  of
          participation  to  his  date  of termination, his Average Monthly
          Compensation will be based on his monthly Compensation during his
          months  of  service from his date of participation to his date of
          termination.    Compensation   subsequent   to   termination   of
          participation pursuant to Section 3.4 shall not be recognized.

          1.10  "Beneficiary"  means  the  Participant's spouse entitled in
          Section  5.5  to receive the benefits which are payable under the
          Plan  upon  or after the death of a Participant, or, with respect
          to  the  life  annuity  with  10-years  certain  optional form of
          benefits as provided in Section 5.7(a)(1), a contingent annuitant
          designated  to  receive remaining benefits, if any, upon or after
          the death of a Participant's surviving spouse.

          1.11  "Code"  means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended
          or replaced from time to time.

          1.12  "Compensation"  with  respect  to any Participant means the
          basic cash remuneration paid to a Participant by the Employer for
          personal  services rendered during the Calendar Year, (i) without
          regard  to  hours  of work or units produced, and is exclusive of
          any  remuneration  paid on account of overtime, overtime premium,
          extended  workweek,  shift  differentials, or other penalties, or
          premium  rates, or bonuses or all other forms of special pay, but
          including (ii) any amount contributed by the Employer pursuant to
          a  salary  reduction  agreement  and which is not included in the
          gross  income  of the Participant, pursuant to Code Sections 125,
          402(a)(8), 402(h) or 403(b).  Amounts contributed by the Employer

                                          7<PAGE>





          under  the  within Plan and any non-taxable fringe benefits shall
          not be considered as Compensation.

          With  respect  to  Employees  whose  employment  is governed by a
          collective  bargaining agreement described in Appendix A, B, or C
          hereof,  "Compensation"  shall include the additional amounts, if
          any, described in such Appendix.

          For  years  beginning after December 31, 1988 and ending prior to
          January  1,  1994,  compensation  in  excess of $200,000 shall be
          disregarded.  With  respect  to  those years between December 31,
          1988  and  January  1, 1994, such amount shall be adjusted at the
          same  time  and  in  such  manner as permitted under Code Section
          415(d),  except  that  the increase in effect on January 1 of any
          calendar  year  is effective for years beginning in such calendar
          year  and  the  first  adjustment  to  the $200,000 limitation is
          effective  on  January  1, 1990.  For years beginning on or after
          January 1, 1994, the annual compensation taken into account under
          the plan shall not exceed the OBRA '93 annual compensation limit.
          The  OBRA  '93 annual compensation limit is $150,000, as adjusted
          by  the  Commissioner  for  increases  in  the  cost of living in
          accordance  with  section  401(a)(17)(B)  of the Internal Revenue
          Code.    The  cost-of-living  adjustment in effect for a calendar
          year  applies  to any period, not exceeding 12 months, over which
          compensation  is  determined  (determination period) beginning in
          such  calendar  year.    If  a  compensation determination period
          consists  of fewer than 12 months, the $200,000 limit or the OBRA
          '93  annual compensation limit, as applicable, will be multiplied
          by  a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of months in
          the determination period, and the denominator of which is 12.

          For  plan  years  beginning  on  or  after  January  1, 1994, any
          reference  in this Plan to the limitation under 401(a)(17) of the
          Code  shall mean the OBRA '93 annual compensation limit set forth
          in this provision.

          If  compensation for any prior determination period is taken into
          account  in  determining a Participant's benefits accruing in the
          current  Plan Year, the compensation for that prior determination
          period  is  subject  to the OBRA '93 annual compensation limit in
          effect  for  that  prior determination period.  For this purpose,
          for  determination  periods beginning before the first day of the
          first  plan  year beginning on or after January 1, 1994, the OBRA
          '93 annual compensation limit is $150,000.

          In  applying  the $200,000 limitation or the OBRA '93 limitation,
          the  family  group  of  a  Highly  Compensated Participant who is
          subject  to  the  Family Member aggregation rules of Code Section
          414(q)(6)  because  such  Participant  is  either a "five percent
          owner"  of the Employer or one of the ten (10) Highly Compensated
          Employees  paid  the greatest "415 Compensation" during the year,
          shall  be  treated  as a single Participant, except that for this

                                          8<PAGE>





          p u r p ose  Family  Members  shall  include  only  the  affected
          Participant's  spouse  and  any  lineal  descendants who have not
          attained age nineteen (19) before the close of the year. If, as a
          result  of  the  application  of such rules the adjusted $200,000
          limitation  or  OBRA  '93 limit, as applicable, is exceeded, then
          the  limitation  shall  be  prorated  among  the  affected Family
          Members  in  proportion to each such Family Member's Compensation
          prior  to  the  application  of  this  limitation.  However,  for
          purposes  of  Section  1.1(b),  the  preceding sentence shall not
          a p ply  in  determining  the  portion  of  the  Average  Monthly
          C o m p e n sation  of  a  Participant  which  is  below  Covered
          Compensation.

          1.13  "Contract"  or  "Policy"  means  a life insurance policy or
          annuity  contract  (group or individual) issued by the insurer as
          elected.

          1.14 "Covered Compensation" with respect to any Participant for a
          Plan  Year  means  the  average (without indexing) of the Taxable
          Wage  Bases  in  effect for each calendar year during the 35-year
          period ending with the last day of the calendar year in which the
          Participant  attains  (or will attain) Social Security Retirement
          Age.  A Participant's Covered Compensation shall be adjusted each
          Plan  Year and no increase in Covered Compensation shall decrease
          a Participant's Accrued Benefit. In determining the Participant's
          Covered  Compensation  for  a Plan Year, the Taxable Wage Base in
          effect  for  the  current  Plan Year and any subsequent Plan Year
          will be assumed to be the same as the Taxable Wage Base in effect
          as  of the beginning of the Plan Year for which the determination
          is  being  made.  A Participant's Covered Compensation for a Plan
          Year  before  the  35-year  period described above is the Taxable
          Wage  Base  in  effect  as  of  the beginning of the Plan Year. A
          Participant's  Covered  Compensation  for  a  Plan Year after the
          35-year  period  described  above  is  the  Participant's Covered
          Compensation  for  the  Plan  Year  during  which the Participant
          attained Social Security Retirement Age.

          1.15  "Earliest Retirement Age" means the earliest date on which,
          under the Plan, the Participant could elect to receive retirement
          benefits.

          1.16  "Early  Retirement  Date"  means the first day of the month
          (prior   to  the  Normal  Retirement  Date)  coinciding  with  or
          following  the  date on which a Participant or Former Participant
          attains age 55 and has completed at least 5 Years of Service with
          the  Employer  (Early Retirement Age). A Participant shall become
          fully  Vested  upon satisfying this requirement if still employed
          at his Early Retirement Age.
           
          A  Former  Participant who terminates employment after satisfying
          the  service  requirement for Early Retirement and who thereafter
          reaches the age requirement contained herein shall be entitled to

                                          9<PAGE>





          receive his benefits under this Plan.

          1.17  "Eligible  Employee"  means  any  Employee,  subject to the
          following.

          Employees  who  are  Leased  Employees within the meaning of Code
          Sections  414(n)(2)  and  414(o)(2)  shall  not  be  eligible  to
          participate in this Plan.

          Employees  who  are  nonresident aliens and who receive no earned
          income  (within  the  meaning of Code Section 911(d)(2)) from the
          Employer  which constitutes income from sources within the United
          States  (within  the meaning of Code Section 861(a)(3)) shall not
          be eligible to participate in this Plan.

          Employees  whose  employment  is  governed  by  the  terms  of  a
          collective  bargaining agreement between Employee representatives
          (within the meaning of Code Section 7701(a)(46)) and the Employer
          under  which  retirement  benefits were the subject of good faith
          bargaining  between  the parties, unless such agreement expressly
          provides for such coverage in this Plan, shall not be eligible to
          participate in this Plan.

          Employees  who are Participants in the Pension Retirement Plan of
          S o uthwestern  Portland  Cement  Company  for  Hourly  Employees
          ("Hourly  Plan")  maintained  by  the  Employer  or  the Rho-Chem
          Corporation  Profit  Sharing  Plan  maintained  by  an Affiliated
          Employer shall not be eligible to participate in this Plan.

          In  the event that Employees of one or more collective bargaining
          units  provided  pension  benefits  by  the  Hourly  Plan  become
          Participants  of  this  Plan as a result of (i) the merger of the
          Hourly  Plan  into the Plan, or (ii) an assumption by the Plan of
          the  Hourly  Plan's  liabilities  to  provide  benefits  to  such
          bargaining  unit Employees and a transfer of assets by the Hourly
          Plan to fund liabilities assumed (including a pro rata portion of
          excess assets, if any, calculated in accordance with Code Section
          414(1)(2)), all Employees of that collective bargaining unit will
          be  Eligible  Employees  and  will  be  eligible for the benefits
          provided  by  the  Plan  except  as modified by the provisions of
          Appendix  A,  Appendix  B or Appendix C, as appropriate, attached
          hereto.

          Employees  of  Affiliated  Employers  shall  not  be  eligible to
          participate  in  this  Plan unless such Affiliated Employers have
          specifically adopted this Plan in writing.

          1.18  "Employee" means any person who is employed by the Employer
          or  Affiliated  Employer,  but  excludes  any  person  who  is an
          independent  contractor.  Employee shall include Leased Employees
          within  the  meaning  of  Code  Sections  414(n)(2) and 414(o)(2)
          unless  such  Leased Employees are covered by a plan described in

                                          10<PAGE>





          C o de  Section  414(n)(5)  and  such  Leased  Employees  do  not
          c o n s titute  more  than  20%  of  the  recipient's  non-highly
          compensated work force.

          1.19  "Employer" means Southdown, Inc.; any successor which shall
          maintain this Plan; and any predecessor which has maintained this
          Plan.  The  Employer  is  a  Louisiana corporation with principal
          offices in the State of Texas.

          1 . 20  "Family  Member"  means,  with  respect  to  an  affected
          Participant, such Participant's spouse, such Participant's lineal
          descendants and ascendants and their spouses, all as described in
          Code Section 414(q)(6)(B).

          1 . 21  "Fiduciary"  means  any  person  who  (a)  exercises  any
          discretionary   authority  or  discretionary  control  respecting
          management  of  the  Plan  or  exercises any authority or control
          respecting  management  or disposition of its assets, (b) renders
          investment  advice  for  a  fee  or other compensation, direct or
          indirect,  with  respect  to  any monies or other property of the
          Plan  or has any authority or responsibility to do so, or (c) has
          any  discretionary  authority  or discretionary responsibility in
          the  administration  of  the Plan, including, but not limited to,
          the  Trustee,  the  Employer and its representative body, and the
          Administrator.

          1.22  "Fiscal  Year"  means  the Employer's accounting year of 12
          months  commencing  on  January  1st  of each year and ending the
          following December 31st.

          1.23   "Former  Participant"  means  a  person  who  has  been  a
          Participant,  but  who  has  ceased  to  be a Participant for any
          reason.

          1.24  "415 Compensation" means compensation as defined in Section
          6.2(b).

          1.25 "Highly Compensated Employee" means an Employee described in
          Code Section 414(q) and the Regulations thereunder, and generally
          means  an Employee who performed services for the Employer during
          the  "determination  year" and is in one or more of the following
          groups:

               (a) Employees who at any time during the "determination
               year" or "look-back year" were "five percent owners" as
               defined in Section 1.30(c).

               (b)  Employees  who  received "415 Compensation" during
               the  "look-back  year"  from  the Employer in excess of
               $75,000.

               (c)  Employees  who  received "415 Compensation" during

                                          11<PAGE>





               the  "look-back  year"  from  the Employer in excess of
               $50,000 and were in the Top Paid Group of Employees for
               the Plan Year.

               (d)  Employees  who  during  the  "look-back year" were
               officers  of  the  Employer  (as  that  term is defined
               within  the  meaning  of  the  Regulations  under  Code
               Section 416) and received "415 Compensation" during the
               "look-back  year"  from  the  Employer  greater than 50
               percent  of  the  limit  in  effect  under Code Section
               415(b)(1)(A)  for  any  such  Plan  Year. The number of
               officers  shall  be  limited  to  the  lesser of (i) 50
               employees;  or  (ii)  the  greater of 3 employees or 10
               p e r c ent  of  all  employees.  For  the  purpose  of
               determining the number of officers, Employees described
               in Section 1.54(a), (b), (c) and (d) shall be excluded,
               but  such  Employees  shall still be considered for the
               purpose of identifying the particular Employees who are
               officers.  If  the  Employer does not have at least one
               officer whose annual "415 Compensation" is in excess of
               50 percent of the Code Section 415(b)(1)(A) limit, then
               the  highest  paid  officer  of  the  Employer  will be
               treated as a Highly Compensated Employee.

               (e)  Employees  who  are in the group consisting of the
               100  Employees  paid  the  greatest  "415 Compensation"
               during  the "determination year" and are also described
               in  (b),  (c)  or  (d)  above when these paragraphs are
               m o d ified  to  substitute  "determination  year"  for
               "look-back year".

          The "determination year" shall be the Plan Year for which testing
          is  being  performed,  and  the  "look-back  year"  shall  be the
          immediately preceding twelve-month period.

          F o r  purposes  of  this  Section,  the  determination  of  "415
          Compensation"  shall  be  made  by  including  amounts that would
          otherwise be excluded from a Participant's gross income by reason
          of  the application of Code Sections 125, 402(a)(8), 402(h)(1)(B)
          and,  in  the  case  of Employer contributions made pursuant to a
          salary  reduction  agreement,  by  including  amounts  that would
          otherwise be excluded from a Participant's gross income by reason
          of  the  application  of  Code  Section 403(b). Additionally, the
          dollar  threshold amounts specified in (b) and (c) above shall be
          adjusted  at  such  time  and  in  such  manner as is provided in
          Regulations. In the case of such an adjustment, the dollar limits
          which  shall  be applied are those for the calendar year in which
          the "determination year" or "look-back year" begins.

          In  determining  who  is a Highly Compensated Employee, Employees
          who  are  non-resident  aliens  and who received no earned income
          (within  the meaning of Code Section 911(d)(2)) from the Employer

                                          12<PAGE>





          constituting  United  States  source income within the meaning of
          Code  Section  861(a)(3)  shall  not  be  treated  as  Employees.
          Additionally,  all  Affiliated  Employers  shall  be  taken  into
          account  as  a  single  employer  and Leased Employees within the
          meaning  of  Code  Sections  414(n)(2)  and  414(o)(2)  shall  be
          considered  Employees unless such Leased Employees are covered by
          a plan described in Code Section 414(n)(5) and are not covered in
          any  qualified  plan maintained by the Employer. The exclusion of
          Leased  Employees  for this purpose shall be applied on a uniform
          and  consistent basis for all of the Employer's retirement plans.
          Highly  Compensated  Former  Employees shall be treated as Highly
          Compensated  Employees  without  regard to whether they performed
          services during the "determination year".

          1.26 "Highly Compensated Former Employee" means a former Employee
          who  had  a separation year prior to the "determination year" and
          was  a Highly Compensated Employee in the year of separation from
          service  or  in  any "determination year" after attaining age 55.
          Notwithstanding  the  foregoing,  an  Employee who separated from
          service  prior  to  1987  will be treated as a Highly Compensated
          Former  Employee  only  if  during  the  separation year (or year
          preceding  the  separation  year)  or any year after the Employee
          attains  age  55  (or  the last year ending before the Employee's
          55th  birthday),  the Employee either received "415 Compensation"
          in  excess of $50,000 or was a "five percent owner". For purposes
          of  this  Section,  "determination  year", "415 Compensation" and
          "five  percent  owner"  shall  be  determined  in accordance with
          Section  1.25.  Highly  Compensated  Former  Employees  shall  be
          treated  as Highly Compensated Employees. The method set forth in
          this  Section for determining who is a "Highly Compensated Former
          Employee"  shall be applied on a uniform and consistent basis for
          all  purposes  for  which  the  Code Section 414(q) definition is
          applicable.

          1 . 2 7    "Highly  Compensated  Participant"  means  any  Highly
          Compensated Employee who is eligible to participate in the Plan.

          1.28  "Hour of Service" means (1) each hour for which an Employee
          is directly or indirectly compensated or entitled to compensation
          by  the  Employer  for  the  performance  of  duties  during  the
          applicable  computation  period;  (2)  each  hour  for  which  an
          Employee  is  directly  or  indirectly compensated or entitled to
          compensation   by  the  Employer  (irrespective  of  whether  the
          employment  relationship  has  terminated) for reasons other than
          performance of duties (such as vacation, holidays, sickness, jury
          duty,  disability,  lay-off,  military  duty or leave of absence)
          during the applicable computation period; (3) each hour for which
          back  pay  is awarded or agreed to by the Employer without regard
          to  mitigation  of  damages.  These hours will be credited to the
          Employee for the computation period or periods to which the award
          or agreement pertains rather than the computation period in which
          the  award,  agreement  or  payment  is  made.  The same Hours of

                                          13<PAGE>





          Service  shall not be credited both under (1) or (2), as the case
          may be, and under (3).

          1.29  "Investment Manager" means an entity that (a) has the power
          t o    manage,  acquire,  or  dispose  of  Plan  assets  and  (b)
          acknowledges  fiduciary  responsibility  to  the Plan in writing.
          Such  entity must be a person, firm, or corporation registered as
          an  investment adviser under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940,
          a bank, or an insurance company.

          1.30  "Key Employee" means an Employee as defined in Code Section
          416(i) and the Regulations thereunder. Generally, any Employee or
          former  Employee  (as  well  as  each  of  his  Beneficiaries) is
          considered a Key Employee if he, at any time during the Plan Year
          that  contains  the  "Determination Date" or any of the preceding
          four  (4)  Plan  Years, has been included in one of the following
          categories:

               (a) an officer of the Employer (as that term is defined
               within  the  meaning  of  the  Regulations  under  Code
               Section  416)  having annual "415 Compensation" greater
               than  50  percent  of  the  amount in effect under Code
               Section 415(b)(1)(A) for any such Plan Year.

               (b)  one  of  the  ten  employees  having  annual  "415
               Compensation" from the Employer for a Plan Year greater
               than the dollar limitation in effect under Code Section
               415(c)(1)(A)  for  the calendar year in which such Plan
               Year  ends  and  owning (or considered as owning within
               the  meaning  of  Code  Section  318)  both  more  than
               one-half  percent interest and the largest interests in
               the Employer.

               (c)  a  "five  percent  owner"  of  the Employer. "Five
               percent  owner"  means  any  person  who  owns  (or  is
               considered as owning within the meaning of Code Section
               318)  more  than  five  percent (5%) of the outstanding
               stock  of  the  Employer  or stock possessing more than
               five percent (5%) of the total combined voting power of
               all  stock  of  the  Employer  or,  in  the  case of an
               unincorporated  business, any person who owns more than
               five percent (5%) of the capital or profits interest in
               the   Employer.  In  determining  percentage  ownership
               hereunder, employers that would otherwise be aggregated
               under  Code  Sections 414(b), (c), (m) and (o) shall be
               treated as separate employers.

               (d)  a  "one  percent  owner" of the Employer having an
               annual  "415  Compensation"  from  the Employer of more
               than $150,000. "One percent owner" means any person who
               owns  (or is considered as owning within the meaning of
               Code  Section  318)  more  than one percent (1%) of the

                                          14<PAGE>





               outstanding  stock  of the Employer or stock possessing
               more than one percent (1%) of the total combined voting
               power  of  all stock of the Employer or, in the case of
               an  unincorporated  business,  any person who owns more
               than  one  percent  (1%)  of  the  capital  or  profits
               interest  in  the  Employer.  In determining percentage
               ownership  hereunder, employers that would otherwise be
               aggregated under Code Sections 414(b), (c), (m) and (o)
               shall  be  treated  as  separate employers. However, in
               d e t ermining   whether   an   individual   has   "415
               Compensation" of more than $150,000, "415 Compensation"
               from each employer required to be aggregated under Code
               Sections  414(b),  (c), (m) and (o) shall be taken into
               account.

          F o r  purposes  of  this  Section,  the  determination  of  "415
          Compensation"  shall  be  made  by  including  amounts that would
          otherwise be excluded from a Participant's gross income by reason
          of  the application of Code Sections 125, 402(a)(8), 402(h)(1)(B)
          and,  in  the  case  of Employer contributions made pursuant to a
          salary  reduction  agreement,  by  including  amounts  that would
          otherwise be excluded from a Participant's gross income by reason
          of the application of Code Section 403(b).

          1.31  "Late  Retirement  Date"  means  the first day of the month
          c o inciding  with  or  next  following  a  Participant's  actual
          Retirement Date after having reached his Normal Retirement Date.

          1.32  "Leased  Employee" means any person (other than an Employee
          of  the  recipient)  who  pursuant  to  an  agreement between the
          recipient  and  any  other  person  ("leasing  organization") has
          performed  services  for  the recipient (or for the recipient and
          related  persons  determined  in  accordance  with  Code  Section
          414(n)(6))  on a substantially full time basis for a period of at
          least  one  year,  and  such  services are of a type historically
          performed  by  employees  in  the business field of the recipient
          employer. Contributions or benefits provided a Leased Employee by
          the  leasing  organization  which  are  attributable  to services
          performed for the recipient employer shall be treated as provided
          by  the  recipient  employer.  A  Leased  Employee  shall  not be
          considered  an Employee of the recipient if both of the following
          (a) and (b) are met:

               (a)  such  employee  is  covered  by  a  money purchase
               pension plan providing:

                    (1)  a  non-integrated  employer contribution
                    rate  of  at  least  10%  of compensation, as
                    d e fined  in  Code  Section  415(c)(3),  but
                    including  amounts  contributed pursuant to a
                    salary    reduction   agreement   which   are
                    excludable  from  the employee's gross income

                                          15<PAGE>





                    under Code Sections 125, 402(a)(8), 402(h) or
                    403(b);

                    (2) immediate participation; and

                    (3) full and immediate vesting.

               (b) Leased Employees do not constitute more than 20% of
               the recipient's non-highly compensated work force.

          1.33 "Month of Service" means a calendar month during any part of
          which an Employee completed an Hour of Service.  Except, however,
          for  purposes  of  vesting and participation, but not for benefit
          accrual,  a Participant shall be credited with a Month of Service
          for  each  month  during  a  12  month period in which he has not
          incurred a 1-Year Break in Service.

          1.34  "Non-Highly  Compensated Participant" means any Participant
          who is neither a Highly Compensated Employee nor a Family Member.

          1.35  "Non-Key  Employee"  means  any Employee or former Employee
          (and his Beneficiaries) who is not a Key Employee.

          1.36  "Normal  Retirement  Date" means the first day of the month
          coinciding  with  or  next  following  the  Participant's  Normal
          Retirement  Age (65th birthday). A Participant shall become fully
          Vested in his Normal Retirement Benefit upon attaining his Normal
          Retirement Age.

          1.37  "l-Year  Break in Service" means the applicable computation
          period of 12 consecutive months during which an Employee fails to
          accrue  a  Month  of  Service. Further, solely for the purpose of
          determining  whether a Participant has incurred a 1-Year Break in
          Service,  Hours  of  Service  shall be recognized for "authorized
          leaves  of  absence"  and  "maternity  and  paternity  leaves  of
          absence."  Years of Service and l-Year Breaks in Service shall be
          measured on the same computation period.

          An  Employee  shall not be deemed to have incurred a l-Year Break
          in  Service  if  he completes an Hour of Service within 12 months
          following  the  last day of the month during which his employment
          t e r minated.    In  determining  whether  a  Participant  whose
          employment  is  covered  by a collective bargaining agreement set
          forth  in  Appendix  A,  B,  or  C has incurred a 1-Year Break in
          Service  during  any  period  preceding the date of merger of the
          Hourly  Plan  (see  1.17) and this Plan, the terms of such Hourly
          Plan  as  in  effect on the day immediately preceding the date of
          such merger shall apply.

          " A uthorized  leave  of  absence"  means  an  unpaid,  temporary
          cessation from active employment with the Employer pursuant to an
          established   nondiscriminatory  policy,  whether  occasioned  by

                                          16<PAGE>





          illness,  military  service, or any other reason.  An "authorized
          leave  of  absence"  shall not include a leave of absence for the
          purpose of accepting a position with a labor union, at the Local,
          District,  or  International  level, or the AFL-CIO or any of its
          subordinate bodies.

          A  period  of continuing "disability" beginning with the earliest
          date  the Employee is incapable of performing his assigned duties
          and ending as of the earlier of the date "disability" ends or the
          twelfth  monthly  anniversary  of  the beginning of the period of
          "disability"  shall  constitute  an  authorized leave of absence.
          "Disability"   means  the  mental  or  physical  incapacity  (the
          duration  of  which  may  be either permanent or temporary) of an
          Employee  which,  in the opinion of a licensed physician approved
          by  the  Administrator (which opinion may reasonably be requested
          at  any  time  and  one  or more times to determine the status of
          disability), renders the Employee totally incapable of performing
          his  assigned  duties  with the Employer; provided, however, that
          any condition which constitutes total disability under the Social
          Security  Act  shall  constitute  "disability"  for  all purposes
          hereunder.  A  separate  period of "disability" shall begin after
          (i) the Employee has been authorized by the Employer to return to
          work pursuant to policies uniformly and consistently applied, and
          (ii)  the Employee performs his assigned duties with Employer for
          eight  hours  in  a  continuous 24-hour period beginning at 12:01
          a.m.

          A "maternity or paternity leave of absence" means, for Plan Years
          beginning  after  December 31, 1984, an absence from work for any
          period  by  reason  of  the  Employee's  pregnancy,  birth of the
          Employee's  child,  placement  of  a  child  with the Employee in
          connection  with  the  adoption of such child, or any absence for
          the  purpose  of  caring  for such child for a period immediately
          following  such  birth  or  placement. For this purpose, Hours of
          Service shall be credited for the computation period in which the
          absence  from  work begins, only if credit therefore is necessary
          to prevent the Employee from incurring a l-Year Break in Service,
          or,  in  any other case, in the immediately following computation
          period.

          1.38  "Participant"  means any Eligible Employee who participates
          in  the  Plan  as  provided  in  Section 3.3, and has not for any
          reason become ineligible to participate further in the Plan.

          1.39  "Plan"  means  this  instrument,  including  all amendments
          thereto.

          1.40  "Plan Year" means the Plan's accounting year of twelve (12)
          months  commencing  on  January  1st  of each year and ending the
          following December 31st.

          1.41  "Plan  Year  of  Service" means a Plan Year during which an

                                          17<PAGE>





          Employee  is a Participant and completes 12 consecutive Months of
          Service.

          1.42 "Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity" means an immediate annuity
          for  the life of the Surviving Spouse the Actuarial Equivalent of
          which  is  not  less  than  the amount which the Surviving Spouse
          would  have  received  as  a survivor annuity had the Participant
          commenced  receiving  an immediate joint and 50% survivor annuity
          on the day before his death.

          1.43  "Present  Value  of  Accrued  Benefit"  means the Actuarial
          Equivalent  value  of  a Participant's Accrued Benefit at date of
          valuation.  Notwithstanding  the  foregoing, the Present Value of
          Accrued  Benefit  for  the determination of Top Heavy Plan status
          shall  be  made exclusively pursuant to the provisions of Section
          2.2.

          1.44 "Regulation" means the Income Tax Regulations as promulgated
          by  the Secretary of the Treasury or his delegate, and as amended
          from time to time.

          1.45  "Retired  Participant"  means  a  person  who  has  been  a
          Participant,  but  who has become entitled to retirement benefits
          under the Plan.

          1.46  "Retirement  Date" means the date as of which a Participant
          retires  whether such retirement occurs on a Participant's Normal
          Retirement Date, Early or Late Retirement Date (see Section 5.1).

          1.47  "Social  Security Retirement Age" means the age used as the
          retirement  age  under Section 216(1) of the Social Security Act,
          except  that  such section shall be applied without regard to the
          age  increase  factor  and  as  if the early retirement age under
          Section 216(1)(2) of such Act were 62.

          1.48  "Spouse"  or  "Surviving  Spouse"  means  a  person  of the
          opposite  sex  to whom the Participant was married throughout the
          one-year  period  ending on the earlier of the date distributions
          commence   or  the  date  of  the  Participant's  death.  If  the
          Participant  marries  within  the  one-year  period  prior to the
          commencement  of  his  distributions and has been married to that
          person  throughout  the one-year period ending on the date of his
          death, such person shall be treated as the Surviving Spouse.

          1.49  "Super  Top  Heavy  Plan" means a plan described in Section
          2.2(b).

          1.50  "Taxable  Wage  Base"  means,  with respect to any calendar
          year,  the  maximum  amount  of  earnings which may be considered
          wages for such year under Code Section 3121(x)(1).

          1.51  "Terminated  Participant"  means  a  person  who has been a

                                          18<PAGE>





          Participant,  but whose employment has been terminated other than
          by death or retirement.

          1.52 "Top Heavy Plan" means a plan described in Section 2.2(a).

          1.53  "Top  Heavy  Plan  Year" means a Plan Year commencing after
          December 31, 1983 during which the Plan is a Top Heavy Plan.

          1.54  "Top  Paid Group" means the top 20 percent of Employees who
          performed  services  for the Employer during the applicable year,
          ranked  according to the amount of "415 Compensation" (determined
          for  this  purpose in accordance with Section 1.25) received from
          the  Employer during such year. All Affiliated Employers shall be
          taken  into  account  as  a single employer, and Leased Employees
          within the meaning of Code Sections 414(n)(2) and 414(o)(2) shall
          be  considered Employees unless such Leased Employees are covered
          by a plan described in Code Section 414(n)(5) and are not covered
          in  any  qualified plan maintained by the Employer. Employees who
          are non-resident aliens and who received no earned income (within
          the   meaning  of  Code  Section  911(d)(2))  from  the  Employer
          constituting  United  States  source income within the meaning of
          Code  Section  861(a)(3)  shall  not  be  treated  as  Employees.
          Additionally, for the purpose of determining the number of active
          Employees  in  any year, the following additional Employees shall
          also   be  excluded;  however,  such  Employees  shall  still  be
          c o nsidered  for  the  purpose  of  identifying  the  particular
          Employees in the Top Paid Group:

               (a) Employees with less than six (6) months of service;

               (b)  Employees who normally work less than 17 1/2 hours
               per week;

               (c)  Employees  who  normally  work  less  than six (6)
               months during a year; and

               (d) Employees who have not yet attained age 21.

          In  addition,  if  90  percent  or  more  of the Employees of the
          Employer  are  covered  under  agreements  the Secretary of Labor
          finds  to  be  collective  bargaining agreements between Employee
          representatives  and  the  Employer,  and  the  Plan  covers only
          Employees  who  are  not  covered  under  such  agreements,  then
          Employees  covered by such agreements shall be excluded from both
          the  total  number  of  active  Employees  as  well  as  from the
          identification of particular Employees in the Top Paid Group.

          The  foregoing  exclusions  set  forth  in  this Section shall be
          applied  on  a  uniform and consistent basis for all purposes for
          which the Code Section 414(q) definition is applicable.

          1.55 "Trustee" means the person or entity named as trustee herein

                                          19<PAGE>





          or  in  any  separate  trust forming a part of this Plan, and any
          successors.

          1.56  "Trust  Fund" means the assets of the Plan and Trust as the
          same shall exist from time to time.

          1.57 "Vested" means the portion of a Participant's benefits under
          the Plan that are nonforfeitable.

          1.58  "Year  of  Service" means twelve (12) consecutive Months of
          Service.  Years  of  Service  shall  include a fractional Year of
          Service  expressed  as  a fraction, the numerator of which is the
          number of completed months and the denominator of which is 12.

          Years  of  Service with respect to a Participant whose employment
          is  governed  by  a  collective bargaining agreement set forth in
          Appendix  A, B, or C herein will be determined under the terms of
          the  Hourly  Plan  (see 1.17) as in effect on the day immediately
          preceding  the  day such plan was merged with this Plan, but only
          with respect to service prior to such plan merger, as follows:

               (a)  for eligibility, eligibility service as defined in
               such  Hourly  Plan  will  be  substituted  for Years of
               Service for such period;

               (b)  for  vesting,  vesting  service as defined in such
               Hourly  Plan  will  be substituted for Years of Service
               for such period;

               ( c )    for  determining  the  Accrued  Benefit  under
               1.1(b)(i), transition service as defined in such Hourly
               Plan  will be substituted for Years of Service for such
               period.

          Years  of Service with any predecessor Employer that was acquired
          by  or  combined  with  the  Employer  shall  be  recognized  for
          eligibility  and  vesting  purposes, but only for service after a
          date  that  is  to be established by mutual agreement between the
          predecessor  Employer  and  the  Employer  or, if no such date is
          established  by  such  parties, by the Administrator. Any date so
          established   shall  be  the  same  for  all  Employees  of  such
          predecessor Employer eligible to participate in this Plan.

          Years of Service with any Affiliated Employer shall be recognized
          for eligibility and vesting purposes.








                                          20<PAGE>





                                      ARTICLE II
                             TOP HEAVY AND ADMINISTRATION

          2.1 TOP HEAVY PLAN REQUIREMENTS

          For  any  Top Heavy Plan Year, the Plan shall provide the special
          vesting  requirements  of Code Section 416(b) pursuant to Section
          5.06  of the Plan and the special minimum benefit requirements of
          Code Section 416(c) pursuant to Section 5.2 of the Plan.  The Top
          Heavy provisions of this Plan shall not apply to Participants who
          are represented by a collective bargaining agreement.

          2.2 DETERMINATION OF TOP HEAVY STATUS

          (a)  This  Plan  shall  be  a  Top  Heavy  Plan for any Plan Year
          c o mmencing  after  December  31,  1983  in  which,  as  of  the
          Determination  Date, (1) the Present Value of Accrued Benefits of
          Key  Employees  and  (2) the sum of the Aggregate Accounts of Key
          Employees  under this Plan and all plans of an Aggregation Group,
          exceeds  sixty  percent  (60%)  of  the  Present Value of Accrued
          Benefits  and  the  Aggregate  Accounts  of  all  Key and Non-Key
          Employees under this Plan and all plans of an Aggregation Group.

          If  any  Participant is a Non-Key Employee for any Plan Year, but
          such Participant was a Key Employee for any prior Plan Year, such
          Participant's  Present  Value of Accrued Benefit and/or Aggregate
          Account  balance  shall not be taken into account for purposes of
          determining  whether  this Plan is a Top Heavy or Super Top Heavy
          Plan  (or  whether any Aggregation Group which includes this Plan
          is  a  Top  Heavy  Group).  In addition, for Plan Years beginning
          after  December  31, 1984, if a Participant or Former Participant
          has  not  performed any services for any Employer maintaining the
          Plan  at  any  time  during  the  five  year period ending on the
          Determination  Date,  any accrued benefit for such Participant or
          Former  Participant  shall  not  be  taken  into  account for the
          purposes of determining whether this Plan is a Top Heavy or Super
          Top Heavy Plan.

          (b)  This  Plan shall be a Super Top Heavy Plan for any Plan Year
          c o mmencing  after  December  31,  1983  in  which,  as  of  the
          Determination  Date, (1) the Present Value of Accrued Benefits of
          Key  Employees  and  (2) the sum of the Aggregate Accounts of Key
          Employees  under this Plan and all plans of an Aggregation Group,
          exceeds  ninety  percent  (90%)  of  the Present Value of Accrued
          Benefits  and  the  Aggregate  Accounts  of  all  Key and Non-Key
          Employees under this Plan and all plans of an Aggregation Group.

          (c)  Aggregate  Account:  A Participant's Aggregate Account as of
          the  Determination  Date  shall  be  determined  under applicable
          provisions  of  the defined contribution plan used in determining
          Top Heavy Plan status.


                                          21<PAGE>





          (d) "Aggregation Group" means either a Required Aggregation Group
          or a Permissive Aggregation Group as hereinafter determined.

               (1)   Required  Aggregation  Group:  In  determining  a
               Required  Aggregation Group hereunder, each plan of the
               Employer  in  which  a Key Employee is a participant in
               the  Plan Year containing the Determination Date or any
               of  the  four preceding Plan Years, and each other plan
               of  the  Employer which enables any plan in which a Key
               Employee  participates to meet the requirements of Code
               Sections  401(a)(4)  or  410,  will  be  required to be
               aggregated.  Such  group  shall  be known as a Required
               Aggregation Group.

               In  the case of a Required Aggregation Group, each plan
               in the group will be considered a Top Heavy Plan if the
               Required  Aggregation  Group  is  a Top Heavy Group. No
               p l an  in  the  Required  Aggregation  Group  will  be
               considered a Top Heavy Plan if the Required Aggregation
               Group is not a Top Heavy Group.

               (2) Permissive Aggregation Group: The Employer may also
               include  any  other plan not required to be included in
               the  Required Aggregation Group, provided the resulting
               group,  taken as a whole, would continue to satisfy the
               provisions  of  Code  Sections  401(a)(4) and 410. Such
               group shall be known as a Permissive Aggregation Group.

               In  the  case of a Permissive Aggregation Group, only a
               plan  that  is  part  of the Required Aggregation Group
               will  be  considered a Top Heavy Plan if the Permissive
               Aggregation  Group is a Top Heavy Group. No plan in the
               Permissive  Aggregation  Group will be considered a Top
               Heavy Plan if the Permissive Aggregation Group is not a
               Top Heavy Group.

               (3)  Only  those  plans  of  the  Employer in which the
               Determination  Dates fall within the same calendar year
               shall  be aggregated in order to determine whether such
               plans are Top Heavy Plans.

               (4)  An  Aggregation Group shall include any terminated
               plan  of  the  Employer if it was maintained within the
               last five (5) years ending on the Determination Date.

          (e)  "Determination Date" means (a) the last day of the preceding
          Plan  Year,  or  (b) in the case of the first Plan Year, the last
          day of such Plan Year.

          (f)  Present  Value  of Accrued Benefit: In the case of a defined
          benefit  plan,  a  Participant's Present Value of Accrued Benefit
          shall be determined:

                                          22<PAGE>





               (1)  in  the  case  of  a  Participant other than a Key
               Employee,  using the single accrual method used for all
               plans  of  the Employer and Affiliated Employers, or if
               no  such  single  method  exists,  using a method which
               results  in benefits accruing not more rapidly than the
               slowest  accrual  rate  permitted  under  Code  Section
               411(b)(1)(C).

               (2)  as  of the most recent "actuarial valuation date",
               which is the most recent valuation date within a twelve
               (12) month period ending on the Determination Date.

               (3)  for the first Plan Year, as if (a) the Participant
               terminated service as of the Determination Date; or (b)
               the  Participant terminated service as of the actuarial
               valuation  date,  but taking into account the estimated
               Accrued Benefits as of the Determination Date.

               (4) for the second Plan Year, the Accrued Benefit taken
               into account for a current Participant must not be less
               than  the  Accrued  Benefit  taken into account for the
               first  Plan  Year unless the difference is attributable
               to  using  an estimate of the Accrued Benefit as of the
               Determination  Date  for  the first Plan Year and using
               the actual Accrued Benefit for the second Plan Year.

               (5)  for  any  other  Plan  Year, as if the Participant
               terminated service as of the actuarial valuation date.

               (6)  The actuarial valuation date must be the same date
               used  for  computing  the  defined benefit plan minimum
               funding  costs,  regardless  of  whether a valuation is
               performed that Plan Year.

          (g)  The  calculation of a Participant's Present Value of Accrued
          Benefit as of a Determination Date shall be the sum of:

               (1)  The  Present  Value  of  Accrued Benefit using the
               actuarial assumptions of Section 1.3, which assumptions
               shall  be identical for all defined benefit plans being
               tested for Top Heavy Plan status.

               (2)  any  Plan  distributions made within the Plan Year
               that includes the Determination Date or within the four
               (4)  preceding  Plan  Years.  However,  in  the case of
               distributions  made  after the valuation date and prior
               to  the  Determination Date, such distributions are not
               included as distributions for top heavy purposes to the
               extent  that such distributions are already included in
               the  Participant's  Present Value of Accrued Benefit as
               of  the valuation date. Notwithstanding anything herein
               to   the   contrary,   all   distributions,   including

                                          23<PAGE>





               distributions  made  prior  to  January  1,  1984,  and
               distributions  under  a terminated plan which if it had
               not  been  terminated  would  have  been required to be
               included  in  an  Aggregation  Group,  will be counted.
               Further,  benefits  paid  on  account  of death, to the
               extent such benefits do not exceed the Present Value of
               Accrued  Benefits  existing immediately prior to death,
               shall  be  treated as distributions for the purposes of
               this paragraph.

               (3)  any  Employee  contributions, whether voluntary or
               m a n datory.  However,  amounts  attributable  to  tax
               deductible  Qualified  Voluntary Employee Contributions
               s h a ll  not  be  considered  to  be  a  part  of  the
               Participant's Present Value of Accrued Benefit.

               (4)   with   respect   to   unrelated   rollovers   and
               plan-to-plan  transfers  (ones which are both initiated
               by  the Employee and made from a plan maintained by one
               employer  to a plan maintained by another employer), if
               this   Plan  provides  the  rollovers  or  plan-to-plan
               transfers,  it  shall always consider such rollovers or
               plan-to-plan   transfers  as  a  distribution  for  the
               purposes  of  this  Section.  If  this Plan is the plan
               accepting  such rollovers or plan-to-plan transfers, it
               shall  not  consider  such  rollovers  or  plan-to-plan
               transfers  accepted after December 31, 1983, as part of
               the  Participant's  Present  Value  of Accrued Benefit.
               However,  rollovers  or plan-to-plan transfers accepted
               prior  to  January 1, 1984, shall be considered as part
               of the Participant's Present Value of Accrued Benefit.

               (5)  with respect to related rollovers and plan-to-plan
               transfers (ones either not initiated by the Employee or
               made  to  a  plan  maintained by the same employer), if
               this   Plan  provides  the  rollovers  or  plan-to-plan
               transfers,  it  shall  not be counted as a distribution
               for  purposes of this Section. If this Plan is the plan
               accepting  such rollovers or plan-to-plan transfers, it
               shall consider such rollovers or plan-to-plan transfers
               as  part  of the Participant's Present Value of Accrued
               Benefit,   irrespective  of  the  date  on  which  such
               rollovers or plan-to-plan transfers are accepted.

               (6)   For  the  purposes  of  determining  whether  two
               employers are to be treated as the same employer in (4)
               and  (5)  above,  all  employers  aggregated under Code
               Section 414(b), (c), (m) or (o) are treated as the same
               employer.

          (h)  "Top Heavy Group" means an Aggregation Group in which, as of
          the Determination Date, the sum of:

                                          24<PAGE>





               (1)  the  Present  Value  of  Accrued  Benefits  of Key
               Employees  under  all defined benefit plans included in
               the group, and

               (2)  the  Aggregate Accounts of Key Employees under all
               defined  contribution  plans  included  in  the  group,
               exceeds sixty percent (60%) of a similar sum determined
               for all Participants.

          2.3 POWERS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMPLOYER

          (a)  The  Employer  shall  be empowered to appoint and remove the
          Trustee  and  the  Administrator  from  time  to time as it deems
          necessary  for  the  proper  administration of the Plan to assure
          that  the Plan is being operated for the exclusive benefit of the
          Participants and their Beneficiaries in accordance with the terms
          of the Plan, the Code, and the Act.

          (b)  The  Employer shall establish a "funding policy and method",
          i.e.,  it  shall determine whether the Plan has a short-term need
          for  liquidity  (e.g., to pay benefits) or whether liquidity is a
          long-term goal and investment growth (and stability of same) is a
          more  current need, or shall appoint a qualified person to do so.
          The  Employer  or  its  delegate shall communicate such needs and
          goals  to  the Trustee, who shall coordinate such Plan needs with
          its  investment  policy.  The  communication  of  such a "funding
          policy  and method" shall not, however, constitute a directive to
          the  Trustee  as  to investment of the Trust Funds. Such "funding
          policy  and  method"  shall  be consistent with the objectives of
          this Plan and with the requirements of Title I of the Act.

          (c) The Employer shall periodically review the performance of any
          Fiduciary  or  other person to whom duties have been delegated or
          allocated  by it under the provisions of this Plan or pursuant to
          p r ocedures  established  hereunder.  This  requirement  may  be
          satisfied  by  formal  periodic  review  by  the Employer or by a
          qualified person specifically designated by the Employer, through
          day-to-day  conduct  and evaluation, or through other appropriate
          ways.

          2.4 DESIGNATION OF ADMINISTRATIVE AUTHORITY

          The  Employer  shall  appoint  one  or  more  Administrators. Any
          person,  including,  but  not  limited  to,  the Employees of the
          Employer,  shall  be  eligible  to serve as an Administrator. Any
          person  so  appointed  shall  signify  his  acceptance  by filing
          written acceptance with the Employer. An Administrator may resign
          by  delivering  his  written  resignation  to  the Employer or be
          removed by the Employer by delivery of written notice of removal,
          to  take  effect at a date specified therein, or upon delivery to
          the Administrator if no date is specified.


                                          25<PAGE>





          T h e    E m ployer,  upon  the  resignation  or  removal  of  an
          Administrator, shall promptly designate in writing a successor to
          this position. If the Employer does not appoint an Administrator,
          the Employer will function as the Administrator.


          2.5 ALLOCATION AND DELEGATION OF RESPONSIBILITIES

          If  more  than  one  person  is  appointed  as Administrator, the
          responsibilities  of  each  Administrator may be specified by the
          Employer  and  accepted  in writing by each Administrator. In the
          event  that  no  such  delegation  is  made  by the Employer, the
          Administrators    may   allocate   the   responsibilities   among
          themselves,  in  which  event the Administrators shall notify the
          Employer  and  the  Trustee in writing of such action and specify
          t h e    responsibilities  of  each  Administrator.  The  Trustee
          thereafter  shall  accept and rely upon any documents executed by
          the  appropriate Administrator until such time as the Employer or
          the  Administrators file with the Trustee a written revocation of
          such designation.

          2.6 POWERS AND DUTIES OF THE ADMINISTRATOR

          The  primary responsibility of the Administrator is to administer
          the  Plan for the exclusive benefit of the Participants and their
          Beneficiaries,  subject  to  the  specific terms of the Plan. The
          Administrator  shall  administer  the Plan in accordance with its
          terms  and  shall  have  the power and discretion to construe the
          terms  of  the  Plan  and  to  determine all questions arising in
          connection   with   the   administration,   interpretation,   and
          a p p lication  of  the  Plan.  Any  such  determination  by  the
          Administrator  shall  be conclusive and binding upon all persons.
          The  Administrator  may establish procedures, correct any defect,
          supply  any  information,  or reconcile any inconsistency in such
          manner  and  to  such  extent  as  shall  be  deemed necessary or
          advisable  to  carry  out  the  purpose  of  the  Plan; provided,
          however, that any procedure, discretionary act, interpretation or
          construction  shall  be  done in a nondiscriminatory manner based
          upon   uniform  principles  consistently  applied  and  shall  be
          consistent  with  the  intent  that the Plan shall continue to be
          deemed  a  qualified plan under the terms of Code Section 401(a),
          and  shall  comply  with the terms of the Act and all regulations
          issued  pursuant thereto. The Administrator shall have all powers
          necessary  or  appropriate  to  accomplish  his duties under this
          Plan.

          The Administrator shall be charged with the duties of the general
          administration  of  the  Plan, including, but not limited to, the
          following:

               (a)  the discretion to determine all questions relating
               to  the  eligibility  of  Employees  to  participate or

                                          26<PAGE>





               remain  a Participant hereunder and to receive benefits
               under the Plan;

               (b)  to  compute,  certify, and direct the Trustee with
               respect to the amount and the kind of benefits to which
               any Participant shall be entitled hereunder;

               (c) to authorize and direct the Trustee with respect to
               all     nondiscretionary    or    otherwise    directed
               disbursements from the Trust;

               ( d )   to  maintain  all  necessary  records  for  the
               administration of the Plan;

               (e) to interpret the provisions of the Plan and to make
               and  publish  such  rules for regulation of the Plan as
               are consistent with the terms hereof;

               (f)  to  determine the size and type of any Contract to
               be  purchased  from  any  insurer  and to designate the
               insurer  from  which  such Contract shall be purchased.
               All  Policies  shall be issued on a uniform basis as of
               each  Anniversary Date with respect to all Participants
               under similar circumstances;

               (g)  to  compute and certify to the Employer and to the
               Trustee  from  time to time the sums of money necessary
               or desirable to be contributed to the Plan;

               (h)  to  consult  with  the  Employer  and  the Trustee
               regarding  the short-term and long-term liquidity needs
               of  the Plan in order that the Trustee can exercise any
               i n v e stment  discretion  in  a  manner  designed  to
               accomplish specific objectives;

               (i)  to prepare and distribute to Employees a procedure
               for  notifying  Participants and Beneficiaries of their
               rights  to  elect  joint  and  survivor  annuities  and
               Pre-Retirement  Survivor  Annuities  as required by the
               Act and Regulations thereunder;

               (j)  to  assist  any  Participant regarding his rights,
               benefits, or elections available under the Plan.

          2.7 RECORDS AND REPORTS

          The  Administrator  shall  keep a record of all actions taken and
          shall  keep  all  other books of account, records, and other data
          that  may  be necessary for proper administration of the Plan and
          shall be responsible for supplying all information and reports to
          the  Internal Revenue Service, Department of Labor, Participants,
          Beneficiaries and others as required by law.

                                          27<PAGE>





          2.8 APPOINTMENT OF ADVISORS

          The  Administrator,  or  the  Trustee  with  the  consent  of the
          Administrator,  may  appoint  counsel, specialists, advisers, and
          other persons as the Administrator or the Trustee deems necessary
          or desirable in connection with the administration of this Plan.


          2.9 INFORMATION FROM EMPLOYER

          To  enable  the  Administrator  to  perform  his  functions,  the
          Employer   shall  supply  full  and  timely  information  to  the
          Administrator  on all matters relating to the Compensation of all
          Participants,  their  Hours  of  Service, their Years of Service,
          t h e i r   retirement,  death,  disability,  or  termination  of
          employment,  and  such other pertinent facts as the Administrator
          may  require;  and  the Administrator shall advise the Trustee of
          such  of the foregoing facts as may be pertinent to the Trustee's
          duties  under  the  Plan.  The  Administrator  may rely upon such
          information as is supplied by the Employer and shall have no duty
          or responsibility to verify such information.

          2.10 PAYMENT OF EXPENSES

          All  expenses of administration may be paid out of the Trust Fund
          unless  paid  by  the  Employer.  Such expenses shall include any
          expenses  incident  to  the  functioning  of  the  Administrator,
          including,  but not limited to, fees of accountants, counsel, and
          o t h er  specialists  and  their  agents,  and  other  costs  of
          administering the Plan. Until paid, the expenses shall constitute
          a  liability  of  the  Trust  Fund.  However,  the  Employer  may
          reimburse the Trust Fund for any administration expense incurred.
          A n y  administration  expense  paid  to  the  Trust  Fund  as  a
          reimbursement shall not be considered an Employer contribution.

          2.11 MAJORITY ACTIONS

          Except  where  there  has  been  an  allocation and delegation of
          administrative  authority pursuant to Section 2.5, if there shall
          be  more  than one Administrator, they shall act by a majority of
          their  number,  but may authorize one or more of them to sign all
          papers on their behalf.

          2.12 CLAIMS PROCEDURE

          Claims  for  benefits  under  the  Plan  may  be  filed  with the
          Administrator  on  forms supplied by the Employer. Written notice
          of  the disposition of a claim shall be furnished to the claimant
          within  90  days after the application is filed. In the event the
          claim is denied, the reasons for the denial shall be specifically
          set  forth  in the notice in language calculated to be understood
          by the claimant, pertinent provisions of the Plan shall be cited,

                                          28<PAGE>





          and, where appropriate, an explanation as to how the claimant can
          perfect  the  claim  will  be provided. In addition, the claimant
          shall  be  furnished  with  an  explanation  of the Plan's claims
          review procedure.

          2.13 CLAIMS REVIEW PROCEDURE

          Any  Employee, former Employee, or Beneficiary of either, who has
          been denied a benefit by a decision of the Administrator pursuant
          to Section 2.12 shall be entitled to request the Administrator to
          give  further  consideration  to  his  claim  by  filing with the
          Administrator   (on  a  form  which  may  be  obtained  from  the
          Administrator)  a  request  for a hearing. Such request, together
          with a written statement of the reasons why the claimant believes
          h i s    claim  should  be  allowed,  shall  be  filed  with  the
          Administrator  no later than 60 days after receipt of the written
          notification  provided  for  in  Section  2.12. The Administrator
          shall  then  conduct  a hearing within the next 60 days, at which
          the  claimant  may  be  represented  by  an attorney or any other
          representative  of  his  choosing and at which the claimant shall
          have  an  opportunity  to  submit  written  and oral evidence and
          arguments  in  support  of  his  claim.  At the hearing (or prior
          thereto upon 5 business days written notice to the Administrator)
          the  claimant  or his representative shall have an opportunity to
          review all documents in the possession of the Administrator which
          are  pertinent to the claim at issue and its disallowance. Either
          the  claimant  or the Administrator may cause a court reporter to
          attend  the  hearing and record the proceedings. In such event, a
          complete written transcript of the proceedings shall be furnished
          to  both  parties  by the court reporter. The full expense of any
          such  court  reporter  and such transcripts shall be borne by the
          party  causing  the court reporter to attend the hearing. A final
          decision  as  to  the allowance of the claim shall be made by the
          Administrator  within  60  days  of receipt of the appeal (unless
          t h ere  has  been  an  extension  of  60  days  due  to  special
          circumstances,  provided  the delay and the special circumstances
          occasioning it are communicated to the claimant within the 60 day
          period).   Such  communication  shall  be  written  in  a  manner
          calculated  to  be  understood  by the claimant and shall include
          specific  reasons for the decision and specific references to the
          pertinent Plan provisions on which the decision is based.












                                          29<PAGE>





                                     ARTICLE III
                                     ELIGIBILITY

          3.1 CONDITIONS OF ELIGIBILITY

          Any  Eligible  Employee who has completed one (1) Year of Service
          shall  be eligible to participate hereunder as of the date he has
          satisfied  such  requirements.  However,  any  Employee who was a
          Participant  in  the  Plan  prior  to  the effective date of this
          amendment  and  restatement  shall continue to participate in the
          Plan.

          3.2 EFFECTIVE DATE OF PARTICIPATION

          An  Eligible  Employee shall become a Participant effective as of
          the earlier of the first day of the Plan Year or the first day of
          the  seventh  month  of  such  Plan  Year coinciding with or next
          following the date such Employee met the eligibility requirements
          of  Section  3.1, provided said Employee was still employed as of
          such  date  (or  if  not employed on such date, as of the date of
          rehire if a l-Year Break in Service has not occurred).

          3.3 DETERMINATION OF ELIGIBILITY

          The   Administrator  shall  determine  the  eligibility  of  each
          Employee  for  participation  in  the Plan based upon information
          furnished by the Employer. Such determination shall be conclusive
          and  binding  upon  all  persons,  as  long  as  the same is made
          pursuant  to  the  Plan  and the Act. Such determination shall be
          subject to review per Section 2.13.

          3.4 TERMINATION OF ELIGIBILITY

          (a)  In the event a Participant shall go from a classification of
          an  Eligible  Employee  to  an  ineligible  Employee, such Former
          Participant  shall  continue to vest in his Accrued Benefit under
          the  Plan  for each Year of Service completed while a noneligible
          employee,  until  such  time  as  his  Accrued  Benefit  shall be
          forfeited or distributed pursuant to the terms of the Plan.

          (b)  In  the  event  a  Participant  is  no longer a member of an
          eligible class of Employees and becomes ineligible to participate
          but  has  not  incurred  a 1-Year Break in Service, such Employee
          will  participate immediately upon returning to an eligible class
          of  Employees.  If  such  Participant  incurs  a  1-Year Break in
          Service,  eligibility  will  be  determined  under  the  break in
          service rules of the Plan.

          (c)  In  the event an Employee who is not a member of an eligible
          class  of  Employees  becomes a member of an eligible class, such
          Employee  will  participate  immediately  if  such  Employee  has
          satisfied the minimum age and service requirements and would have

                                          30<PAGE>





          otherwise previously become a Participant.




















































                                          31<PAGE>





                                      ARTICLE IV
                              CONTRIBUTION AND VALUATION

          4.1 PAYMENT OF CONTRIBUTIONS

          No  contribution  shall  be  required  under  the  Plan  from any
          Participant.  The  Employer shall pay to the Trustee from time to
          time  such  amounts in cash or property acceptable to the Trustee
          as the Administrator and Employer shall determine to be necessary
          to  provide  the  benefits  under  the  Plan  determined  by  the
          application  of  accepted  actuarial methods and assumptions. The
          method of funding shall be consistent with Plan objectives.

          4.2 ACTUARIAL METHODS

          In  measuring  the  liabilities  under the Plan and contributions
          t h ereto,  the  enrolled  actuary  will  use  such  methods  and
          assumptions  as will reasonably reflect the cost of the benefits.
          The  Plan  assets are to be valued on the basis of any reasonable
          method  of  valuation  that  takes into account fair market value
          pursuant  to regulations prescribed by the Secretary of Treasury.
          There  must  be  an actuarial valuation of the Plan at least once
          every year.






























                                          32<PAGE>





                                      ARTICLE V
                                       BENEFITS

          5.1 RETIREMENT BENEFITS

          (a)  The  amount of monthly retirement benefit to be provided for
          each Participant who retires on his Normal Retirement Date (which
          benefit  is herein called his Normal Retirement Benefit) shall be
          the  Accrued  Benefit determined as of his Normal Retirement Date
          in  accordance  with  the  provisions of Section 1.1 of the Plan.
          The  "Normal Retirement Benefit" means the periodic benefit under
          the Plan commencing upon early retirement or at Normal Retirement
          Date, whichever benefit is greater.

          (b)  A  Participant  may  elect  to retire on an Early Retirement
          Date.  In the event that a Participant makes such an election, he
          shall be entitled to receive an Early Retirement Benefit equal to
          his  Accrued  Benefit  payable  at  his  Normal  Retirement Date.
          However, if a Participant so elects, he may receive payment of an
          Early Retirement Benefit commencing on the first day of the month
          coinciding  with  or  next  following  his Early Retirement Date,
          which  Early  Retirement  Benefit shall equal his Accrued Benefit
          reduced  (on  a  monthly  basis  to  reflect  the  month in which
          benefits commence) for each additional year that the commencement
          of  an  Early  Retirement  Benefit precedes Normal Retirement Age
          (determined without regard to any years of participation) so that
          the  cumulative  reduction from Normal Retirement Age (determined
          without regard to any years of participation) to the commencement
          of  an  Early  Retirement  Benefit  equals 1/15th for each of the
          first  five  (5)  years  and 1/30th for each of the next five (5)
          years and reduced actuarially for each additional year thereafter
          that  the  Anniversary Date on which his Early Retirement Benefit
          commences  precedes  his  Normal  Retirement Age. With respect to
          Early  Retirement  Benefits  commencing  prior to the Participant
          attaining  age  55,  the Accrued Benefit shall be further reduced
          (on  a  monthly  basis  to  reflect  the  month in which benefits
          commence)  to  an  amount that is the Actuarial Equivalent of the
          Accrued  Benefit  (as  reduced  in  accordance with the preceding
          sentence)  applicable  to  a  benefit  commencing in the month in
          which  the  Participant  attains  age  55.  For  purposes of this
          paragraph, a benefit commences on the first day of the period for
          which  the  benefit  is  paid.  Notwithstanding the above, if the
          Actuarial  Equivalent  of  the  Present  Value of Accrued Benefit
          (calculated without regard to Section 1.3) of such Participant is
          greater  than the Early Retirement Benefit calculated above, such
          amount shall be the Early Retirement Benefit.

          Notwithstanding  the  above, the Early Retirement Benefit for any
          Participant  who  is a Transmix Participant as defined in Section
          1.1(b)(iii)  herein  shall  not be less than the early retirement
          benefit determined under the terms of the Transmix Plan, based on
          the  accrued  benefit  under such Transmix Plan as of the date of

                                          33<PAGE>





          merger of such Transmix Plan with this Plan.

          (c)  The  Normal  Retirement  Benefit  payable  to  a Participant
          pursuant   to  this  Section  5.1  shall  be  a  monthly  pension
          commencing  on  his  Retirement Date and continuing for life. The
          f o rm  of  distribution  of  such  benefit,  however,  shall  be
          determined pursuant to the provisions of Section 5.7.

          (d)  At  the  request  of  a  Participant  he may be continued in
          employment  beyond  his Normal Retirement Date. In such event, no
          retirement  benefit  will  be  paid  to  the Participant until he
          actually  retires,  subject,  however,  to  any  required minimum
          distributions pursuant to Section 5.7(e). For purposes of 5.7(e),
          at  the  close of each Plan Year (which begins after December 31,
          1987) prior to his actual Retirement Date, a Participant shall be
          entitled  to  a  retirement  benefit equal to his Accrued Benefit
          determined  at  the  close  of  the  Plan  Year,  subject  to the
          provisions  of  Section  5.16.  The  monthly  retirement  benefit
          calculated pursuant to this Section 5.1(d) shall be offset by the
          actuarial value (determined pursuant to Section 1.3) of the total
          benefit  distributions  (pursuant  to Section 5.7(e)) made by the
          close of the Plan Year.  

          (e)  If  a  Former  Participant again becomes a Participant, such
          r e newed  participation  shall  not  result  in  duplication  of
          benefits.  Accordingly,  if  he  has received a distribution of a
          Vested  Accrued  Benefit  under  the  Plan  by  reason  of  prior
          participation  (and  such distribution has not been repaid to the
          Plan  with  interest  within  a  period of the earlier of 5 years
          after  the  first  date  on which the Participant is subsequently
          reemployed  by the Employer or the close of the first period of 5
          consecutive   l-Year  Breaks  in  Service  commencing  after  the
          distribution),  his Normal Retirement Benefit and Accrued Benefit
          shall  be  reduced  by  the  Actuarial Equivalent (at the date of
          distribution)  of  the present value of the Accrued Benefit as of
          the date of distribution. Any repayment by a Participant shall be
          equal to the total of:

               (1) the amount of the distribution,

               (2)  interest  on such distribution compounded annually
               at  the  rate  of  5 percent per annum from the date of
               distribution  to  the  date of repayment or to the last
               day  of the first Plan Year ending on or after December
               31, 1987, if earlier, and

               (3) interest on the sum of (1) and (2) above compounded
               annually  at  the  rate  of  120 percent of the federal
               mid-term rate (as in effect under Code Section 1274 for
               the  first  month of a Plan Year) from the beginning of
               the  first  Plan Year beginning after December 31, 1987
               or the date of distribution, whichever is later, to the

                                          34<PAGE>





               date of repayment.

          For  purposes  of  this section (e), for a Former Participant who
          was  deemed  under  section  5.6  of  the Plan to have received a
          distribution,  upon  the reemployment of such Former Participant,
          the  employer-provided  accrued  benefit  will be restored to the
          amount  of  such  accrued  benefit  on  the  date  of  the deemed
          distribution if the Former Participant resumes employment covered
          under  this  Plan before the date the Former Participant incurs 5
          consecutive 1-Year Breaks in Service.

          (f)  If  a  Former  Participant who is receiving benefit payments
          under  this  Plan  is re-employed by the Employer, the payment of
          the benefit will be suspended during his period of re-employment,
          subject to the provisions of Section 5.16.  

          5.2 MINIMUM BENEFIT REQUIREMENT FOR TOP HEAVY PLAN

          (a)  Subject  to  Section  5.2(k),  the  minimum  Accrued Benefit
          derived  from  Employer  contributions  to be provided under this
          Section  for  each Non-Key Employee who is a Participant during a
          Top  Heavy  Plan  Year shall equal the product of (1) one-twelfth
          (1/12th)  of  "415  Compensation"  averaged  over  the  five  (5)
          consecutive  "limitation  years" (or actual number of "limitation
          years",  if  less)  which produce the highest average and (2) the
          lesser  of  (i)  two  percent  (2%)  multiplied  by Plan Years of
          Service or (ii) twenty percent (20%).

          (b)  For  purposes  of  providing  the minimum benefit under Code
          Section  416,  a Non-Key Employee who is not a Participant solely
          because  (1)  his Compensation is below a stated amount or (2) he
          declined  to  make  mandatory  contributions (if required) to the
          Plan  will  be  considered to be a Participant. Furthermore, such
          minimum  benefit  shall  be  provided  regardless of whether such
          Non-Key Employee is employed on a specified date.

          (c)  For  purposes of this Section, Plan Years of Service for any
          Plan  Year beginning before January 1, 1984, or for any Plan Year
          during  which  the  Plan  was  not  a  Top  Heavy  Plan  shall be
          disregarded.

          (d)  For  purposes  of  this  Section, "415 Compensation" for any
          "limitation  year"  ending  in  a  Plan Year which began prior to
          January  1, 1984, subsequent to the last "limitation year" during
          which  the  Plan is a Top Heavy Plan, or in which the Participant
          failed to complete a Plan Year of Service, shall be disregarded.

          (e) For the purposes of this Section, "415 Compensation" shall be
          limited in accordance with Code Section 417(a)(17).  However, for
          Plan  Years  beginning prior to January 1, 1989, a $200,000 limit
          shall  apply  only  for  Top  Heavy  Plan  Years and shall not be
          adjusted.

                                          35<PAGE>





          (f)  If Section 5.1(c) provides for the Normal Retirement Benefit
          to  be  paid  in  a  form  other  than a single life annuity, the
          Accrued  Benefit  under  this  Section  shall  be  the  Actuarial
          Equivalent  of  the  minimum  Accrued  Benefit  under  (a)  above
          pursuant to Section 1.3.

          (g) If payment of the minimum Accrued Benefit commences at a date
          other  than  Normal  Retirement Date, the minimum Accrued Benefit
          shall  be the Actuarial Equivalent of the minimum Accrued Benefit
          commencing at Normal Retirement Date pursuant to Section 1.3.

          (h) The extra minimum Accrued Benefit (required by Section 6.6(d)
          to provide the higher limitations) will not be provided.

          (i) If a Non-Key Employee participates in this Plan and a defined
          contribution  plan included in a Required Aggregation Group which
          is  top  heavy, the minimum benefits shall be provided under this
          Plan.

          (j)  To  the  extent  required to be nonforfeitable under Section
          5.6,  the  minimum  Accrued Benefit under this Section may not be
          forfeited   under  Code  Section  411(a)(3)(B)  or  Code  Section
          411(a)(3)(D).

          (k)  The  Top  Heavy provisions of this Plan shall not apply to a
          Participant   who  is  represented  by  a  collective  bargaining
          agreement.

          5.3 PAYMENT OF RETIREMENT BENEFITS

          When  a  Participant retires, the Administrator shall immediately
          take  all  necessary  steps and execute all required documents to
          cause  the  payment to him of the retirement benefit available to
          him under the Plan or his Accrued Benefit if greater.

          5.4 DISABILITY RETIREMENT BENEFITS

          Except  with  respect to Participants whose employment is covered
          by  a collective bargaining agreement as set forth in Appendix A,
          B,  or C hereof, no disability benefits, other than those payable
          upon termination of employment, are provided in this Plan.

          With  respect  to  a Participant whose employment is covered by a
          collective bargaining agreement as set forth in Appendix A, B, or
          C hereof, the following paragraphs (a) and (b) shall apply.

          (a)  With respect to a disability which commences on or after the
          Transition  End  Date  (as  defined  in  Appendix  A,  B, or C as
          applicable  to  such  Participant), no disability benefits, other
          than  those  payable upon termination of employment, are provided
          in this Plan.


                                          36<PAGE>





          (b)  With  respect  to  a disability which commences prior to the
          Transition  End  Date  as applicable to such Participant, a Total
          and Permanent Disability benefit shall be paid in accordance with
          the following provisions.

               (i)  A  Participant  whose years of Credit Service equals or
               exceeds  the  Disability  Minimum  defined in the applicable
               Appendix  herein,  and  who  becomes totally and permanently
               disabled  shall  be  eligible for a disability pension.  The
               disability  pension  equal to the Accrued Benefit, using the
               formula  of  1.1(b)(ii),  "Benefit based on Fixed Dollar Per
               Year,"  with the fixed dollar amount equal to the sum of (a)
               the  amount determined in accordance with 1.1(b)(ii) and the
               applicable  Appendix A, B, or C, and (b) one dollar ($1.00).
               The  fixed dollar amount shall be that in effect at the time
               the  Participant  qualifies for the disability benefit.  The
               amount  determined  hereunder shall not be less than $450.00
               per  month.  Any benefit payable under this Section shall be
               reduced  by  the  amount of any income payable on account of
               s u c h  disability  under  any  group  disability  coverage
               available  through  the  Employer, but in no event shall the
               total  income  provided by this Plan and such other coverage
               be less than the amount otherwise payable under this Plan.

               If  the Participant was married during the full twelve month
               period  prior  to  his  disability  retirement,  unless  the
               Participant  and  the  Participant's spouse elect otherwise,
               the  benefit  determined  above  shall be modified so that a
               benefit  will  be  payable  to the spouse if the Participant
               dies  while  totally  and  permanently  disabled  as defined
               herein  and  prior  to  age  sixty-five.  The amount of such
               modified  benefit  shall  be  determined  by multiplying the
               benefit  calculated  above  by  a ratio based on the present
               value  of a benefit payable for the life of the Participant,
               to   the  present  value  of  a  benefit    payable  to  the
               Participant for life, and one-half of such amount payable to
               t h e  Participant's  spouse  commencing  on  the  date  the
               Participant  would have attained age 55, if his death occurs
               prior  to  age  55, or, the date of the Participant's death,
               whichever  is  later,  and thereafter for the spouse's life.
               In  determining  the  present values, interest and mortality
               will  be  based on the Actuarial Equivalent in effect, based
               on  the  age of the Participant and the Participant's spouse
               and  using  a  mortality  table  which reflects the impaired
               mortality of the Participant.

               (ii)  The  amount  determined  in (i) above shall be payable
               until  the Participant reaches age sixty-five (65), but only
               while  the  Participant  remains  permanently  disabled  and
               living  (subject  to the death benefit payable to the spouse
               as described in the (i) above).  At the time the Participant
               reaches  age  sixty-five,  the  disability  benefit  will be

                                          37<PAGE>





               discontinued  and  replaced with a normal retirement benefit
               equal  to the Participant's Accrued Benefit calculated as of
               the date disability commenced.

               (iii)  A  Participant  shall  be  deemed  to  be totally and
               permanently  disabled when on the basis of qualified medical
               evidence  he is found to be wholly and permanently prevented
               from  performing the duties of any employment as a result of
               bodily  injury  or  disease,  either  occupational  or  non-
               occupational  in  cause;  and  said  disability  shall  have
               continued  until  he  has  exhausted his weekly sickness and
               accident   benefits  paid  under  an  Insurance  and  Health
               Agreement between the Employer and the collective bargaining
               unit;  and  said disability was not contracted, suffered, or
               incurred  while  the  Participant was engaged in, nor did it
               result, directly or indirectly, from his having engaged in a
               criminal enterprise.

               (iv)  Any  disability pensioner may be required to submit to
               medical  examination  at any time during retirement prior to
               age  65, but not more often than semi-annually, to determine
               whether  he  is  eligible  for continuance of the disability
               pension.    If on the basis of such examination, it is found
               that  such pensioner is no longer disabled as defined above,
               the  disability  pension  shall  cease.    In  the event the
               d i s a b ility  pensioner  refuses  to  submit  to  medical
               examination,  his  pension  will  be  discontinued  until he
               submits to examination.

               (v)  If  any difference shall arise between the Employer and
               the  Participant  as  to  whether  such  Participant  is  or
               continues  to be totally and permanently disabled within the
               meaning   hereof,  such  difference  shall  be  resolved  as
               follows.    The Participant shall be examined by a qualified
               physician  appointed for such purpose by the Employer and by
               a  qualified  physician appointed for such purpose by a duly
               authorized  representative  of  the  union.    If they shall
               disagree  concerning  whether the Participant is totally and
               permanently disabled in accordance with this provision, that
               question shall be submitted to a third physician selected by
               such  two  physicians.    The  medical  opinion of the third
               p h y s ician  after  examination  of  the  Participant  and
               consultation  with  the  other  two physicians, shall decide
               such question.  

          5.5 DEATH BENEFITS

          (a)  The  death  benefit  provided  under  this Plan shall be the
          "minimum  spouse's  death  benefit."  In the case of an unmarried
          Participant or unmarried Former Participant who dies prior to his
          Retirement  Date,  no  death benefits shall be payable under this
          Plan.

                                          38<PAGE>





          (b) For the purposes of this Section, the "minimum spouse's death
          benefit"  means  a death benefit for a Vested married Participant
          or  Vested  married  Former  Participant payable in the form of a
          Pre-Retirement  Survivor  Annuity. Such annuity payments shall be
          equal  to the amount which would be payable as a survivor annuity
          under the joint and survivor annuity provisions of the Plan if:

               (1)  in  the  case  of a Participant who dies after the
               Earliest  Retirement  Age, such Participant had retired
               with an immediate joint and survivor annuity on the day
               before the Participant's date of death, or

               (2)  in the case of a Participant who dies on or before
               the Earliest Retirement Age, such Participant had:

                    (i)  separated from service on the earlier of
                    the  actual time of separation or the date of
                    his death,

                    (ii) survived to the Earliest Retirement Age,

                    (iii)  retired  with  an  immediate joint and
                    survivor  annuity  at the Earliest Retirement
                    Age  based  on  his Vested Accrued Benefit on
                    his date of death, and

                    (iv)  died  on the day after the day on which
                    said  Participant  would  have  attained  the
                    Earliest Retirement Age.

          ( c )   The  Beneficiary  of  the  death  benefit  shall  be  the
          Participant's  Spouse, who shall receive such benefit in the form
          of  a Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity pursuant to Section 5.8. No
          designation  of any Beneficiary hereunder shall be recognized for
          a Participant who is not married at the time of his death.

          (d)  With respect to a Participant whose employment is covered by
          a  collective bargaining agreement as set forth in Appendix A, B,
          or  C  herein, for deaths which occur prior to the Transition End
          Date  (as  defined in such Appendix), and if the Participant dies
          while  still  employed  by the Employer, the minimum amount which
          shall  be  payable  to  the  surviving spouse shall be $75.00 per
          month.    This minimum payment shall be made through the month in
          which  said  surviving  spouse  becomes age 62, at which time the
          monthly  payment  will  be  the amount otherwise determined above
          without regard to this paragraph (d).

          5.6 TERMINATION OF EMPLOYMENT BEFORE RETIREMENT

          (a)  Payment to a Former Participant of the Vested portion of his
          Accrued  Benefit,  unless  he  otherwise  elects, shall begin not
          later than the 60th day after the close of the Plan Year in which

                                          39<PAGE>





          the  latest of the following events occurs: (1) the date on which
          the  Participant  attains  the  earlier  of  age 65 or the Normal
          Retirement  Age specified herein; (2) the 10th anniversary of the
          year  in  which  the  Participant  commenced participation in the
          Plan; or (3) the date the Participant terminates his service with
          the Employer.

          However,  the  Administrator  shall direct the earlier payment of
          the  entire  Vested  portion  of  the  Present  Value  of Accrued
          Benefit,  but  only  if  it  does not exceed $3,500 and has never
          exceeded $3,500 at the time of any prior distribution.

          For  purposes  of  this Section 5.6, if the value of a Terminated
          Participant's  Vested  portion  of  the  Present Value of Accrued
          Benefit  is  zero,  the Terminated Participant shall be deemed to
          have  received  a  distribution  of  such  Vested  portion of the
          Present Value of Accrued Benefit.

          That  portion  of a Terminated Participant's Accrued Benefit that
          is  not  Vested shall be forfeited and used only to reduce future
          costs of the Plan.

          (b) The Vested portion of any Participant's Accrued Benefit shall
          be  a percentage of such Participant's Accrued Benefit determined
          on  the  basis  of  the  Participant's number of Years of Service
          according to the following schedule:

                                   Vesting Schedule
                         Years of Service          Percentage

                           0 - 4                       0 %
                           5                         100 %

          (c)  Notwithstanding  the  vesting  provided for in paragraph (b)
          above,  for  any  Top  Heavy Plan Year, the Vested portion of the
          Accrued  Benefit  of  any  Participant who has an Hour of Service
          after  the  Plan  becomes  top heavy shall be a percentage of the
          Participant's  Accrued  Benefit  determined  on  the basis of the
          Participant's  number  of  Years  of  Service  according  to  the
          following schedule:

                                   Vesting Schedule
                         Years of Service          Percentage

                           1 - 2                       0 %
                             3                       100 %      

          If in any subsequent Plan Year, the Plan ceases to be a Top Heavy
          Plan,  the  Administrator shall revert to the vesting schedule in
          effect  before  this  Plan  became  a  Top  Heavy  Plan. Any such
          reversion  shall  be  treated as a Plan amendment pursuant to the
          terms  of  the  Plan.  The provisions of this paragraph (c) shall

                                          40<PAGE>





          not  apply  to  Participants  who are represented by a collective
          bargaining agreement.

          (d)  Notwithstanding  the  vesting  schedule  above,  the  Vested
          percentage  of  a Participant's Accrued Benefit shall not be less
          than  the  Vested  percentage  attained  as  of  the later of the
          e f f e ctive  date  or  adoption  date  of  this  amendment  and
          restatement.

          ( e )  Notwithstanding  the  vesting  schedule  above,  upon  the
          cessation  of  the accrual of benefits under the Plan or upon any
          full  or partial termination of the Plan, an affected Participant
          shall  become fully Vested in his Accrued Benefit which shall not
          thereafter be subject to forfeiture.

          (f)  The computation of a Participant's nonforfeitable percentage
          of his interest in the Plan shall not be reduced as the result of
          any  direct or indirect amendment to this Plan. For this purpose,
          the  Plan  shall  be  treated  as having been amended if the Plan
          provides  for  an  automatic change in vesting due to a change in
          top heavy status. In the event that the Plan is amended to change
          or modify any vesting schedule, a Participant with at least three
          (3)  Years  of  Service as of the expiration date of the election
          period  may  elect to have his nonforfeitable percentage computed
          under the Plan without regard to such amendment. If a Participant
          fails  to  make  such  election,  then  such Participant shall be
          subject  to  the new vesting schedule. The Participant's election
          period  shall  commence on the adoption date of the amendment and
          shall end 60 days after the latest of:

               (1) the adoption date of the amendment,

               (2) the effective date of the amendment, or

               (3) the date the Participant receives written notice of
               the amendment from the Employer or Administrator.

          (g)  (1)  If  any Terminated Participant shall be reemployed
               by  the  Employer  before  a  1-Year  Break  in Service
               occurs, he shall continue to participate in the Plan in
               the   same  manner  as  if  such  termination  had  not
               occurred.

               (2)  If  any  Former  Participant is reemployed after a
               1-Year  Break in Service has occurred, for the purposes
               of  Section  5.6(b)  and  for calculating Plan Years of
               Service, the Years of Service and Plan Years of Service
               shall  include  Years  of  Service  and  Plan  Years of
               Service prior to his 1-Year Break in Service subject to
               the following rules:

                    (i)  If  a  Former  Participant  has a 1-Year

                                          41<PAGE>





                    Break   in   Service,   his   pre-break   and
                    p o s t -break  service  shall  be  used  for
                    computing  Years  of  Service for eligibility
                    and  for  vesting  purposes only after he has
                    been  employed  for  one  (1) Year of Service
                    following  the  date of his reemployment with
                    the Employer;

                    (ii)  Any  Former  Participant  who under the
                    Plan  does not have a nonforfeitable right to
                    any  interest  in  the  Plan  resulting  from
                    Employer  contributions  shall  lose  credits
                    otherwise  allowable  under  (i) above if his
                    consecutive 1-Year Breaks in Service equal or
                    exceed the greater of (A) five (5) or (B) the
                    aggregate  number  of  his pre-break Years of
                    Service;

                    (iii) If a Former Participant who has not had
                    his Years of Service before a 1-Year Break in
                    Service  disregarded  pursuant  to (ii) above
                    c o mpletes  one  (1)  Year  of  Service  for
                    e l igibility    purposes    following    his
                    reemployment  with  the  Employer,  he  shall
                    participate  in  the  Plan retroactively from
                    his date of reemployment;

                    (iv)  If a Former Participant who has not had
                    his Years of Service before a 1-Year Break in
                    Service  disregarded  pursuant  to (ii) above
                    completes  a  Year of Service (a 1-Year Break
                    i n    Service   previously   occurred,   but
                    employment  had  not  terminated),  he  shall
                    participate  in  the  Plan retroactively from
                    the  first  day of the Plan Year during which
                    he completes one (1) Year of Service.

          5.7 DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS

          (a)  (1)  Unless  otherwise  elected  as  provided  below, a
               Participant  who  is  married  on the "annuity starting
               date" and who does not die before the "annuity starting
               date" shall receive the value of all of his benefits in
               the form of a joint and survivor annuity. The joint and
               s u r v ivor  annuity  is  an  annuity  that  commences
               immediately  and shall be the Actuarial Equivalent of a
               single  life  annuity. Such joint and survivor benefits
               following the Participant's death shall continue to the
               Spouse  during the Spouse's lifetime at a rate equal to
               50%  of the rate at which such benefits were payable to
               the  Participant.  This  joint and 50% survivor annuity
               shall  be considered the designated qualified joint and

                                          42<PAGE>





               survivor  annuity and automatic form of payment for the
               purposes  of  this  Plan.  However, the Participant may
               elect   to  receive  a  smaller  annuity  benefit  with
               continuation  of  payments  to  the Spouse at a rate of
               s i xty-six   and   two-thirds   percent   (66   2/3%),
               seventy-five  percent  (75%)  or  one  hundred  percent
               (100%)  of the rate payable to a Participant during his
               lifetime,  which alternative joint and survivor annuity
               shall  be  the  Actuarial  Equivalent  of the automatic
               joint and 50% survivor annuity. The Participant may, in
               lieu  of a joint and survivor annuity, elect to receive
               his benefits in the form of (i) an annuity for his life
               only  or  (ii)  an  annuity  for his life with 10-years
               certain, which are the Actuarial Equivalent of a single
               life  annuity.  An  unmarried Participant shall receive
               the value of his benefit in the form of a life annuity.
               The  joint  and survivor annuity, the life annuity with
               1 0 - years  certain  and  the  life  annuity  form  of
               distribution  shall  be the Actuarial Equivalent of the
               benefits due the Participant.

               (2)  Any  election  to  waive  the  joint  and survivor
               annuity  must  be  made  by  the Participant in writing
               during  the  election period and be consented to by the
               P a r ticipant's  Spouse.  If  the  Spouse  is  legally
               i n competent  to  give  consent,  the  Spouse's  legal
               guardian, even if such guardian is the Participant, may
               g i v e   consent.  Such  election  shall  designate  a
               Beneficiary  (or  a  form  of benefits) that may not be
               changed  without spousal consent (unless the consent of
               the   Spouse  expressly  permits  designations  by  the
               Participant  without the requirement of further consent
               b y   the  Spouse).  Such  Spouse's  consent  shall  be
               irrevocable  and  must  acknowledge  the effect of such
               election and be witnessed by a Plan representative or a
               notary public. Such consent shall not be required if it
               is established to the satisfaction of the Administrator
               that  the  required  consent cannot be obtained because
               there  is  no  Spouse, the Spouse cannot be located, or
               o t h e r  circumstances  that  may  be  prescribed  by
               Regulations.  The  election made by the Participant and
               consented  to  by  his  Spouse  may  be  revoked by the
               Participant  in  writing  without  the  consent  of the
               Spouse  at  any  time  during  the election period. The
               number  of  revocations  shall  not be limited. Any new
               election  must  comply  with  the  requirements of this
               paragraph.  A  former  Spouse's  waiver  shall  not  be
               binding on a new Spouse.

               (3) The election period to waive the joint and survivor
               annuity  shall  be  the  90-day  period  ending  on the
               "annuity starting date."

                                          43<PAGE>





               (4) For purposes of this Section, the "annuity starting
               date" means the first day of the first period for which
               an  amount  is paid as an annuity, or, in the case of a
               benefit  not  payable  in  the  form of an annuity, the
               first  day  on  which  all  events  have occurred which
               entitle the Participant to such benefit.

               (5)  With  regard  to  the  election, the Administrator
               shall  provide  to the Participant no less than 30 days
               and  no  more than 90 days before the "annuity starting
               date" a written explanation of:

                    (i) the terms and conditions of the joint and
                    survivor annuity, and

                    (ii) the Participant's right to make, and the
                    effect of, an election to waive the joint and
                    survivor annuity, and

                    (iii)  the  right of the Participant's Spouse
                    to consent to any election to waive the joint
                    and survivor annuity, and

                    (iv)  the  right of the Participant to revoke
                    s u ch  election,  and  the  effect  of  such
                    revocation.

          (b) A Participant may not elect to receive his Accrued Benefit or
          any  portion thereof in a lump-sum payment except (i) as provided
          in  Section  5.7(c)  and  (ii)  for  that  portion of his Accrued
          Benefit  accrued  while  a  participant  in  a  Merged Plan which
          allowed  a  lump-sum payment option that was a protected optional
          form  of  benefit  pursuant  to  Code  Section  411(d)(6)(B)(ii).
          Unless  specifically  stated herein, a lump-sum payment shall not
          include  the value of any early retirement subsidy which might be
          provided under the plan.

          (c)  The  present  value  of  a  Participant's joint and survivor
          annuity  derived from Employer and Employee contributions may not
          be  paid without his written consent if the value exceeds $3,500,
          o r    has  ever  exceeded  $3,500  at  the  time  of  any  prior
          distribution.  Further,  the Spouse of a Participant must consent
          in  writing  to  any  immediate distribution. If the value of the
          P a r ticipant's  benefit  derived  from  Employer  and  Employee
          contributions  does  not  exceed  $3,500  and  has never exceeded
          $3,500  at  the time of any prior distribution, the Administrator
          may    immediately   distribute   such   benefit   without   such
          Participant's  consent.  No  distribution  may  be made under the
          preceding  sentence  after the "annuity starting date" unless the
          P a r t icipant  and  his  Spouse  consent  in  writing  to  such
          distribution.  Any  written consent required under this paragraph
          must be obtained not more than 90 days before commencement of the

                                          44<PAGE>





          distribution  and  shall  be  made  in  a  manner consistent with
          Section  5.7(a)(2).  The Present Value of Accrued Benefit in this
          regard shall be determined as provided in Section 1.43.

          (d)  Any  distribution  to  a Participant who has a benefit which
          exceeds  $3,500,  or  has ever exceeded $3,500 at the time of any
          prior  distribution,  shall require such Participant's consent if
          such  distribution  commences  prior  to  the later of his Normal
          Retirement Age or age 62. With regard to this required consent:

               (1)  No  consent  shall be valid unless the Participant
               has  received  a  general  description  of the material
               features  and  an explanation of the relative values of
               the  optional forms of benefit available under the Plan
               that  would  satisfy  the  notice  requirements of Code
               Section 417.

               (2)  The  Participant  must be informed of his right to
               defer  receipt  of  the  distribution. If a Participant
               fails  to  consent,  it  shall be deemed an election to
               defer  the  commencement  of  payment  of  any benefit.
               However,  any election to defer the receipt of benefits
               shall not apply with respect to distributions which are
               required under Section 5.7(e).

               (3) Notice of the rights specified under this paragraph
               shall be provided no less than 30 days and no more than
               90 days before the "annuity starting date".

               ( 4 )   Written  consent  of  the  Participant  to  the
               distribution  must  not  be made before the Participant
               receives  the  notice and must not be made more than 90
               days before the "annuity starting date".

               (5)   No  consent  shall  be  valid  if  a  significant
               detriment  is imposed under the Plan on any Participant
               who does not consent to the distribution.

          (e)  Notwithstanding  any  provision in the Plan to the contrary,
          the  distribution  of  a  Participant's benefits made on or after
          January  1,  1985, whether under the Plan or through the purchase
          of  an  annuity  Contract,  shall  be made in accordance with the
          following  requirements  and  shall  otherwise  comply  with Code
          Section  401(a)(9)  and  the  Regulations  thereunder  (including
          R e g u l ation  1.401(a)(9)-2),  the  provisions  of  which  are
          incorporated herein by reference:

               (1)  A  Participant's  benefits shall be distributed to
               him  not  later  than  April  1st  of the calendar year
               following  the  later of (i) the calendar year in which
               the Participant attains age 70 1/2 or (ii) the calendar
               year   in  which  the  Participant  retires,  provided,

                                          45<PAGE>





               however,  that  this clause (ii) shall not apply in the
               case of a Participant who is a "five (5) percent owner"
               at any time during the five (5) Plan Year period ending
               in the calendar year in which he attains age 70 1/2 or,
               in  the  case  of a Participant who becomes a "five (5)
               percent  owner" during any subsequent Plan Year, clause
               (ii)  shall  no longer apply and the required beginning
               date  shall  be  the  April  1st  of  the calendar year
               following  the  calendar  year in which such subsequent
               Plan  Year  ends.  Alternatively, distributions will be
               made  in the form of a joint and survivor annuity, life
               annuity  with  10-years certain, or single life annuity
               as   provided   in   paragraph   (a)(1)   above,   then
               distributions  must  begin no later than the applicable
               April  1st  as  determined under the preceding sentence
               and  must  be made over the life of the Participant (or
               the  lives  of  the  Participant  and the Participant's
               designated  Beneficiary)  or the life expectancy of the
               P a r t i cipant  (or  the  life  expectancies  of  the
               P a r t icipant  and  his  designated  Beneficiary)  in
               a c c ordance  with  Regulations.  Notwithstanding  the
               foregoing,  clause  (ii)  above  shall not apply to any
               Participant  unless the Participant had attained age 70
               1/2  before  January  1,  1988  and was not a "five (5)
               percent  owner" at any time during the Plan Year ending
               w i th  or  within  the  calendar  year  in  which  the
               Participant  attained age 66 1/2 or any subsequent Plan
               Year.

               (2)    Distributions   to   a   Participant   and   his
               Beneficiaries shall only be made in accordance with the
               incidental  death  benefit requirements of Code Section
               401(a)(9)(G) and the Regulations thereunder.

          A d d i tionally,  for  calendar  years  beginning  before  1989,
          distributions  may also be made under an alternative method which
          provides  that  the then present value of the payments to be made
          over  the  period  of  the  Participant's life expectancy exceeds
          fifty  percent  (50%)  of  the  then  present  value of the total
          payments to be made to the Participant and his Beneficiaries.

          (f)  Subject  to the Spouse's right of consent afforded under the
          Plan, the restrictions imposed by this Section shall not apply if
          a  Participant  has,  prior  to  January  1, 1984, made a written
          designation to have his retirement benefit paid in an alternative
          method acceptable under Code Section 401(a) as in effect prior to
          the  enactment of the Tax Equity and Fiscal Responsibility Act of
          1982.

          ( g )    A l l   annuity  Contracts  under  this  Plan  shall  be
          non-transferable  when distributed. Furthermore, the terms of any
          annuity  Contract  purchased  and distributed to a Participant or

                                          46<PAGE>





          Spouse shall comply with all of the requirements of the Plan.

          5.8 DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS UPON DEATH

          (a)  A  Vested  Participant or Vested Former Participant who dies
          before  the  annuity starting date and who has a Surviving Spouse
          shall  have  a  death benefit paid to his Surviving Spouse in the
          form  of  a  Pre-Retirement  Survivor  Annuity. The Participant's
          Spouse  may  direct  that  payment of the Pre-Retirement Survivor
          A n nuity  commence  not  later  than  the  month  in  which  the
          Participant would have attained the Earliest Retirement Age under
          the  Plan.  If  the  Spouse  does  not so direct, payment of such
          benefit  will  commence  at  the  time the Participant would have
          attained  the  later  of  his  Normal  Retirement  Age or age 62.
          However,  the Spouse may elect a later commencement date, subject
          to the rules specified in Section 5.8(c).

          (b)  If  the value of the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity derived
          from  Employer  and Employee contributions does not exceed $3,500
          and   has  never  exceeded  $3,500  at  the  time  of  any  prior
          distribution,   the  Administrator  shall  direct  the  immediate
          distribution  of  such  amount  to  the  Participant's Spouse. No
          distribution  may  be made under the preceding sentence after the
          annuity  starting  date unless the Spouse consents in writing. If
          the  value exceeds $3,500 or has ever exceeded $3,500 at the time
          of  any  prior  distribution,  an  immediate  distribution of the
          entire  amount may be made to the Surviving Spouse, provided such
          Surviving  Spouse  consents  in writing to such distribution. Any
          written  consent  required  under this paragraph must be obtained
          not more than 90 days before commencement of the distribution and
          shall  be made in a manner consistent with Section 5.7(a)(2). The
          Present  Value  of  Accrued  Benefit  in  this  regard  shall  be
          determined as provided in Section 1.43.

          (c)  Notwithstanding  any  provision in the Plan to the contrary,
          distributions  upon  the  death of a Participant made on or after
          January  1,  1985  shall be made in accordance with the following
          requirements   and  shall  otherwise  comply  with  Code  Section
          401(a)(9)  and  the  Regulations  thereunder. If it is determined
          pursuant  to Regulations that the distribution of a Participant's
          interest  has  begun  and  the Participant dies before his entire
          interest  has  been  distributed to him, the remaining portion of
          such  interest  shall be distributed at least as rapidly as under
          the method of distribution selected pursuant to Section 5.7 as of
          his  date  of death. If a Participant dies before he has begun to
          receive  any  distributions  of  his  interest  under the Plan or
          before  distributions  are  deemed  to  have  begun  pursuant  to
          Regulations,  then  his death benefit shall be distributed to his
          Beneficiaries  by December 31st of the calendar year in which the
          fifth anniversary of his date of death occurs.

          However,  the  5-year  distribution  requirement of the preceding

                                          47<PAGE>





          paragraph  shall  not  apply  to  any  portion  of  the  deceased
          Participant's  interest which is payable to or for the benefit of
          a  designated  Beneficiary.  In such event, such portion shall be
          distributed over the life of such designated Beneficiary (or over
          a  period  not  extending  beyond  the  life  expectancy  of such
          designated  Beneficiary)  provided  such  distribution begins not
          later  than  December  31st  of  the  calendar  year  immediately
          following  the  calendar  year  in  which  the  Participant died.
          However,  in the event the Participant's Spouse (determined as of
          the  date  of  the  Participant's  death) is his Beneficiary, the
          requirement  that  distributions  commence  within  one year of a
          P a r t i cipant's  death  shall  not  apply.  In  lieu  thereof,
          distributions  must  commence  on  or  before  the  later of: (1)
          December  31st  of  the  calendar  year immediately following the
          calendar year in which the Participant died; or (2) December 31st
          of the calendar year in which the Participant would have attained
          age  70 1/2. If the Surviving Spouse dies before distributions to
          such  Spouse  begin,  then the 5-year distribution requirement of
          this Section shall apply as if the Spouse was the Participant.

          (d)  Subject  to the Spouse's right of consent afforded under the
          Plan, the restrictions imposed by this Section shall not apply if
          a  Participant  has,  prior  to  January  1, 1984, made a written
          designation  to  have  his  death benefits paid in an alternative
          method acceptable under Code Section 401(a) as in effect prior to
          the  enactment of the Tax Equity and Fiscal Responsibility Act of
          1982.

          5.9 TIME OF SEGREGATION OR DISTRIBUTION

          Except  as  limited by Sections 5.7 and 5.8, whenever the Trustee
          is  to make a distribution or to commence a series of payments on
          or  as  of  an  Anniversary  Date,  the distribution or series of
          payments  may be made or begun on such date or as soon thereafter
          as  is practicable, but in no event later than 180 days after the
          Anniversary  Date. However, unless a Former Participant elects in
          writing  to  defer the receipt of benefits (such election may not
          result  in  a  death  benefit  that is more than incidental), the
          payment of benefits shall begin not later than the 60th day after
          the  close  of the Plan Year in which the latest of the following
          events  occurs: (a) the date on which the Participant attains the
          earlier  of age 65 or the Normal Retirement Age specified herein;
          (b)  the  10th  anniversary  of the year in which the Participant
          commenced  participation  in  the  Plan;  or  (c)  the  date  the
          Participant terminates his service with the Employer.

          5.10 DIRECT ROLLOVERS

          (a)  This  section  applies  to  distributions  made  on or after
          January  1,  1993.   Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to
          the  contrary that would otherwise limit a distributee's election
          under  this part, a distributee may elect, at the time and in the

                                          48<PAGE>





          manner prescribed by the Administrator, to have any portion of an
          eligible  rollover  distribution  paid  directly  to  an eligible
          retirement   plan  specified  by  the  distributee  in  a  direct
          rollover.    This  section does not in any way expand the options
          available under the Plan.

          (b) Definitions - The following definitions apply for purposes of
          this section 5.10.
                                                               
               E l i gible  rollover  distribution:  An  eligible  rollover
               distribution  is  any  distribution of all or any portion of
               the balance to the credit of the distributee, except that an
               e l igible  rollover  distribution  does  not  include:  any
               distribution  that is one of a series of substantially equal
               periodic  payments  (not less frequently than annually) made
               for  the life (or life expectancy) of the distributee or the
               joint  lives (or joint life expectancies) of the distributee
               and  the  distributee's  designated  beneficiary,  or  for a
               specified  period  of ten years or more; any distribution to
               the  extent  such  distribution  is  required  under section
               401(a)(9)  of  the Internal Revenue Code; and the portion of
               any  distribution  that  is  not  includable in gross income
               ( d etermined  without  regard  to  the  exclusion  for  net
               u n realized   appreciation   with   respect   to   employer
               securities).

               Eligible  retirement plan: An eligible retirement plan is an
               individual retirement account described in section 408(a) of
               the  Code,  an  individual  retirement  annuity described in
               section  408(b)  of  the  Code, an annuity plan described in
               section  403(a)  of the Code, or a qualified trust described
               i n    s e ction  401(a)  of  the  Code,  that  accepts  the
               distributee's  eligible  rollover distribution.  However, in
               the  case  of  an  eligible  rollover  distribution  to  the
               s u rviving  spouse,  an  eligible  retirement  plan  is  an
               individual   retirement  account  or  individual  retirement
               annuity.

               Distributee:  A distributee includes a Participant or Former
               Participant.    In  addition,  the  Participant's  or Former
               Participant's  surviving  spouse  and  the  Participant's or
               Former  Participant's  spouse  or  former  spouse who is the
               alternate  payee under a qualified domestic relations order,
               as  defined  in section 414(p) of the Code, are distributees
               with regard to the interest of the spouse or former spouse.

               Direct  rollover: A direct rollover is a payment by the Plan
               t o    t h e  eligible  retirement  plan  specified  by  the
               distributee.

          5.11 DISTRIBUTION FOR MINOR BENEFICIARY


                                          49<PAGE>





          In  the  event  a distribution is to be made to a minor, then the
          Administrator  may  direct  that such distribution be paid to the
          legal  guardian, or if none, to a parent of such Beneficiary or a
          responsible   adult  with  whom  the  Beneficiary  maintains  his
          residence,  or  to  the  custodian for such Beneficiary under the
          Uniform  Gift  to  Minors  Act  or Gift to Minors Act, if such is
          permitted  by  the  laws  of  the state in which said Beneficiary
          resides.  Such  a  payment  to  the  legal guardian, custodian or
          parent  of a minor Beneficiary shall fully discharge the Trustee,
          Employer, and Plan from further liability on account thereof.

          5.12 MINIMUM BENEFITS PAYABLE

          Notwithstanding  the  provisions  of Sections 5.1(b) and 5.4, the
          benefits  payable  to  a Participant or a Beneficiary pursuant to
          such  Sections  shall  not  be  less than a Participant's Present
          Value of Vested Accrued Benefit as of the date of distribution.

          5.13 LOCATION OF PARTICIPANT OR BENEFICIARY UNKNOWN

          In  the  event  that  all,  or  any  portion, of the distribution
          payable  to  a Participant or his Beneficiary hereunder shall, at
          the later of the Participant's attainment of age 62 or his Normal
          Retirement  Age,  remain unpaid solely by reason of the inability
          of  the  Administrator, after sending a registered letter, return
          receipt  requested,  to the last known address, and after further
          diligent effort, to ascertain the whereabouts of such Participant
          or   his  Beneficiary,  the  amount  so  distributable  shall  be
          forfeited  and  shall  be used to reduce the cost of the Plan. In
          the  event  a  Participant  or  Beneficiary  is  located  or  his
          whereabouts  is made known to the Administrator subsequent to his
          benefit's  being  forfeited,  such  benefit  shall  be  restored,
          provided  such  Participant or Beneficiary is still living at the
          time the Administrator receives such information.

          5.14 EFFECT OF SOCIAL SECURITY ACT

          Benefits  being  paid  to  a Participant or Beneficiary under the
          terms  of  the  Plan  may  not  be  decreased  by  reason  of any
          post-separation  Social  Security  benefit  increases  or  by the
          increase  of  the Social Security wage base under Title II of the
          Social Security Act. Benefits to which a Former Participant has a
          Vested  interest may not be decreased by reason of an increase in
          a  benefit  level  or  wage  base  under  Title  II of the Social
          Security Act.

          5.15 LIMITATIONS ON BENEFITS

          All  rights  and  benefits,  including  elections,  provided to a
          Participant  in this Plan shall be subject to the rights afforded
          to  any  "alternate  payee" under a "qualified domestic relations
          order."  For  the purposes of this Section, "alternate payee" and

                                          50<PAGE>





          "qualified  domestic  relations order" shall have the meaning set
          forth under Code Section 414(p).

          5.16 SUSPENSION OF BENEFITS

          (a)  Suspension  of Benefits: Normal or early retirement benefits
          will  be  suspended  for  each  calendar  month  during which the
          employee  completes  at  least  40  Hours  of  Service in Section
          2 0 3 (a)(3)(B)  service,  including  service  with  an  employer
          described  in Section 2530.210 (d) and (e) of the Code of Federal
          Regulations.  Consequently, the amount of benefits which are paid
          later  than  Normal  Retirement  Age  will  be computed as if the
          employee had been receiving benefits since Normal Retirement Age.

          (b)   Resumption  of  payment:  If  benefit  payments  have  been
          suspended,  payments  shall resume no later than the first day of
          the  third  calendar  month after the calendar month in which the
          Employee  ceases  to  be  employed  in  such Section 203(a)(3)(B)
          service.    The initial payment upon resumption shall include the
          payment  scheduled  to  occur in the calendar month when payments
          resume  and  any  amounts  withheld during the period between the
          cessation  of  Section 203(a)(3)(B) service and the resumption of
          payments.

          (c)  Notification:    No  payment  shall  be withheld by the Plan
          pursuant to this section unless the Plan notifies the Employee by
          personal  delivery  or first class mail during the first calendar
          month or payroll period in which the Plan withholds payments that
          his  or  her  benefits  are  suspended.  Such notifications shall
          contain  a  description  of  the  Plan  provision relating to the
          suspension  of  payments,  a  copy  of  such  provisions,  and  a
          statement  to  the  effect  that  applicable  Department of Labor
          regulations  may  be  found  in Section 2530.203-3 of the Code of
          Federal Regulations.

          In  addition,  the notice shall inform the Employee of the Plan's
          procedures  for affording a review of the suspension of benefits.
          Requests  for  such  reviews may be considered in accordance with
          the  claims procedure adopted by the Plan pursuant to section 503
          of ERISA and applicable regulations.

          T h e    suspension  notification  shall  provide  the  following
          i n formation  regarding  offset  of  suspendible  amounts  under
          paragraph  (f)  of  this section:  specific identification of the
          periods  of  employment,  the  suspendible  amounts which are the
          subject  of  offset,  and the manner in which the Plan intends to
          offset such suspendible amounts.

          If the Plan's summary plan description contains information which
          is  substantially  the  same  as the information required by this
          p a ragraph  (c),  the  suspension  notification  may  refer  the
          Participant to relevant pages of the summary plan description for

                                          51<PAGE>





          information  as to a particular item, provided the Participant is
          informed  how to obtain a copy of the summary plan description or
          relevant  pages  thereof,  and  provided  requests for referenced
          information  are  honored within a reasonable period of time, not
          to exceed thirty days.   

          (d)  Amount  Suspended:  (a)  In  the  case  of  benefits payable
          periodically  on a monthly basis for as long as a life (or lives)
          continues,  such  as a straight life annuity or a qualified joint
          and survivor annuity, an amount equal to the portion of a monthly
          benefit  payment  derived from Employer contributions; (b) in the
          case of a benefit payable in a form other than the form described
          in  (a),  an  amount  of the Employer-provided portion of benefit
          payments  for  a calendar month in which the Employee is employed
          in  Section  203(a)(3)(B) service, equal to the lesser of (i) the
          amount  of benefits which would have been payable to the Employee
          if  he  had  been receiving monthly benefits under the Plan since
          actual  retirement based on a straight life annuity commencing at
          actual  retirement  age,  or  (ii)  the  actual  amount  paid  or
          scheduled  to  be  paid to the Employee for such month.  Payments
          which  are  scheduled to be paid less frequently than monthly may
          be  converted  to  monthly payments for purposes of the preceding
          sentence.

          (e)  Top  Heavy Plans: This section does not apply to the minimum
          benefit  to  which  the Retired Participant is entitled under the
          top heavy rules of Article II.

          (f)  Offset:  There  may  be deducted from benefit payments to be
          made  by  the  Plan  those  payments  previously made by the Plan
          during  those  calendar  months  in  which the Employee worked in
          employment  of  the  Employer  for  forty  (40)  or more Hours of
          Service to the extent provided in Section 2530.203-3(b)(3) of the
          Code of Federal Regulations.

          (g)  Verification:  If  a  Retired Participant is employed by the
          Employer,  said  Retired Participant shall notify the Plan of his
          rehired  status no later than five (5) days following the date of
          such employment.  The notification shall be in writing and in the
          f o r m   and  manner  prescribed  by  the  Administrator.    The
          Administrator may request from said Retired Participant access to
          r e asonable  information  for  the  purpose  of  verifying  such
          employment.  

          A  Retired  Participant shall, at the Administrator's request and
          as  a  condition  to  receiving  future  benefit payments, either
          certify  that  he  was  not  employed  by the Employer or provide
          factual  information  sufficient  to  establish  the  fact  that,
          although  employed  by  the  Employer,  the suspension of benefit
          provisions do not apply to such employment. 

          (h)  Status  Determination:  A  Retired Participant may request a

                                          52<PAGE>





          determination  as to whether the suspension of benefit provisions
          herein  would  apply  if  he  engaged  in  specific  contemplated
          employment subsequent to retirement under the Plan.  Said request
          shall   be  made  in  the  form  and  manner  prescribed  by  the
          Administrator.   Within sixty (60) days following receipt of such
          request  and  all  necessary information, the Administrator shall
          furnish  the Retired Participant with a written notice by mail of
          the determination rendered with respect to such request.

          (i)  Presumption  Regarding  Status: On or after January 1, 1994,
          w h e never  the  Administrator  becomes  aware  that  a  Retired
          P a rticipant  is  employed  by  the  Employer  and  the  Retired
          P a r t icipant  has  not  complied  with  the  Plan's  reporting
          requirements  with  regard  to that employment, the Administrator
          may,  unless it is unreasonable under the circumstances to do so,
          act  on  the  basis  of a rebuttable presumption that the Retired
          Participant  had  worked  a  period  exceeding the Plan's minimum
          number of hours for that month.

          The  Plan shall describe its employment verification requirements
          and  the nature and effect of the presumption regarding status in
          the  Plan's  summary plan description and in any communication to
          Participants  which  relate  to  the  verification  requirements.
          Retired  Participants shall be furnished such disclosure at least
          once every 12 months.

          (j)  Benefit  Resumption:  Benefits  suspended  pursuant  to this
          section  shall  be resumed upon the subsequent termination of the
          Participant  and  the filing of a benefits resumption notice in a
          form  and  pursuant to the procedures required by section 2.12 of
          the Plan regarding applications for retirement.

          (k)  Redetermination  and  Form  of  Payment: Upon the subsequent
          termination  of  employment  of  a  Retired  Participant  who was
          eligible  for  a benefit upon his prior termination of employment
          (whether  or  not  payment  of  such  benefit had commenced), the
          Participant's benefit shall be redetermined upon the basis of his
          aggregate  years  of service, as if no prior benefit payments had
          been  made.  His benefit as so redetermined shall then be reduced
          by  the  actuarial  equivalent  of  the benefit payments (if any)
          p r eviously  made  to  such  Participant  prior  to  his  Normal
          Retirement Date. In no event shall the Participant's benefit be a
          l o w er  monthly  benefit  then  he  was  receiving  before  his
          r e e m p loyment  (for  the  purposes  of  this  sentence,  such
          determination   shall  be  calculated  under  the  same  form  of
          payment).  The  form  of  payment  of any benefit to which he may
          thereafter  become  entitled shall be determined in accordance to
          the  provisions  of this Plan without regard to the form in which
          his benefit had previously been paid. 

          5.17 RETIREMENT BECAUSE OF PLANT SHUTDOWN OR LAYOFF


                                          53<PAGE>





          (a)  This section shall apply only to Participants who are listed
          on  the  seniority  list  of  those  employed within a collective
          bargaining unit covered by this Plan, but only as negotiated from
          time to time by the Employer and such collective bargaining unit.

          (b)  In  applying  this section of the Plan to a given collective
          bargaining  unit,  the  terms  "Minimum  Years  of  Service"  and
          "Minimum  Combined Total" shall have the meaning set forth in the
          Plan appendix which applies to such collective bargaining unit.

          (c)  A  Participant  who is otherwise eligible for benefits under
          this  section, determined in accordance with paragraph (a) above,
          shall  be  eligible  for  benefits under this section only if his
          Credited  Service  equals or exceeds the Minimum Years of Service
          and only if his combined age and years of Credited Service equals
          or  exceeds  the  Minimum  Combined  Total.  With respect to such
          eligible Participant, if

               (i)  while  this  section  is in effect with respect to
               such  Participant, his service is broken by reason of a
               p e r manent  shutdown  of  the  plant,  department  or
               subdivision thereof, or by reason of a layoff, or

               (ii)  his  service  is not broken and he is absent from
               work  by  reason  of a layoff which occurred while this
               section  is in effect with respect to such Participant,
               and   his  return  to  active  employment  is  declared
               unlikely by the Employer, or

               (iii)  such  Participant  considers that it would be in
               his  interest to retire and the Employer considers that
               such  retirement would likewise be in its interest and,
               while  this  section  is in effect with respect to such
               Participant,  the  Employer approves an application for
               retirement under mutually satisfactory conditions,

          such  Participant  shall  be  eligible  to  retire  and receive a
          pension.    The monthly pension payable to such Participant shall
          be  equal to his Accrued Benefit under the Plan, determined as of
          the date he ceases active employment with the Employer, unreduced
          because  of  early commencement.  The actual form of payment will
          be determined based on all other provisions of the Plan. 

          (d)  Benefits  payable under this section shall be in lieu of all
          other benefits under the Plan.

          (e) This Section 5.17 shall not apply to events listed in (c)(i),
          (ii)  or  (iii)  above which occur on or after the Transition End
          Date  applicable to such Participant, as set forth in Appendix A,
          B, or C herein.



                                          54<PAGE>





                                      ARTICLE VI
                             CODE SECTION 415 LIMITATIONS

          6.1 ANNUAL BENEFIT

          For  purposes of this Article, "annual benefit" means the benefit
          payable  annually  under  the terms of the Plan (exclusive of any
          benefit  not  required  to be considered for purposes of applying
          the  limitations  of Code Section 415 to the Plan) payable in the
          form  of  a  straight life annuity with no ancillary benefits. If
          the  benefit  under  the  Plan  is payable in any other form, the
          "annual  benefit"  shall  be  adjusted  to  the  equivalent  of a
          straight life annuity pursuant to Section 6.3(d).

          6.2 MAXIMUM ANNUAL BENEFIT

          (a)  Notwithstanding  the foregoing and subject to the exceptions
          below,  the  maximum  "annual  benefit"  payable to a Participant
          under  this  Plan in any "limitation year" shall equal the lesser
          of:  (1)  $90,000  or  (2)  one  hundred  percent  (100%)  of the
          P a r ticipant's  "415  Compensation"  averaged  over  the  three
          consecutive  "limitation  years" (or actual number of "limitation
          years"  for  Employees who have been employed for less than three
          consecutive "limitation years") during which the Employee had the
          greatest aggregate "415 Compensation" from the Employer.

          (b) For purposes of applying the limitations of Code Section 415,
          " 4 15  Compensation"  shall  include  the  Participant's  wages,
          salaries,   fees  for  professional  service  and  other  amounts
          received  (without  regard to whether or not an amount is paid in
          cash)  for  personal  services actually rendered in the course of
          employment  with  an  Employer maintaining the Plan to the extent
          that  the  amounts are includable in gross income (including, but
          not  limited  to,  commissions  paid  salesmen,  compensation for
          services  on the basis of a percentage of profits, commissions on
          i n s u rance   premiums,   tips,   bonuses,   fringe   benefits,
          reimbursements,  and  expense  allowances,  and  in the case of a
          Participant who is an Employee within the meaning of Code Section
          401(c)(1)  and  the  regulations  thereunder,  the  Participant's
          earned  income  (as  described  in Code Section 401(c)(2) and the
          regulations thereunder)) paid during the "limitation year".

          "415  Compensation"  shall  exclude (1) (A) contributions made by
          the  Employer  to  a  plan of deferred compensation to the extent
          that,  before the application of the Code Section 415 limitations
          to  the  Plan,  the contributions are not includable in the gross
          income of the Employee for the taxable year in which contributed,
          (B)  contributions  made  by  the  Employer to a plan of deferred
          compensation  to  the  extent  that  all  or  a  portion  of such
          c o ntributions  are  recharacterized  as  a  voluntary  Employee
          contribution,  (C)  Employer  contributions  made on behalf of an
          Employee  to a simplified employee pension plan described in Code

                                          55<PAGE>





          Section  408(k)  to  the extent such contributions are excludable
          from  the  Employee's  gross income, (D) any distributions from a
          plan  of deferred compensation regardless of whether such amounts
          are   includable  in  the  gross  income  of  the  Employee  when
          distributed  except  any amounts received by an Employee pursuant
          to  an unfunded non-qualified plan to the extent such amounts are
          includable  in  the  gross  income  of  the Employee; (2) amounts
          realized  from  the  exercise  of a non-qualified stock option or
          when  restricted  stock  (or property) held by an Employee either
          becomes  freely  transferable  or  is  no  longer  subject  to  a
          substantial  risk  of  forfeiture;  (3) amounts realized from the
          sale,  exchange  or  other  disposition of stock acquired under a
          qualified  stock  option;  and  (4)  other  amounts which receive
          special  tax  benefits,  such  as  premiums  for  group term life
          insurance  (but  only  to  the  extent  that the premiums are not
          includable in the gross income of the Employee), or contributions
          made  by  the  Employer  (whether or not under a salary reduction
          agreement) towards the purchase of any annuity contract described
          in  Code  Section  403(b)  (whether  or not the contributions are
          excludable  from  the  gross  income  of  the  Employee). For the
          purposes of this Section, the determination of "415 Compensation"
          shall  be  made  by not including amounts that would otherwise be
          excluded  from  a  Participant's  gross  income  by reason of the
          application of Code Sections 125, 402(a)(8), 402(h)(1)(B) and, in
          the  case  of  Employer  contributions  made pursuant to a salary
          reduction agreement, Code Section 403(b).

          (c) For purposes of applying the limitations of Code Section 415,
          the "limitation year" shall be the Calendar Year.

          (d)  Notwithstanding anything in this Article to the contrary, if
          the Plan was in existence on May 6, 1986, and had complied at all
          times  with  the  requirements  of  Code Section 415, the maximum
          "annual  benefit"  for  any individual who is a Participant as of
          the  first  day of the "limitation year" beginning after December
          31,  1986,  shall not be less than the "current accrued benefit".
          "Current  accrued  benefit"  shall  mean  a Participant's Accrued
          Benefit  under  the  Plan,  determined  as if the Participant had
          separated  from  service  as of the close of the last "limitation
          year"  beginning  before  January  1,  1987, when expressed as an
          annual  benefit  within the meaning of Code Section 415(b)(2). In
          determining  the  amount  of  a  Participant's  "current  accrued
          benefit",  the  following shall be disregarded: (1) any change in
          the  terms  and conditions of the Plan after May 5, 1986; and (2)
          any cost of living adjustment occurring after May 5, 1986.

          (e)  The dollar limitation under Code Section 415(b)(1)(A) stated
          in  paragraph (a)(1) above shall be adjusted annually as provided
          in  Code Section 415(d) pursuant to the Regulations. The adjusted
          limitation  is  effective as of January 1st of each calendar year
          and  is  applicable  to  "limitation years" ending with or within
          that calendar year.

                                          56<PAGE>





          ( f )  The  limitation  stated  in  paragraph  (a)(2)  above  for
          Participants   who   have   separated   from   service   with   a
          non-forfeitable  right  to  an  Accrued Benefit shall be adjusted
          annually  as  provided  in  Code  Section  415(d) pursuant to the
          regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.

          (g)  For  the  purpose  of  this  Article,  all qualified defined
          benefit  plans (whether terminated or not) ever maintained by the
          Employer  shall  be  treated as one defined benefit plan, and all
          qualified  defined contribution plans (whether terminated or not)
          ever  maintained  by the Employer shall be treated as one defined
          contribution plan.

          (h)  For the purpose of this Article, if the Employer is a member
          of a controlled group of corporations, trades or businesses under
          common  control  (as  defined  by  Code  Section  1563(a) or Code
          Section  414(b) and (c) as modified by Code Section 415(h)) or is
          a  member  of  an  affiliated  service  group (as defined by Code
          Section  414(m)),  all  Employees  of  such  Employers  shall  be
          considered to be employed by a single Employer.

          (i)  For  the  purpose  of  this  Article, if this Plan is a Code
          Section  413(c) plan; all Employers of a Participant who maintain
          this Plan will be considered to be a single Employer.

          6.3 ADJUSTMENTS TO ANNUAL BENEFIT AND LIMITATIONS

          (a)  If  the  "annual  benefit"  begins  before the Participant's
          Social  Security  Retirement  Age  under the Social Security Act,
          then  the  $90,000  limitation shall be reduced in such manner as
          the Secretary of the Treasury shall prescribe which is consistent
          with  the  reduction  for  old-age  insurance benefits commencing
          before  the  Social  Security  Retirement  Age  under  the Social
          Security Act.

          (b) Notwithstanding Section 6.3 (a) above, for "limitation years"
          beginning  prior  to January 1, 1987, the $90,000 limit shall not
          be  reduced  if  the annual benefit begins on or after age 62. If
          the "annual benefit" begins before age 62, the $90,000 limitation
          shall  be  reduced  so that it is the actuarial equivalent of the
          $90,000  limitation  beginning  at  age  62. However, the $90,000
          limitation  shall  not  be  actuarially reduced to less than: (1)
          $75,000  if the "annual benefit" commences on or after age 55, or
          (2)  the  amount which is the actuarial equivalent of the $75,000
          limitation  at  age 55 if the "annual benefit" commences prior to
          age    55.   For   purposes   of adjusting the $90,000 limitation
          applicable  prior  to age 62 or the $75,000 limitation applicable
          prior to age 55, the adjustment shall be made pursuant to Section
          1.3 except that the interest rate assumption shall be the greater
          of five percent (5%) or the rate specified in Section 1.3 and the
          mortality  decrement  shall  be  ignored  to  the  extent  that a
          forfeiture does not occur at death.

                                          57<PAGE>





          (c) If the "annual benefit" begins after the Participant's Social
          Security  Retirement  Age  (or  for Plan Years beginning prior to
          January  1,  1987,  age  65)  the  $90,000  limitation  shall  be
          increased  so  that it is the actuarial equivalent of the $90,000
          limitation  at  the  Participant's Social Security Retirement Age
          (or for Plan Years beginning prior to January 1, 1987, age 65).

          (d)  For purposes of adjusting the "annual benefit" to a straight
          life  annuity,  the  adjustment shall be made pursuant to Section
          1.3 except that the interest rate assumption shall be the greater
          of five percent (5%) or the rate specified in Section 1.3.

          (e)  For  purposes of adjusting the $90,000 limitation applicable
          after  the  Participant's  Social Security Retirement Age (or for
          Plan  Years  beginning  prior  to  January  1,  1987, age 65) the
          adjustment  shall be made pursuant to Section 1.3 except that the
          interest rate assumption shall be the lesser of five percent (5%)
          or  the rate specified in Section 1.3 and the mortality decrement
          shall  be  ignored to the extent that a forfeiture does not occur
          at death.

          (f)   For  purposes  of  Sections  6.1,  6.3(a)  and  6.3(b),  no
          adjustments under Code Section 415(d) shall be taken into account
          before  the  "limitation  year"  for  which such adjustment first
          takes effect.

          (g)  For  purposes  of Section 6.1, no adjustment is required for
          qualified  joint  and  survivor  annuity benefits, pre-retirement
          death benefits and post-retirement medical benefits.

          6.4   ANNUAL BENEFIT NOT IN EXCESS OF $10,000

          This  Plan  may  pay  an  "annual  benefit" to any Participant in
          excess  of  his  maximum "annual benefit" if the "annual benefit"
          derived from Employer contributions under this Plan and all other
          defined  benefit plans maintained by the Employer does not in the
          aggregate  exceed  $10,000  for  the "limitation year" or for any
          prior  "limitation  year"  and  the  Employer has not at any time
          maintained  a  defined contribution plan in which the Participant
          participated.  For  purposes  of  this  paragraph,  if  this Plan
          provides  for voluntary or mandatory Employee contributions, such
          c o n tributions  will  not  be  considered  a  separate  defined
          contribution plan maintained by the Employer.

          6.5 PARTICIPATION OR SERVICE REDUCTIONS

          If a Participant has less than ten (10) years of participation in
          the  Plan  at  the  time  he begins to receive benefits under the
          Plan,  the  limitations  in  Sections  6.2(a)(1) and 6.3 shall be
          reduced  by  multiplying  such  limitations by a fraction (a) the
          numerator  of  which  is the number of years of participation (or
          part thereof) in the Plan and (b) the denominator of which is ten

                                          58<PAGE>





          (10),  provided, however, that said fraction shall in no event be
          less  than  1/10th. The limitations of Sections 6.2(a)(2) and 6.4
          shall be reduced in the same manner except the preceding sentence
          shall  be  applied  with  respect  to  years  of service with the
          Employer   rather  than  years  of  participation  in  the  Plan.
          Additionally,  to  the  extent  provided in Regulations, for Plan
          Years  beginning  after  December  31,  1986, the above described
          reductions to the limitations in Sections 6.2(a)(1) and 6.3 shall
          be  applied separately with respect to each change in the benefit
          structure of the Plan.

          6.6 MULTIPLE PLAN REDUCTION

          (a)  If an Employee is (or has been) a Participant in one or more
          defined  benefit plans and one or more defined contribution plans
          maintained  by  the Employer, the sum of the defined benefit plan
          fraction  and  the  defined  contribution  plan  fraction for any
          "limitation year" may not exceed 1.0.

          (b)  The  defined benefit plan fraction for any "limitation year"
          is  a  fraction,  the  numerator  of  which  is  the  sum  of the
          Participant's  projected  annual  benefits  under all the defined
          benefit  plans  (whether  or  not  terminated)  maintained by the
          Employer,  and  the  denominator  of  which  is the lesser of 125
          percent  of  the dollar limitation determined for the "limitation
          year"  under  Code  Sections 415(b) and (d) or 140 percent of the
          highest  average  compensation,  including  any adjustments under
          Code Section 415(b).

          Notwithstanding  the  above, if the Participant was a Participant
          as  of  the  first  day  of the first "limitation year" beginning
          after  December  31,  1986,  in one or more defined benefit plans
          maintained  by  the  Employer  which  were in existence on May 6,
          1986,  the denominator of this fraction will not be less than 125
          percent  of the sum of the annual benefits under such plans which
          the  Participant  had  accrued  as  of  the  close  of  the  last
          "limitation  year" beginning before January 1, 1987, disregarding
          any  changes in the terms and conditions of the plan after May 5,
          1986.  The preceding sentence applies only if the defined benefit
          p l a n s   individually  and  in  the  aggregate  satisfied  the
          requirements  of  Code  Section  415  for  all "limitation years"
          beginning before January 1, 1987.

          (c)  (1)  The  defined  contribution  plan  fraction for any
               "limitation year" is a fraction, the numerator of which
               is the sum of the annual additions to the Participant's
               account   under  all  the  defined  contribution  plans
               (whether  or not terminated) maintained by the Employer
               for  the  current  and  all  prior  "limitation  years"
               (including  the  annual  additions  attributable to the
               Participant's  nondeductible  Employee contributions to
               all  defined  benefit plans, whether or not terminated,

                                          59<PAGE>





               maintained  by  the  Employer, and the annual additions
               attributable  to  all welfare benefit funds, as defined
               i n    Code  Section  419(e),  and  individual  medical
               a c counts,  as  defined  in  Code  Section  415(1)(2),
               maintained  by  the  Employer),  and the denominator of
               which  is  the sum of the maximum aggregate amounts for
               the current and all prior "limitation years" of service
               with  the  Employer  (regardless  of  whether a defined
               contribution  plan was maintained by the Employer). The
               maximum  aggregate  amount  in any "limitation year" is
               the  lesser  of  125  percent  of the dollar limitation
               determined under Code Sections 415(b) and (d) in effect
               under  Code  Section  415(c)(1)(A) or 35 percent of the
               Participant's Compensation for such year.

               If  the Employee was a Participant as of the end of the
               first  day  of  the  first  "limitation year" beginning
               after  December  31,  1986,  in  one  or  more  defined
               contribution  plans  maintained  by  the Employer which
               were in existence on May 6, 1986, the numerator of this
               fraction  will  be adjusted if the sum of this fraction
               and the defined benefit fraction would otherwise exceed
               1.0 under the terms of this Plan. Under the adjustment,
               an amount equal to the product of (1) the excess of the
               sum of the fractions over 1.0 times (2) the denominator
               of  this  fraction, will be permanently subtracted from
               the  numerator  of  this  fraction.  The  adjustment is
               calculated   using  the  fractions  as  they  would  be
               computed  as  of  the end of the last "limitation year"
               beginning  before January 1, 1987, and disregarding any
               changes  in  the  terms and conditions of the Plan made
               after  May  6,  1986,  but  using  the Code Section 415
               limitation  applicable  to  the first "limitation year"
               beginning  on  or  after  January  1,  1987. The annual
               addition  for  any  "limitation  year" beginning before
               January  1,  1987  shall not be recomputed to treat all
               Employee contributions as annual additions.

               ( 2 )    F o r  purposes  of  this  Article,  the  term
               " P a r ticipant's  account"  shall  mean  the  account
               established  and  maintained  by  the Administrator for
               each  Participant with respect to his total interest in
               t h e  defined  contribution  plan  maintained  by  the
               Employer resulting from "annual additions".

               (3)  For  purposes  of  this  Article, the term "annual
               a d d i t ions"  shall  mean  the  sum  credited  to  a
               "Participant's  account"  for  any "limitation year" of
               (A) Employer contributions, (B) Employee contributions,
               (C)  forfeitures, (D) amounts allocated after March 31,
               1984,  to  an individual medical account, as defined in
               Code  Section  415(1)(2)  which is part of a pension or

                                          60<PAGE>





               annuity  plan  maintained  by  the  Employer,  and  (E)
               amounts  derived  from  contributions  paid  or accrued
               after  December 31, 1985, in taxable years ending after
               such  date,  which  are attributable to post-retirement
               medical benefits allocated to the separate account of a
               key  employee  (as  defined in Code Section 419A(d)(3))
               under  a  welfare  benefit  plan  (as  defined  in Code
               Section  419(e))  maintained  by  the Employer. Except,
               however,  the  percentage  limitation  referred  to  in
               (4)(B)  below  shall not apply to: (1) any contribution
               for  medical  benefits  (within  the  meaning  of  Code
               Section 419A(f)(2)) after separation from service which
               is  otherwise  treated  as an "annual addition", or (2)
               any  amount  otherwise  treated as an "annual addition"
               under   Code  Section  415(1)(1).  Notwithstanding  the
               foregoing,  for  "limitation  years" beginning prior to
               J a nuary  1,  1987,  only  that  portion  of  Employee
               c o n t ributions  equal  to  the  lesser  of  employee
               contributions  in  excess  of  six percent (6%) of "415
               Compensation"  or  one-half  of  employee contributions
               shall be considered an "annual addition".

               (4)  If as a result of a reasonable error in estimating
               a    Participant's  Compensation  or  other  facts  and
               circumstances  to  which Regulation 1.415-6(b)(6) shall
               be applicable, voluntary employee contributions for the
               "limitation  year"  would  cause the "annual additions"
               credited  to  a  "Participant's  account" to exceed the
               lesser  of  (A)  $30,000 (or, if greater, one-fourth of
               the  dollar  limitation  in  effect  under Code Section
               415(b)(1)(A))  or  (B) twenty-five percent (25%) of the
               Participant's  "415  Compensation"  for such limitation
               year,  the  Administrator shall, pursuant to Regulation
               1 . 415-6(b)(6)(iv),  return  such  voluntary  employee
               c o n tributions  to  the  Participant  to  the  extent
               n e c e s sary  so  that  "annual  additions"  for  the
               "limitation  year"  do  not exceed the lesser of (A) or
               (B).

          (d)  Notwithstanding  the foregoing, for any "limitation year" in
          which the Plan is a Top Heavy Plan, 100% shall be substituted for
          125%  in  Sections  6.6(b) and 6.6(c)(1) unless the extra minimum
          benefit  is  being provided pursuant to Section 5.2. However, for
          any  "limitation  year"  in  which  the Plan is a Super Top Heavy
          Plan, 1.0 shall be substituted for 1.25 in any event.

          (e)  If  the  sum  of  the  defined benefit plan fraction and the
          defined  contribution  plan  fraction  shall  exceed  1.0  in any
          " l imitation  year"  for  any  Participant  in  this  Plan,  the
          Administrator  shall  adjust the numerator of the defined benefit
          plan  fraction so that the sum of both fractions shall not exceed
          1.0 in any "limitation year" for such Participant.

                                          61<PAGE>





          6.7 INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE

          Notwithstanding   anything  contained  in  this  Article  to  the
          contrary,  the  limitations,  adjustments  and other requirements
          prescribed  in  this  Article  shall at all times comply with the
          provisions  of  Code  Section 415 and the Regulations thereunder,
          the  terms  of  which  are  specifically  incorporated  herein by
          reference.













































                                          62<PAGE>





                                     ARTICLE VII
                                    PLAN AMENDMENT

          7.1 AMENDMENT

          (a)  The  Employer  shall have the right at any time to amend the
          Plan,  subject to the limitations of this Section. Such amendment
          shall  be  effective  upon  approval  of  the Employer's Board of
          Directors or the Executive Committee of the Board of Directors in
          accordance   with  established  Board  of  Directors  procedures.
          However,  any  amendment  which  affects  the  rights,  duties or
          responsibilities  of  the  Trustee  and Administrator may only be
          made  with the Trustee's and Administrator's written consent. Any
          such  amendment  shall  become effective as provided therein upon
          its  execution.  The Trustee shall not be required to execute any
          such amendment unless the Trust provisions contained herein are a
          part  of  the  Plan  and  the amendment affects the duties of the
          Trustee hereunder.

          (b)  No amendment to the Plan shall be effective if it authorizes
          or permits any part of the Trust Fund (other than such part as is
          required to pay taxes and administration expenses) to be used for
          or  diverted  to any purpose other than for the exclusive benefit
          of  the Participants or their Beneficiaries or estates; or causes
          any  reduction  in the Accrued Benefit of any Participant (except
          to  the extent permitted under Code Section 412(c)(8)); or causes
          or  permits  any portion of the Trust Fund to revert to or become
          property of the Employer.

          (c)  Except  as  permitted  by  Regulations, no Plan amendment or
          transaction  having  the  effect  of  a Plan amendment (such as a
          merger,  plan transfer or similar transaction) shall be effective
          if  it  eliminates  or  reduces  any "Section 411(d)(6) protected
          benefit"  or  adds  or  modifies  conditions relating to "Section
          411(d)(6)  protected  benefits"  the result of which is a further
          restriction  on  such  benefit unless such protected benefits are
          preserved with respect to benefits accrued as of the later of the
          adoption  date  or  effective  date  of  the  amendment. "Section
          411(d)(6)  protected  benefits"  are  benefits  described in Code
          S e c t ion   411(d)(6)(A),   early   retirement   benefits   and
          retirement-type subsidies, and optional forms of benefit.

          (d) If this Plan is amended and an effect of such amendment is to
          i n c r ease  current  liability  (as  defined  in  Code  Section
          401(a)(29)(E))  under  the  Plan  for a Plan Year, and the funded
          current  liability  percentage  of  the Plan for the Plan Year in
          which  the  amendment  takes  effect  is  less than sixty percent
          (60%),  including  the  amount  of the unfunded current liability
          under the Plan attributable to the amendment, the amendment shall
          not take effect until the Employer (or any member of a controlled
          group which includes the Employer) provides security to the Plan.
          T h e  form  and  amount  of  such  security  shall  satisfy  the

                                          63<PAGE>





          requirements of Code Section 401(a)(29)(B) and (C). Such security
          may  be  released  provided  the  requirements  of  Code  Section
          401(a)(29)(D) are satisfied.


















































                                          64<PAGE>





                                     ARTICLE VIII
                                   PLAN TERMINATION

          8.1 TERMINATION

          (a)  The  Employer  shall have the right to terminate the Plan by
          delivering to the Trustee, the Administrator, and, if applicable,
          the  union  representative,  written  notice of such termination.
          Such   termination  shall  be  effective  upon  approval  of  the
          Employer's  Board  of Directors or the Executive Committee of the
          Board  of  Directors  in  accordance  with  established  Board of
          Directors  procedures.    However,  any termination (other than a
          partial termination or an involuntary termination pursuant to Act
          Section  4042)  must  satisfy  the  requirements  and  follow the
          procedures outlined herein and in Act Section 4041 for a Standard
          Termination or a Distress Termination. Upon any termination (full
          or  partial),  all  amounts shall be allocated in accordance with
          the  provisions  hereof  and  the  Accrued Benefit, to the extent
          funded as of such date, of each affected Participant shall become
          fully Vested and shall not thereafter be subject to forfeiture.

          (b) Standard Termination Procedure

               (1)  The Administrator shall first notify all "affected
               parties" (as defined in Act Section 4001(a)(21)) of the
               Employer's  intention  to  terminate  the  Plan and the
               proposed  date  of termination. Such termination notice
               must  be provided at least sixty (60) days prior to the
               proposed  termination  date.  However, in the case of a
               standard  termination,  it  shall  not  be necessary to
               provide  such  notice  to  the Pension Benefit Guaranty
               Corporation  (PBGC).  As  soon as practicable after the
               termination  notice  is  given, the Administrator shall
               provide  a  follow-up  notice to the PBGC setting forth
               the following:

                    (i) a certification of an enrolled actuary of
                    the  projected  amount  of  the assets of the
                    Plan   as  of  the  proposed  date  of  final
                    distribution of assets, the actuarial present
                    v a lue  of  the  "benefit  liabilities"  (as
                    defined in Act Section 4001(a)(16)) under the
                    Plan as of the proposed termination date, and
                    confirmation that the Plan is projected to be
                    sufficient  for such "benefit liabilities" as
                    of the proposed date of final distribution;

                    (ii)  a  certification  by  the Administrator
                    that the information provided to the PBGC and
                    upon  which  the  enrolled  actuary based his
                    certification is accurate and complete; and


                                          65<PAGE>





                    (iii)  such other information as the PBGC may
                    prescribe by regulation.

                    ( i v)  The  certification  of  the  enrolled
                    actuary and of the Administrator shall not be
                    applicable  in  the  case  of  a  plan funded
                    exclusively     by    individual    insurance
                    contracts.

               (2)  No  later  than  the  date  on which the follow-up
               notice  is  sent  to  the PBGC, the Administrator shall
               provide  all  Participants  and Beneficiaries under the
               Plan with an explanatory statement specifying each such
               person's "benefit liabilities," the benefit form on the
               basis  of  which  such  amount  is  determined, and any
               additional  information  used  in  determining "benefit
               l i a b ilities"  that  may  be  required  pursuant  to
               regulations promulgated by the PBGC.

               (3)  A  standard  termination may only take place if at
               the  time  the final distribution of assets occurs, the
               Plan  is  sufficient  to meet all "benefit liabilities"
               determined as of the termination date.

          (c) Distress Termination Procedure 

               (1)  The Administrator shall first notify all "affected
               parties"  of  the Employer's intention to terminate the
               Plan   and  the  proposed  date  of  termination.  Such
               termination  notice  must  be provided at least 60 days
               prior  to  the  proposed  termination  date. As soon as
               practicable  after the termination notice is given, the
               Administrator  shall also provide a follow-up notice to
               the PBGC setting forth the following:

                    (i) a certification of an enrolled actuary of
                    the  amount,  as  of the proposed termination
                    date,  of  the current value of the assets of
                    the  Plan, the actuarial present value (as of
                    such date) of the "benefit liabilities" under
                    the  Plan, whether the Plan is sufficient for
                    "benefit  liabilities"  as  of such date, the
                    actuarial  present value (as of such date) of
                    benefits  under the Plan guaranteed under Act
                    S e ction  4022,  and  whether  the  Plan  is
                    sufficient for guaranteed benefits as of such
                    date;

                    (ii)  in  any  case  in which the Plan is not
                    sufficient  for  "benefit  liabilities" as of
                    such  date,  the  name  and  address  of each
                    Participant and Beneficiary under the Plan as

                                          66<PAGE>





                    of such date;

                    (iii)  a  certification  by the Administrator
                    that the information provided to the PBGC and
                    upon  which  the  enrolled  actuary based his
                    certification is accurate and complete; and

                    (iv)  such  other information as the PBGC may
                    prescribe by regulation.

                    (v) The certification of the enrolled actuary
                    a n d  of  the  Administrator  shall  not  be
                    applicable  in  the  case  of  a  plan funded
                    exclusively     by    individual    insurance
                    contracts.

               (2) A distress termination may only take place if:

                    (i)  the  Employer  demonstrates  to the PBGC
                    that  such termination is necessary to enable
                    the  Employer  to pay its debts while staying
                    i n    business,  or  to  avoid  unreasonably
                    burdensome  pension costs caused by a decline
                    in the Employer's work force;

                    (ii)   the  Employer  is  the  subject  of  a
                    petition  seeking liquidation in a bankruptcy
                    or  insolvency  proceeding which has not been
                    dismissed  as  of  the  proposed  termination
                    date; or

                    (iii)  the  Employer  is  the  subject  of  a
                    petition    seeking   reorganization   in   a
                    bankruptcy or insolvency proceeding which has
                    n o t  been  dismissed  as  of  the  proposed
                    termination  date,  and  the bankruptcy court
                    (or  such  other  appropriate court) approves
                    the   termination  and  determines  that  the
                    Employer   will  be  unable  to  continue  in
                    business  outside a Chapter 11 reorganization
                    p r o c ess  and  that  such  termination  is
                    necessary  to  enable the Employer to pay its
                    debts pursuant to a plan of reorganization.

          (d) Priority and Payment of Benefits

          In  the case of a distress termination, upon approval by the PBGC
          that  the  Plan  is  sufficient  for "benefit liabilities" or for
          "guaranteed  benefits", or in the case of a standard termination,
          a  letter  of non-compliance has not been issued within the sixty
          (60)  day  period (as extended) following the receipt by the PBGC
          of  the  follow-up  notice,  the Administrator shall allocate the

                                          67<PAGE>





          assets  of the Plan among Participants and Beneficiaries pursuant
          to  Act  Section  4044(a). As soon as practicable thereafter, the
          assets  of the Trust shall be distributed to the Participants and
          Beneficiaries,  in  cash  or  through the purchase of irrevocable
          commitments  from an insurer, in a manner consistent with Section
          5.7. However, if all liabilities with respect to Participants and
          Beneficiaries  under  the  Plan  have  been  satisfied  and there
          remains  a  balance  in  the  Trust  due  to  erroneous actuarial
          computation,  such  balance,  if  any,  shall  be returned to the
          Employer. In the case of a distress termination in which the PBGC
          is unable to determine that the Plan is sufficient for guaranteed
          benefits,  the  assets  of  the Plan shall only be distributed in
          accordance with proceedings instituted by the PBGC.

          (e)  The  termination  of  the  Plan shall comply with such other
          requirements  and  rules  as may be promulgated by the PBGC under
          authority of Title IV of the Act, including any rules relating to
          time  periods  or  deadlines for providing notice or for making a
          necessary filing.

          8.2 LIMITATION OF BENEFITS ON EARLY TERMINATION

          Prior to the date the pre-termination restrictions in Section 8.3
          of  the  Plan  are  effective, the provisions of this Section 8.2
          shall apply.

          In the event the Plan is terminated for any reason other than the
          failure  to  obtain Internal Revenue Service approval pursuant to
          Section 10.14, then notwithstanding any provision in this Plan to
          the contrary, during the first ten (10) years after the Effective
          Date  hereof,  and  if full current costs had not been met at the
          end  of  the  first ten (10) years, until said full current costs
          are  met,  the  benefits provided by the Employer's contributions
          for  the Participants whose anticipated annual retirement benefit
          at Normal Retirement Date exceeds $1,500 and who at the Effective
          Date  of  the  Plan  were among the twenty-five (25) highest paid
          Employees  of  the Employer will be subject to the conditions set
          forth in the following provisions:

               (a)  The  benefit payable to a Participant described in
               this  Section  or  his Beneficiary shall not exceed the
               greater of the following:

                    (1) those benefits purchasable by the greater
                    of (a) $20,000, or (b) an amount equal to 20%
                    of  the  first  $50,000  of the Participant's
                    annual  Compensation multiplied by the number
                    of  years from the Effective Date of the Plan
                    to the earlier of (i) the date of termination
                    of  the Plan, or (ii) the date the benefit of
                    the  Participant becomes payable or (iii) the
                    date of a failure on the part of the Employer

                                          68<PAGE>





                    to  meet  the full current costs of the Plan;
                    or

                    (2) if a Participant is a "substantial owner"
                    (as  defined  in Section 4022(b)(5)(A) of the
                    Act),   the  present  value  of  the  benefit
                    guaranteed  for  "substantial  owners"  under
                    Section 4022 of the Act, or

                    (3)  if the Participant is not a "substantial
                    owner",  the  present  value  of  the maximum
                    benefit  provided in Section 4022(b)(3)(B) of
                    the  Act,  determined  on  the  date the Plan
                    terminates  or on the date benefits commence,
                    whichever  is  earlier and in accordance with
                    regulations  of  the Pension Benefit Guaranty
                    Corporation.

               (b) If the Plan is terminated or the full current costs
               thereof  have  not been met at any time within ten (10)
               years  after the Effective Date, the benefits which any
               of  the  Participants  described  in  this  Section may
               receive  from  the  Employer's  contribution  shall not
               exceed  the benefits set forth in Section 8.2(a). If at
               the  end  of  the first ten (10) years the full current
               costs  are  not  met, the restrictions will continue to
               apply  until  the full current costs are funded for the
               first time.

               (c)  If  a Participant described in this Section leaves
               t h e    employ  of  the  Employer  or  withdraws  from
               participation  in  the Plan when the full current costs
               have  been  met, the benefits which he may receive from
               the Employer contributions shall not at any time within
               the  first  ten  (10)  years  after  the Effective Date
               exceed the benefits set forth in Section 8.2(a), except
               as provided in Section 8.2(i).

               (d)  These  conditions  shall  not  restrict  the  full
               payment  of  any  survivor's  benefits  on  behalf of a
               Participant  who  dies  while  in the Plan and the full
               current costs have been met.

               (e)  These  conditions  shall  not restrict the current
               payment  of  full retirement benefits called for by the
               Plan  for  any Retired Participant while the Plan is in
               full  effect  and its full current costs have been met,
               provided  an  agreement, adequately secured, guarantees
               the  repayment  of any part of the distribution that is
               or may become restricted.

               (f)  If  the  benefits  of,  or  with  respect  to, any

                                          69<PAGE>





               Participant  shall  have  been  suspended or limited in
               accordance with the limitations of Section 8.2(a), (b),
               and  (c)  above  because  the full current costs of the
               Plan  shall  not  then  have been met, and if such full
               current  costs  shall  thereafter be met, then the full
               amount  of  the  benefits  payable  to such Participant
               shall  be  resumed and the parts of such benefits which
               have been suspended shall then be paid in full.

               (g)  Notwithstanding  anything  in Section 8.2(a), (b),
               and (c) above, if on the termination of the Plan within
               the  first ten (10) years after the Effective Date, the
               funds,  Contracts, or other property under the Plan are
               more  than  sufficient  to  provide Accrued Benefits as
               defined  in  Section  1.1  for  Participants  and their
               Beneficiaries   including   full   benefits   for   all
               Participants  other  than  such of the twenty-five (25)
               highest  paid  Employees as are still in the service of
               the  Employer  and  also  including Accrued Benefits as
               limited  by  this  Section  for  such  twenty-five (25)
               highest  paid Employees, then any excess of such funds,
               Contracts,  and  property  shall  be  used  to  provide
               Accrued  Benefits for the twenty-five (25) highest paid
               Employees in excess of such limitations of this Section
               up  to  the  benefits  to which such Employees would be
               entitled under Section 1.1 without such limitations.

               (h)  In  the  event  that  Congress  should  provide by
               statute,  or  the  Treasury  Department or the Internal
               Revenue Service should provide by regulation or ruling,
               that  the  limitations provided for in this Section are
               no  longer  necessary in order to meet the requirements
               for a qualified pension plan under the Internal Revenue
               Code as then in effect, the limitations in this Section
               shall become void and shall no longer apply without the
               necessity of amendment to this Plan.

               (i)  In the event a lump-sum distribution is made to an
               Employee subject to the above restrictions in an amount
               in excess of that amount otherwise permitted under this
               Article,  an  agreement  shall  be  made, with adequate
               security  guaranteeing  repayment  of any amount of the
               distribution  that  is  restricted.  Adequate  security
               shall  mean  property  having a fair market value of at
               least  125%  of  the amount which would be repayable if
               the  Plan had terminated on the date of distribution of
               such lump sum. If the fair market value of the property
               falls  below  110%  of  the  amount which would then be
               repayable  if  the  Plan  were  then  to terminate, the
               distributee  shall deposit additional property to bring
               the value of the property to 125% of such amount.


                                          70<PAGE>





          8.3  PRE-TERMINATION RESTRICTIONS

          In  the  event  of  Plan  termination,  the benefit of any highly
          compensated  Participant  or  Former  Participant is limited to a
          benefit that is nondiscriminatory under Code Section 401(a)(4).

          For  plan  years  beginning on or after January 1, 1992, benefits
          distributed  to  any  member  of  the group of the 25 most highly
          c o mpensated  active  employees  or  highly  compensated  former
          employees    of  the  employer who have the greatest compensation
          from  the employer in the current or any prior plan year ("top 25
          highly  compensated  employees")  are  restricted  such  that the
          annual  payments  are  no  greater  than  an  amount equal to the
          payment  that  would  be  made  on behalf of the employee under a
          straight life annuity that is the actuarial equivalent of the sum
          of  the employee's accrued benefit, the employee's other benefits
          under  the  plan (other than a social security supplement, within
          the  meaning  of  section  1.411(a)-7(c)(4)(ii) of the Income Tax
          Regulations),  and the amount the employee is entitled to receive
          under a social security supplement.  The group of employees whose
          benefits  are  restricted  under this paragraph may be amended at
          any time without violating section 411(d)(6).

          The  restrictions  in the preceding paragraph shall not apply if:
          (1)  after payment of the benefit to an employee described in the
          preceding  paragraph,  the value of plan assets equals or exceeds
          110%  of  the value of current liabilities, as defined in section
          412(l)(7)  of  the  Internal  Revenue  Code, (2) the value of the
          benefits  for  an employee described above is less than 1% of the
          value  of  current  liabilities  before  distribution, or (3) the
          value  of  the  benefits  payable  under  the plan to an employee
          described above does not exceed $3,500.

          For purposes of this section, benefit includes loans in excess of
          the  amount  set  forth  in  section  72(p)(2)(A) of the Internal
          Revenue  Code, any periodic income, any withdrawal values payable
          to  a living employee, and any death benefits not provided for by
          insurance on the employee's life.

          An  employee's otherwise restricted benefit may be distributed in
          full  to  the  affected  employee  if prior to the receipt of the
          restricted  amount,  the employee enters into a written agreement
          with  the  Administrator  to  secure repayment to the Plan of the
          restricted  amount.    The restricted amount is the excess of the
          amounts  distributed to the Employee (accumulated with reasonable
          interest)  over  the  amounts that could have been distributed to
          the  Employee  under  the straight life annuity (accumulated with
          reasonable  interest).   The employee may secure repayment of the
          restricted  amount  upon  distribution  by:  (1) entering into an
          agreement  for  promptly  depositing in escrow with an acceptable
          depositary  property having a fair market value equal to at least
          125 percent of the restricted amount, (2) providing a bank letter

                                          71<PAGE>





          of  credit  in  an  amount  equal  to at least 100 percent of the
          restricted  amount,  or (3) posting a blond equal to at least 100
          percent of the restricted amount.  If the employee elects to post
          bond, the bond will be furnished by an insurance company, bonding
          company or other surety for federal bonds.

          The  escrow arrangement may provide that an employee may withdraw
          amounts  in  excess  of 125 percent of the restricted amount.  If
          the market value of the property in an escrow account falls below
          110 percent of the remaining restricted amount, the employee must
          deposit  additional  property  to bring the value of the property
          held  by  the  depositary  up  to  125  percent of the restricted
          amount.  The escrow arrangement may provide that the employee may
          have  the right to receive any income from the property placed in
          e s c row,  subject  to  the  employee's  obligation  to  deposit
          additional property, as set forth in the preceding sentence.

          A surety or bank may release any liability on a bond or letter of
          credit in excess of 100 percent of the restricted amount.

          If  the Administrator certifies to the depositary, surety or bank
          that  the  employee  (or  the  employee's  estate)  is  no longer
          obligated  to  repay  any  restricted  amount,  a  depositary may
          redeliver  to  the  employee  any  property  held under an escrow
          agreement,  and  a surety or bank may release any liability on an
          employee's bond or letter of credit.

          In  the  event  that  Congress  should provide by statute, or the
          Treasury  Department  or  the  Internal  Revenue  Service  should
          provide  by  regulation  or ruling, that the limitations provided
          for  in this Section are no longer necessary in order to meet the
          requirements  for  a  qualified  pension  plan under the Internal
          Revenue  Code  as then in effect, the limitations in this Section
          shall become void and shall no longer apply without the necessity
          of amendment to this Plan.


















                                          72<PAGE>





                                      ARTICLE IX
                     MERGER, CONSOLIDATION OR TRANSFER OF ASSETS

          9.1 REQUIREMENTS

          Before  this  Plan  can  be merged or consolidated with any other
          qualified  plan  or  its assets or liabilities transferred to any
          other  qualified  plan,  the  Administrator must secure (and file
          with  the  Secretary  of  Treasury at least 30 days beforehand) a
          c e rtification  from  a  government-enrolled  actuary  that  the
          benefits  which  would be received by a Participant of this Plan,
          in  the event of a termination of the Plan immediately after such
          transfer,  merger  or  consolidation,  are  at least equal to the
          benefits  the  Participant  would  have  received if the Plan had
          terminated   immediately   before   the   transfer,   merger   or
          consolidation,  and  such  transfer, merger or consolidation does
          not  otherwise  result  in  the  elimination  or reduction of any
          "Section  411(d)(6)  protected  benefits" as described in Section
          7.1.


































                                          73<PAGE>





                                      ARTICLE X
                                    MISCELLANEOUS

          10.1 PARTICIPANT'S RIGHTS

          This  Plan  shall  not be deemed to constitute a contract between
          the  Employer  and any Participant or to be a consideration or an
          inducement  for  the  employment  of any Participant or Employee.
          Nothing  contained  in  this  Plan  shall  be  deemed to give any
          Participant  or  Employee the right to be retained in the service
          of the Employer or to interfere with the right of the Employer to
          discharge  any  Participant or Employee at any time regardless of
          the  effect  which  such  discharge  shall  have  upon  him  as a
          Participant of this Plan.

          10.2 ALIENATION

          (a)  Subject  to  the exceptions provided below, no benefit which
          shall be payable out of the Trust Fund to any person (including a
          Participant or his Beneficiary) shall be subject in any manner to
          anticipation,  alienation,  sale,  transfer,  assignment, pledge,
          encumbrance,  or charge, and any attempt to anticipate, alienate,
          sell,  transfer,  assign,  pledge,  encumber,  or charge the same
          shall  be void; and no such benefit shall in any manner be liable
          f o r ,   or  subject  to,  the  debts,  contracts,  liabilities,
          engagements, or torts of any such person, nor shall it be subject
          to  attachment  or  legal process for or against such person, and
          the  same  shall not be recognized by the Trustee, except to such
          extent as may be required by law.

          (b) This provision shall not apply to the extent a Participant or
          Beneficiary  is  indebted to the Plan, as a result of a loan from
          the  Plan.  At  the time a distribution is to be made to or for a
          Participant's  or  Beneficiary's  benefit, such proportion of the
          amount distributed as shall equal such loan indebtedness shall be
          paid  by  the Trustee to the Trustee or the Administrator, at the
          direction  of  the  Administrator,  to apply against or discharge
          such  loan  indebtedness. Prior to making a payment, however, the
          Participant  or  Beneficiary  must be given written notice by the
          Administrator  that  such  loan  indebtedness is to be so paid in
          whole  or  part  from  his  Participant's Accrued Benefit. If the
          P a rticipant  or  Beneficiary  does  not  agree  that  the  loan
          indebtedness  is  a  valid claim against his Vested Participant's
          Accrued Benefit, he shall be entitled to a review of the validity
          of  the  claim in accordance with procedures provided in Sections
          2.12 and 2.13.

          (c)  This  provision  shall  not  apply  to a "qualified domestic
          relations  order" defined in Code Section 414(p), and those other
          domestic  relations  orders  permitted  to  be  so treated by the
          Administrator  under  the provisions of the Retirement Equity Act
          of 1984. The Administrator shall establish a written procedure to

                                          74<PAGE>





          determine  the  qualified status of domestic relations orders and
          to administer distributions under such qualified orders. Further,
          to  the  extent  provided  under  a "qualified domestic relations
          order",  a former spouse of a Participant shall be treated as the
          spouse or surviving spouse for all purposes under the Plan.

          10.3 CONSTRUCTION OF PLAN

          This  Plan  shall  be construed and enforced according to the Act
          and  the  laws  of  the  State  of  Texas,  other  than  its laws
          respecting choice of law, to the extent not preempted by the Act.

          10.4 GENDER AND NUMBER

          Wherever  any words are used herein in the masculine, feminine or
          neuter  gender,  they shall be construed as though they were also
          used  in  another  gender in all cases where they would so apply,
          and  whenever any words are used herein in the singular or plural
          form,  they  shall  be construed as though they were also used in
          the other form in all cases where they would so apply.

          10.5 LEGAL ACTION

          In  the event any claim, suit, or proceeding is brought regarding
          the  Trust and/or Plan established hereunder to which the Trustee
          or  the  Administrator  may  be a party, and such claim, suit, or
          proceeding  is resolved in favor of the Trustee or Administrator,
          they  shall  be entitled to be reimbursed from the Trust Fund for
          any and all costs, attorney's fees, and other expenses pertaining
          thereto incurred by them for which they shall have become liable.

          10.6 PROHIBITION AGAINST DIVERSION OF FUNDS

          (a) Except as provided below and otherwise specifically permitted
          by law, it shall be impossible by operation of the Plan or of the
          Trust,  by  termination  of  either,  by  power  of revocation or
          amendment,  by  the  happening  of any contingency, by collateral
          arrangement  or by any other means, for any part of the corpus or
          income  of  any trust fund maintained pursuant to the Plan or any
          funds  contributed  thereto  to  be  used  for,  or  diverted to,
          purposes  other  than  the  exclusive  benefit  of  Participants,
          Retired Participants, or their Beneficiaries.

          ( b )   In  the  event  the  Employer  shall  make  an  excessive
          contribution  under  a  mistake  of  fact pursuant to Act Section
          403(c)(2)(A), the Employer may demand repayment of such excessive
          contribution  at  any time within one (1) year following the time
          of  payment  and  the  Trustees  shall  return such amount to the
          Employer  within  the  one  (1) year period. Earnings of the Plan
          attributable  to  the excess contributions may not be returned to
          the  Employer but any losses attributable thereto must reduce the
          amount so returned.

                                          75<PAGE>


























































                                          76<PAGE>





          10.7 BONDING

          Every  Fiduciary,  except  a bank or an insurance company, unless
          exempted  by  the Act and regulations thereunder, shall be bonded
          in  an  amount  not less than 10% of the amount of the funds such
          Fiduciary handles; provided, however, that the minimum bond shall
          be  $1,000  and  the  maximum bond, $500,000. The amount of funds
          handled shall be determined at the beginning of each Plan Year by
          the amount of funds handled by such person, group, or class to be
          covered and their predecessors, if any, during the preceding Plan
          Year,  or  if there is no preceding Plan Year, then by the amount
          of the funds to be handled during the then current year. The bond
          shall  provide  protection to the Plan against any loss by reason
          of  acts  of  fraud  or  dishonesty  by the Fiduciary alone or in
          connivance  with  others.  The surety shall be a corporate surety
          company  (as such term is used in Act Section 412(a)(2)), and the
          bond  shall  be  in  a  form  approved by the Secretary of Labor.
          Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, the cost of
          such bonds shall be an expense of and may, at the election of the
          Administrator, be paid from the Trust Fund or by the Employer.

          10.8 EMPLOYER'S AND TRUSTEE'S PROTECTIVE CLAUSE

          Neither the Employer nor the Trustee, nor their successors, shall
          be  responsible for the validity of any Contract issued hereunder
          or  for  the  failure on the part of the insurer to make payments
          provided  by  any  such Contract, or for the action of any person
          which  may  delay  payment  or render a Contract null and void or
          unenforceable in whole or in part.

          10.9 INSURER'S PROTECTIVE CLAUSE

          Any  insurer  who  shall issue Contracts hereunder shall not have
          any  responsibility  for the validity of this Plan or for the tax
          or legal aspects of this Plan. The insurer shall be protected and
          held  harmless in acting in accordance with any written direction
          of  the Trustee, and shall have no duty to see to the application
          of any funds paid to the Trustee, nor be required to question any
          actions  directed  by the Trustee. Regardless of any provision of
          this  Plan,  the  insurer shall not be required to take or permit
          any  action  or  allow  any  benefit or privilege contrary to the
          terms  of any Contract which it issues hereunder, or the rules of
          the insurer.

          10.10 RECEIPT AND RELEASE FOR PAYMENTS

          Any   payment  to  any  Participant,  his  legal  representative,
          Beneficiary,  or  to any guardian or committee appointed for such
          Participant  or  Beneficiary in accordance with the provisions of
          the  Plan,  shall, to the extent thereof, be in full satisfaction
          of  all  claims  hereunder  against the Trustee and the Employer,
          either    of   whom   may   require   such   Participant,   legal

                                          77<PAGE>





          r e p resentative,  Beneficiary,  guardian  or  committee,  as  a
          condition  precedent  to  such  payment, to execute a receipt and
          release  thereof  in  such  form  as  shall  be determined by the
          Trustee or Employer.

          10.11 ACTION BY THE EMPLOYER

          Whenever the Employer under the terms of the Plan is permitted or
          required to do or perform any act or matter or thing, it shall be
          done  and  performed  by  a person duly authorized by its legally
          constituted authority.

          10.12 NAMED FIDUCIARIES AND ALLOCATION OF RESPONSIBILITY

          The  "named  Fiduciaries"  of this Plan are (1) the Employer, (2)
          the  Administrator  and  (3)  the  Trustee. The named Fiduciaries
          shall  have only those specific powers, duties, responsibilities,
          and obligations as are specifically given them under the Plan. In
          general,  the  Employer  shall  have  the sole responsibility for
          making  the  contributions  provided  for  under Section 4.1; and
          shall  have  the sole authority to appoint and remove the Trustee
          and  the  Administrator;  to formulate the Plan's "funding policy
          and  method"; and to amend or terminate, in whole or in part, the
          Plan.  The  Administrator  shall have the sole responsibility for
          t h e   administration  of  the  Plan,  which  responsibility  is
          specifically  described  in  the Plan. The Trustee shall have the
          sole  responsibility  of  management of the assets held under the
          Trust,  except  those  assets,  the  management of which has been
          a s s igned  to  an  Investment  Manager,  who  shall  be  solely
          responsible  for the management of the assets assigned to it, all
          as  specifically  provided  in  the  Plan.  Each  named Fiduciary
          warrants  that  any  directions  given, information furnished, or
          action  taken by it shall be in accordance with the provisions of
          t h e    Plan,  authorizing  or  providing  for  such  direction,
          information or action. Furthermore, each named Fiduciary may rely
          upon  any  such direction, information or action of another named
          Fiduciary  as  being  proper  under the Plan, and is not required
          under  the  Plan  to  inquire  into  the  propriety  of  any such
          direction,  information  or action. It is intended under the Plan
          that  each  named  Fiduciary  shall be responsible for the proper
          e x ercise  of  its  own  powers,  duties,  responsibilities  and
          obligations  under  the  Plan. No named Fiduciary shall guarantee
          the   Trust  Fund  in  any  manner  against  investment  loss  or
          depreciation  in  asset  value.  Any person or group may serve in
          more  than  one  Fiduciary  capacity. In the furtherance of their
          responsibilities  hereunder,  the  "named  Fiduciaries"  shall be
          empowered  to  interpret  the  Plan  and  Trust  and  to  resolve
          ambiguities,  inconsistencies and omissions, which findings shall
          be binding, final and conclusive.

          10.13 HEADINGS


                                          78<PAGE>





          The  headings and subheadings of this Plan have been inserted for
          c o n venience  of  reference  and  are  to  be  ignored  in  any
          construction of the provisions hereof.

          10.14 APPROVAL BY INTERNAL REVENUE SERVICE

          (a)    Notwithstanding   anything   herein   to   the   contrary,
          contributions  to  this  Plan  are  conditioned  upon the initial
          qualification  of  the Plan under Code Section 401, including any
          amendments   to  the  Plan.  If  the  Plan  receives  an  adverse
          d e t e rmination  with  respect  to  its  initial  or  continued
          qualification,  then  the Plan shall return such contributions to
          the  Employer  within one year after such determination, provided
          the  application  for  the  determination  is  made  by  the time
          prescribed  by  law  for  filing  the  Employer's  return for the
          taxable year in which the Plan was adopted, or such later date as
          the Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe.

          ( b )   Notwithstanding  any  provisions  to  the  contrary,  any
          contribution  by  the  Employer  to the Trust Fund is conditioned
          upon  the deductibility of the contribution by the Employer under
          the Code and, to the extent any such deduction is disallowed, the
          Employer shall, within one (1) year following the disallowance of
          the  deduction,  demand repayment of such disallowed contribution
          and  the  Trustee  shall  return such contribution within one (1)
          y e a r    following  the  disallowance.  Earnings  of  the  Plan
          attributable  to  the  excess contribution may not be returned to
          the Employer, but any losses attributable thereto must reduce the
          amount so returned.

          10.15 UNIFORMITY

          All provisions of this Plan shall be interpreted and applied in a
          uniform,  nondiscriminatory  manner. In the event of any conflict
          between  the  terms  of  this  Plan  and  any  Contract purchased
          hereunder, the Plan provisions shall control.

















                                          79<PAGE>





          IN  WITNESS WHEREOF, this Plan has been executed the day and year
          first above written.




                                       Southdown, Inc.


                                                                           
                                       B y   /s/  Kenneth  D.  Cohn,  Vice
          President
                                                       EMPLOYER








































                                          80<PAGE>





                                      APPENDIX A

          Employees  whose terms of employment are governed by a collective
          bargaining  agreement  between the Employer and the International
          Brotherhood  of  Boilermakers,  Cement,  Lime,  Gypsum and Allied
          Workers  Division AFL-CIO Local Lodge D-357, or successors to the
          interests  of  either  party  thereto, who are Eligible Employees
          pursuant  to  Section  1.17 of, and are Participants in, the Plan
          (referred to in this Appendix A as the "D-357 Participants") will
          have  benefits  determined  in  accordance with the provisions of
          this Plan as modified by the provisions of this Appendix A.

          A.1 Definitions applicable for Appendix A only:

          (a)  Local  Change  Date  - The later of such D-357 Participant's
          date of eligibility, or March 1, 1991.

          (b) Transition Service - Transition Service shall be equal to the
          D-357 Participant's credited service determined immediately prior
          to  the  Local Change Date plus such D-357 Participant's Years of
          Service  beginning  on  such  Local Change Date and ending on the
          termination  of  employment  date.    Transition  Service will be
          determined  in  accordance with the terms of the Hourly Plan (see
          Section  1.17)  on the day preceding the day of the merger of the
          Hourly Plan with this Plan.

          (c)  D-357  Service - a D-357 Participant's Transition Service as
          defined  in  (b)  above,  taking  into  account  Years of Service
          beginning  on  the Local Change Date and ending on the Transition
          End Date.
           
          (d)  D-357  Benefit - a monthly retirement benefit payable in the
          form  of  a  single  life  annuity  for  the  life  of  the D-357
          Participant, equal to a fixed dollar amount multiplied by such D-
          357  Participant's  D-357 Service.  The fixed dollar amount shall
          be  the  fixed  dollar  amount  set  forth in the following table
          corresponding  to  the applicable period in which falls the D-357
          Participant's date of termination of eligibility.

                                       Applic
                                       a b le
                                       Period
                                             
                                       Rate
                                       1/1/89 - 3/31/89        $20.50
                                       4/1/89 - 2/28/91        $21.00
                                       3/1/91 - 2/29/96        $21.00

          The  D-357  Benefit  shall  be reduced in accordance with Section
          1.1(b)(vii) of this Plan. 

          (e)  Transition  End  Date  -  the  earlier of the termination of

                                          81<PAGE>





          eligibility date or February 29, 1996.

          A.2  Accrued  Benefit: The Accrued Benefit for D-357 Participants
          covered  by  this Appendix A shall be equal to the greater of (i)
          the  Accrued  Benefit  otherwise  determined by the provisions of
          this Plan, and (ii) the D-357 Participant's D-357 Benefit.
               
          A.3  Early  Retirement  Benefits: A D-357 Participant electing to
          retire on an Early Retirement Date will receive the greater of:

               ( a )   his  Early  Retirement  Benefit  determined  in
               accordance with the other provisions of this Plan, or,

               ( b )  provided  such  D-357  Participant's  Transition
               Service  equals  or  exceeds  10,  a monthly retirement
               pension in an amount equal to his D-357 Benefit reduced
               by three-tenths of one percent (0.3%) for each month by
               w h ich  his  Early  Retirement  Date  precedes  Normal
               Retirement Date. However, if such D-357 Participant has
               accumulated  thirty  (30)  or  more years of Transition
               Service  prior  to  his  termination,  he  may elect to
               retire  and receive an immediate pension, unreduced for
               early  commencement  (but  reduced to reflect a form of
               payment other than a life only form).

          A.4  Plant  Shutdown  Benefits:  With  respect  to  Section 5.17,
          Retirement Because of Plant Shutdown or Layoff, the Minimum Years
          of Service for any D-357 Participant shall be ten (10) years, and
          the Minimum Combined Total shall be sixty-five (65).  No benefits
          will become payable under Section 5.17 or any other provisions of
          this  Plan  solely as the result of an event described in Section
          5.17 which occurs after the Transition End Date.

          A.5  Disability  Benefits:  For  purposes  of  Section  5.4,  the
          Disability Minimum is ten (10) years. 

          A.6  Amendments:  Article  VII  notwithstanding  and  except with
          respect  to amendments which may be required by law, no amendment
          affecting    pensions   including   service,   benefit   accrual,
          eligibility,  vesting,  rights,  compensation, or claims shall be
          effective  with  respect  to  a  D-357  Participant  unless  such
          amendment  is  agreed  to  between  the  Employer  and  the union
          representative.    Further,  to  the  extent permitted by, or not
          v i olative  of,  law,  provisions  of  a  collective  bargaining
          agreement respecting pensions including service, benefit accrual,
          eligibility,  vesting,  rights,  compensation, or claims shall be
          deemed  an  amendment to this Plan and are incorporated herein by
          reference.  No such amendment shall be effective, however, if the
          effect is to disqualify this Plan pursuant to Code Section 401(a)
          or to reduce a pre-amendment Accrued Benefit.



                                          82<PAGE>





                                       APPENDIX B

          Employees  whose terms of employment are governed by a collective
          bargaining  agreement  between the Employer and the International
          Brotherhood  of  Boilermakers,  Cement,  Lime,  Gypsum and Allied
          Workers  Division AFL-CIO Local Lodge D-476, or successors to the
          interests  of  either  party  thereto, who are Eligible Employees
          pursuant  to  Section  1.17 of, and are Participants in, the Plan
          (referred to in this Appendix B as the "D-476 Participants") will
          have  benefits  determined  in  accordance with the provisions of
          this Plan, as modified by this Appendix B.  A "D-476 Participant"
          shall  include  only  those  Employees  described herein who were
          employed  by the Employer on the day preceding the date of merger
          of  the  Hourly  Plan  (see  Section 1.17) with this Plan (herein
          referred to as the "Hourly Merger Date"). 

          B.1 Definitions applicable for Appendix B only:

          (a)  Local  Change  Date  - The later of such D-476 Participant's
          date of eligibility, or August 1, 1991.

          (b) Transition Service - Transition Service shall be equal to the
          D-476 Participant's credited service determined immediately prior
          to  the  Local Change Date plus such D-476 Participant's Years of
          Service  beginning  on  such  Local Change Date and ending on the
          termination  of  employment  date.    Transition  Service will be
          determined  in  accordance with the terms of the Hourly Plan (see
          Section  1.17)  on the day preceding the day of the merger of the
          Hourly Plan with this Plan.

          (c)  D-476  Service - a D-476 Participant's Transition Service as
          defined  in  (b)  above,  taking  into  account  Years of Service
          beginning  on  the Local Change Date and ending on the Transition
          End Date.
           
          (d)  D-476  Benefit - a monthly retirement benefit payable in the
          form  of  a  single  life  annuity  for  the  life  of  the D-476
          Participant, equal to a fixed dollar amount multiplied by such D-
          476  Participant's  D-476 Service.  The fixed dollar amount shall
          be  the  fixed  dollar  amount  set  forth in the following table
          corresponding  to  the applicable period in which falls the D-476
          Participant's date of termination of eligibility.

                      Applicable Period        Rate 
                      1/1/89 - 7/31/90        $20.50
                      8/1/90 - 7/31/91        $21.00
                      8/1/91 - 7/31/92        $21.50
                      8/1/92 - 7/31/96        $22.00

          This   benefit  shall  be  reduced  in  accordance  with  Section
          1.1(b)(vii) of this Plan.


                                          83<PAGE>





          (e)  Transition  End  Date  -  the  earlier of the termination of
          eligibility date or July 31, 1996.

          B.2  Accrued  Benefit: The Accrued Benefit for D-476 Participants
          covered  by  this Appendix B shall be equal to the greater of (i)
          the  Accrued  Benefit  otherwise  determined by the provisions of
          this Plan, and (ii) the D-476 Participant's D-476 Benefit.
               
          B.3  Early  Retirement  Benefits: A D-476 Participant electing to
          retire on an Early Retirement Date will receive the greater of:

               ( a )   his  Early  Retirement  Benefit  determined  in
               accordance with the other provisions of this Plan, or,

               ( b )  provided  such  D-476  Participant's  Transition
               Service  equals  or  exceeds  10,  a monthly retirement
               pension in an amount equal to his D-476 Benefit reduced
               by three-tenths of one percent (0.3%) for each month by
               w h ich  his  Early  Retirement  Date  precedes  Normal
               Retirement Date. However, if such D-476 Participant has
               accumulated  thirty  (30)  or  more years of Transition
               Service  prior  to  his  termination,  he  may elect to
               retire  and receive an immediate pension, unreduced for
               early  commencement  (but  reduced to reflect a form of
               payment other than a life only form).

          B.4  Plant  Shutdown  Benefits:  With  respect  to  Section 5.17,
          Retirement Because of Plant Shutdown or Layoff, the Minimum Years
          of Service for any D-476 Participant shall be ten (10) years, and
          the Minimum Combined Total shall be sixty-five (65).  No benefits
          will become payable under Section 5.17 or any other provisions of
          this  Plan  solely as the result of an event described in Section
          5.17 which occurs after the Transition End Date.

          B.5  Disability  Benefits:  For  purposes  of  Section  5.4,  the
          Disability Minimum is ten (10) years.

          B.6  Amendments:  Article  VII  notwithstanding  and  except with
          respect  to amendments which may be required by law, no amendment
          affecting    pensions   including   service,   benefit   accrual,
          eligibility,  vesting,  rights,  compensation, or claims shall be
          effective  with  respect  to  a  D-476  Participant  unless  such
          amendment  is  agreed  to  between  the  Employer  and  the union
          representative.    Further,  to  the  extent permitted by, or not
          v i olative  of,  law,  provisions  of  a  collective  bargaining
          agreement respecting pensions including service, benefit accrual,
          eligibility,  vesting,  rights,  compensation, or claims shall be
          deemed  an  amendment to this Plan and are incorporated herein by
          reference.  No such amendment shall be effective, however, if the
          effect is to disqualify this Plan pursuant to Code Section 401(a)
          or to reduce a pre-amendment Accrued Benefit.


                                          84<PAGE>





                                      APPENDIX C

          Employees  whose terms of employment are governed by a collective
          b a rgaining  agreement  between  the  Employer  and  the  United
          Paperworkers  International  Union, Local 30049, or successors to
          the    interests  of  either  party  thereto,  who  are  Eligible
          Employees  pursuant  to Section 1.17 of, and are Participants in,
          the  Plan  (referred  to  in  this  Appendix  C  as the "Local 49
          Participants")  will  have benefits determined in accordance with
          the provisions of this Plan, as modified by this Appendix C.

          C.1 Definitions applicable for Appendix C only:

          (a)  Local Change Date - The later of such Local 49 Participant's
          date of eligibility, or August 16, 1993.

          (b) Transition Service - Transition Service shall be equal to the
          Local  49  Participant's  credited service determined immediately
          prior  to  the Local Change Date plus such Local 49 Participant's
          Years  of  Service beginning on such Local Change Date and ending
          on  the  termination of employment date.  Transition Service will
          be  determined  in  accordance  with the terms of the Hourly Plan
          (see  Section 1.17) on the day preceding the day of the merger of
          the Hourly Plan with this Plan.

          (c)  Local  49  Service  -  a  Local  49 Participant's Transition
          Service  as  defined  in  (b) above, taking into account Years of
          Service  beginning  on  the  Local  Change Date and ending on the
          Transition End Date.
           
          (d)  Local  49  Benefit - a monthly retirement benefit payable in
          the  form  of  a single life annuity for the life of the Local 49
          Participant,  equal  to  a fixed dollar amount multiplied by such
          Local 49 Participant's Local 49 Service.  The fixed dollar amount
          shall be the fixed dollar amount set forth in the following table
          corresponding  to  the applicable period in which falls the Local
          49 Participant's date of termination of eligibility.

                      Applicable Period        Rate
                      1/1/89 - 2/25/90        $20.50
                      2/26/90- 8/15/90        $21.00
                      8/16/90- 8/15/91        $21.50
                      8/16/91- 8/15/92        $22.00
                      8/16/92- 8/15/93        $22.50
                      8/16/93- 8/15/94        $23.00  
                      8/16/94- 8/15/95        $23.50
                      8/16/95- 8/15/96        $24.00
                      8/16/96- 8/15/97        $24.50
                      8/16/97- 8/15/98        $25.00

          The  minimum  Local  49  Benefit for any Local 49 Participant who
          retires  during  the  five-year period commencing August 16, 1993

                                          85<PAGE>





          and  who  has  Transition Service of thirty (30) years or more at
          the time of retirement will not be less than $25.00 multiplied by
          such  Local  49  Participant's  Transition Service.  The Local 49
          Benefit  shall  be reduced in accordance with Section 1.1(b)(vii)
          of this Plan.

          (e)  Transition  End  Date  -  the  earlier of the termination of
          eligibility date or August 15, 1998.
               
          C . 2    Accrued  Benefit:  The  Accrued  Benefit  for  Local  49
          Participants  covered  by  this  Appendix C shall be equal to the
          greater  of  (i)  the Accrued Benefit otherwise determined by the
          provisions  of  this  Plan,  and  (ii) the Local 49 Participant's
          Local  49 Benefit.  Provided, however, that with respect to Local
          49  Participants  covered  by  this Appendix C, "Compensation" as
          defined in Section 1.12 of this Plan shall include "gainsharing."
               
          C.3 Early Retirement Benefits: A Local 49 Participant electing to
          retire on an Early Retirement Date will receive the greater of:

               ( a )   his  Early  Retirement  Benefit  determined  in
               accordance with the other provisions of this Plan, or,

               (b)  provided  such  Local  49 Participant's Transition
               Service  equals  or  exceeds  10,  a monthly retirement
               pension  in  an  amount  equal  to his Local 49 Benefit
               reduced  by three-tenths of one percent (0.3%) for each
               month  by  which  his  Early  Retirement  Date precedes
               Normal  Retirement  Date.    However,  if such Local 49
               Participant  has  accumulated thirty (30) or more years
               of  Transition Service prior to his termination, he may
               elect  to  retire  and  receive  an  immediate pension,
               unreduced   for  early  commencement  (but  reduced  to
               reflect a form of payment other than a life only form).

          C.4  Plant  Shutdown  Benefits:  With  respect  to  Section 5.17,
          Retirement Because of Plant Shutdown or Layoff, the Minimum Years
          of  Service for any Local 49 Participant shall be ten (10) years,
          and  the  Minimum  Combined  Total  shall be sixty-five (65).  No
          benefits  will  become  payable  under  Section 5.17 or any other
          provisions  of  this  Plan  solely  as  the  result  of  an event
          described  in  Section 5.17 which occurs after the Transition End
          Date.

          C.5  Disability  Benefits:  For  purposes  of  Section  5.4,  the
          Disability Minimum is five (5) years.

          C.6  Amendments:  Article  VII  notwithstanding  and  except with
          respect  to amendments which may be required by law, no amendment
          affecting    pensions   including   service,   benefit   accrual,
          eligibility,  vesting,  rights,  compensation, or claims shall be
          effective  with  respect  to  a  Local 49 Participant unless such

                                          86<PAGE>





          amendment  is  agreed  to  between  the  Employer  and  the union
          representative.    Further,  to  the  extent permitted by, or not
          v i olative  of,  law,  provisions  of  a  collective  bargaining
          agreement respecting pensions including service, benefit accrual,
          eligibility,  vesting,  rights,  compensation, or claims shall be
          deemed  an  amendment to this Plan and are incorporated herein by
          reference.  No such amendment shall be effective, however, if the
          effect is to disqualify this Plan pursuant to Code Section 401(a)
          or to reduce a pre-amendment Accrued Benefit.












































                                          87<PAGE>







                                                                         










                                         SOUTHDOWN, INC.
                                RETIREMENT SAVINGS PLAN

                               PLAN AND TRUST AGREEMENT


                                AS AMENDED AND RESTATED
                           GENERALLY EFFECTIVE JULY 1, 1990<PAGE>





                 Southdown, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan and Trust

              As Amended and Restated Generally Effective July 1, 1990


         Southdown,   Inc.  previously  established  the  Southdown,  Inc.
         Retirement  Savings Plan for the benefit of eligible employees of
         the  Company  and  its  participating  affiliates.    The Plan is
         intended  to  constitute  a  qualified  profit  sharing  plan, as
         described in Code section 401(a), which includes a qualified cash
         or deferred arrangement, as described in Code section 401(k).

         The  provisions  of  this  Plan and Trust relating to the Trustee
         constitute  the  trust  agreement  which  is  entered into by and
         b e t w een  Southdown,  Inc.  and  Wells  Fargo  Bank,  National

         Association.  The Trust is intended to be tax exempt as described
         under Code section 501(a).

         The   Plan  constitutes  an  amendment  and  restatement  of  the
         Southdown,  Inc.  Retirement  Savings  Plan  which was originally
         established  effective  as of July 1, 1990, and its related trust
         agreement.    Effective  July  1,  1990  the Transmix Corporation
         Retirement  Savings  Plan  and  the Savings Plan for Employees of
         Moore  McCormack  Cement,  Inc.  and Certain Subsidiary Companies
         were  merged  into  this Plan.  Effective March 1, 1991 the Moore
         McCormack  Resources  & Lines Salaried Employees Savings Plan was
         merged into this Plan.

         The  Southdown,  Inc.  Retirement  Savings Plan and Trust, as set
         forth  in this document, is hereby amended and restated generally

         effective as of July 1, 1990. 

         Date: ___________ , 19___       Southdown, Inc.
                   
                                         By: ___________________

                                         Title: ___________________

         The  trust  agreement  set forth in those provisions of this Plan
         and Trust which relate to the Trustee is hereby executed.

         Date:  ___________  ,  19___        Wells  Fargo  Bank,  National
         Association
                   

                                         By: ___________________

                                         Title: ___________________

         Date: ___________ , 19___  Wells Fargo Bank, National Association

                                         By: ___________________

                                         Title: ___________________<PAGE>





                                 TABLE OF CONTENTS


         1    DEFINITIONS

         2    ELIGIBILITY
              2.1   Eligibility
              2.2   Ineligible Employees
              2.3   Ineligible or Former Participants

         3    PARTICIPANT CONTRIBUTIONS
              3.1   Pre-Tax Contribution Election
              3.2   After-Tax Contribution Election
              3.3   Changing a Contribution Election
              3.4   Revoking and Resuming a Contribution Election
              3.5   Contribution Percentage Limits
              3.6   Refunds When Contribution Dollar Limit Exceeded
              3.7   Timing, Posting and Tax Considerations

         4    ROLLOVERS & TRUST-TO-TRUST TRANSFERS 
              4.1   Rollovers
              4.2   Transfers From Other Qualified Plans

         5    EMPLOYER CONTRIBUTIONS
              5.1   Matching Contributions

         6    ACCOUNTING
              6.1   Individual Participant Accounting
              6.2   Sweep Account is Transaction Account
              6.3   Trade Date Accounting and Investment Cycle
              6.4   Accounting for Investment Funds
              6.5   Payment of Fees and Expenses
              6.6   Accounting for Participant Loans
              6.7   Error Correction
              6.8   Participant Statements
              6.9   Special Accounting During Conversion Period
              6.10  Accounts for QDRO Beneficiaries

         7    INVESTMENT FUNDS AND ELECTIONS 
              7.1   Investment Funds
              7.2   Investment Fund Elections
              7.3   Responsibility for Investment Choice
              7.4   Default if No Election
              7.5   Timing
              7.6   Investment Fund Election Change Fees


























                                         i<PAGE>





         8    VESTING 
              8.1   Fully Vested Contribution Accounts

         9    PARTICIPANT LOANS
              9.1   Participant Loans Permitted
              9.2   Loan Application, Note and Security
              9.3   Spousal Consent
              9.4   Loan Approval
              9.5   Loan Funding Limits
              9.6   Maximum Number of Loans
              9.7   Source and Timing of Loan Funding
              9.8   Interest Rate
              9.9   Repayment
              9.10  Repayment Hierarchy
              9.11  Repayment Suspension
              9.12  Loan Default
              9.13  Call Feature

         10   IN-SERVICE WITHDRAWALS
              10.1  In-Service Withdrawals Permitted
              10.2  In-Service Withdrawal Application and Notice
              10.3  Spousal Consent
              10.4  In-Service Withdrawal Approval
              10.5  Minimum Amount, Payment Form and Medium
              10.6  Source and Timing of In-Service Withdrawal Funding
              10.7  Hardship Withdrawals
              10.8  After-Tax Account Withdrawals
              10.9  Over Age 59-1/2 Withdrawals

         11   DISTRIBUTIONS ONCE EMPLOYMENT ENDS OR AS REQUIRED BY LAW  
              11.1  Benefit Information, Notices and Election
              11.2  Spousal Consent
              11.3  Payment Form and Medium
              11.4  Small Amounts Paid Immediately
              11.5  Source and Timing of Distribution Funding
              11.6  Latest Commencement Permitted
              11.7  Payment Within Life Expectancy
              11.8  Incidental Benefit Rule
              11.9  Payment to Beneficiary
              11.10 Beneficiary Designation

         12   ADP AND ACP TESTS
              12.1  Contribution Limitation Definitions
              12.2  ADP and ACP Tests
              12.3  Correction of ADP and ACP Tests 
              12.4  Multiple Use Test
              12.5  Correction of Multiple Use Test
              12.6  Adjustment for Investment Gain or Loss
              12.7  Testing Responsibilities and Required Records
              12.8  Separate Testing

         13   MAXIMUM CONTRIBUTION AND BENEFIT LIMITATIONS
              13.1  "Annual Addition" Defined
              13.2  Maximum Annual Addition
              13.3  Avoiding an Excess Annual Addition
              13.4  Correcting an Excess Annual Addition
              13.5  Correcting a Multiple Plan Excess
              13.6  "Defined Benefit Fraction" Defined
              13.7  "Defined Contribution Fraction" Defined
              13.8  Combined Plan Limits and Correction

         14   TOP HEAVY RULES
              14.1  Top Heavy Definitions
              14.2  Special Contributions
              14.3  Adjustment to Combined Limits for
                   Different Plans

         15   PLAN ADMINISTRATION 
              15.1  Plan Delineates Authority and Responsibility
              15.2  Fiduciary Standards

                                         ii<PAGE>





              15.3  Company is ERISA Plan Administrator
              15.4  Administrator Duties
              15.5  Advisors May be Retained
              15.6  Delegation of Administrator Duties
              15.7  Committee Operating Rules

         16   MANAGEMENT OF INVESTMENTS
              16.1  Trust Agreement
              16.2  Investment Funds
              16.3  Authority to Hold Cash
              16.4  Trustee to Act Upon Instructions
              16.5  Administrator Has Right to
                    Vote Registered Investment Company Shares
              16.6  Custom Fund Investment Management
              16.7  Authority to Segregate Assets
              16.8  Maximum Permitted Investment in Company Stock
              16.9  Participants Have Right to Vote and
                    Tender Company Stock
              16.10 Registration and Disclosure for Company Stock

         17   TRUST ADMINISTRATION 
              17.1  Trustee to Construe Trust
              17.2  Trustee To Act As Owner of Trust Assets
              17.3  United States Indicia of Ownership
              17.4  Tax Withholding and Payment
              17.5  Trustee Duties and Limitations 
              17.6  Trust Accounting 
              17.7  Valuation of Certain Assets
              17.8  Legal Counsel
              17.9  Fees and Expenses 

         18   RIGHTS, PROTECTION, CONSTRUCTION AND JURISDICTION
              18.1  Plan Does Not Affect Employment Rights
              18.2  Limited Return of Contributions
              18.3  Assignment and Alienation 
              18.4  Facility of Payment 
              18.5  Reallocation of Lost Participant's Accounts
              18.6  Claims Procedure
              18.7  Construction
              18.8  Jurisdiction and Severability
              18.9  Indemnification by Employer

         19   AMENDMENT, MERGER AND TERMINATION 
              19.1  Amendment
              19.2  Merger
              19.3  Plan Termination
              19.4  Termination of Employer's Participation
              19.5  Replacement of the Trustee
              19.6  Final Settlement and Accounting of Trustee

         APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT FUNDS

         APPENDIX B - PAYMENT OF PLAN FEES AND EXPENSES 

         APPENDIX C - LOAN INTEREST RATE

              














                                        iii<PAGE>












         1    DEFINITIONS

              When  capitalized,  the  words  and  phrases  below have the
              following  meanings  unless  different  meanings are clearly
              required by the context:

              1.1   "Account".    The  records  maintained for purposes of
                    accounting  for  a Participant's interest in the Plan.
                    "Account"  may  refer  to  one or all of the following
                    accounts  which  have  been  created  on  behalf  of a
                    Participant  to  hold  specific types of Contributions
                    under the Plan:  

                    (a)  "Pre-Tax  Account".    An account created to hold
                         Pre-Tax Contributions.

                    (b)  "After-Tax  Account".  An account created to hold
                         After-Tax Contributions.

                    (c)  "Rollover  Account".   An account created to hold
                         Rollover Contributions.

                    (d)  "Matching  Account".   An account created to hold
                         Matching Contributions.

                    (e)  "Prior   Plan  Matching  Account".    An  account
                         c r e a ted   to   hold   Prior   Plan   Matching
                         Contributions.

              1.2   "ACP"  or  "Average  Contribution  Percentage".    The
                    percentage calculated in accordance with Section 12.1.

              1.3   "Administrator".   The Company, which may delegate all
                    or  a portion of the duties of the Administrator under
                    the  Plan  to  a  Committee in accordance with Section
                    15.6.

              1.4   " A D P "  or  "Average  Deferral  Percentage".    The
                    percentage calculated in accordance with Section 12.1.

              1.5   "Beneficiary".    The  person  or  persons  who  is to
                    receive  benefits  after  the death of the Participant
                    pursuant to the "Beneficiary Designation" paragraph in
                    Section 11, or as a result of a QDRO.

              1.6   "Code".    The  Internal  Revenue  Code  of  1986,  as
                    amended.  Reference to any specific Code section shall
                    include such section, any valid regulation promulgated
                    thereunder, and any comparable provision of any future
                    legislation  amending,  supplementing  or  superseding
                    such section.

              1.7   "Committee".    If applicable, the committee which has
                    been  appointed  by the Company to administer the Plan
                    in accordance with Section 15.6.









                                         1<PAGE>





              1.8   "Company".    Southdown,  Inc.  or  any  successor  by
                    merger, purchase or otherwise.

              1.9   "Company  Stock".    Shares  common  of  stock  of the
                    Company,  its  predecessor(s),  or  its  successors or
                    assigns,  or  any  corporation with or into which said
                    c o rporation   may   be   merged,   consolidated   or
                    reorganized,  or to which a majority of its assets may
                    be sold.

              1.10  "Compensation".    The  sum of a Participant's Taxable
                    Income and salary reductions, if any, pursuant to Code
                    sections  125, 402(e)(3), 402(h), 403(b), 414(h)(2) or
                    457.

                    For  purposes of determining benefits under this Plan,
                    Compensation  is  limited  to $200,000 (as indexed for
                    t h e   cost  of  living  pursuant  to  Code  sections
                    401(a)(17) and 415(d)) per Plan Year.  For purposes of
                    determining  benefits  under  this Plan for Plan Years
                    beginning  after  December  31,  1993, Compensation is
                    limited to $150,000 (as indexed for the cost of living
                    pursuant  to  Code sections 401(a)(17) and 415(d)) per
                    Plan Year.  

                    For  purposes  of the preceding sentences, in the case
                    of  an  HCE  who  is  a 5% Owner or one of the 10 most
                    highly  compensated  Employees,  (i) such HCE and such
                    HCE's family group (as defined below) shall be treated
                    as  a  single  employee  and  the Compensation of each
                    family  group  member  shall  be  aggregated  with the
                    Compensation  of  such HCE, and (ii) the limitation on
                    Compensation shall be allocated among such HCE and his
                    or  her  family  group  members  in proportion to each
                    individual's  Compensation  before  the application of
                    this sentence.  For purposes of this Section, the term
                    "family  group"  shall  mean  an Employee's spouse and
                    lineal descendants who have not attained age 19 before
                    the close of the year in question.

                    For the purpose of determining HCEs and key employees,
                    Compensation  for  the entire Plan Year shall be used.
                    F o r    the  purpose  of  determining  ADP  and  ACP,
                    Compensation  shall  be  limited to amounts paid to an
                    Eligible Employee while a Participant.

              1.11  "Contribution".   An amount contributed to the Plan by
                    the Employer or an Eligible Employee, and allocated by
                    c o ntribution  type  to  Participants'  Accounts,  as
                    d e s cribed  in  Section  1.1.    Specific  types  of
                    contribution include:

                    (a)  "Pre-Tax Contribution".  An amount contributed by
                         the  Employer on an eligible Participant's behalf
                         in  conjunction with a Participant's Code section
                         401(k) salary deferral election.

                    (b)  "After-Tax  Contribution".  An amount contributed
                         by a Participant on an after-tax basis.












                                         2<PAGE>





                    (c)  "Rollover  Contribution".   An amount contributed
                         by  an  Eligible  Employee  which originated from
                         another employer's qualified plan.

                    (d)  "Matching  Contribution".   An amount contributed
                         by  the  Employer  on  an  eligible Participant's
                         behalf  based  upon the amount contributed by the
                         eligible Participant.

                    (e)  "Prior  Plan  Matching  Contribution".  An amount
                         previously  contributed  by  the  Employer  on an
                         e l igible   Participant's   behalf   which   was
                         transferred  to  this plan from another qualified
                         plan  of  a Related Company, which continue to be
                         accounted for in the Plan.

              1.12  "Contribution  Dollar Limit".  The annual limit placed
                    on  each  Participant's  Pre-Tax  Contributions, which
                    shall  be $7,000 per calendar year (as indexed for the
                    cost  of living pursuant to Code section 402(g)(5) and
                    4 1 5 ( d ) ).    For  purposes  of  this  Section,  a
                    Participant's  Pre-Tax Contributions shall include (i)
                    any  Employer  contribution  made  under any qualified
                    cash  or  deferred  arrangement  as  defined  in  Code
                    section  401(k)  to the extent not includible in gross
                    income   for  the  taxable  year  under  Code  section
                    402(e)(3)  or  402(h)(1)(B) (determined without regard
                    to   Code  section  402(g)),  and  (ii)  any  Employer
                    contribution  to  purchase  an  annuity contract under
                    Code section 403(b) under a salary reduction agreement
                    (within the meaning of Code section 3121(a)(5)(D)).

              1.13  "Direct  Rollover".    A  payment  from the Plan to an
                    Eligible Retirement Plan specified by a Distributee.

              1.14  "Disability".    A  Participant's total and permanent,
                    mental or physical disability resulting in termination
                    of  employment as evidenced by presentation of medical
                    evidence satisfactory to the Administrator.

              1.15  "Distributee".    An  Employee or former Employee, the
                    surviving spouse of an Employee or former Employee and
                    a  spouse  or  former  spouse of an Employee or former
                    Employee  determined  to be an alternate payee under a
                    QDRO.

              1.16  "Effective   Date".    July  1,  1990,  unless  stated
                    otherwise.  The date upon which the provisions of this
                    document become effective.  In general, the provisions
                    of  this  document  only apply to Participants who are
                    Employees  on  or  after the Effective Date.  However,
                    investment  and  distribution  provisions apply to all
                    Participants  with  Account balances to be invested or
                    distributed after the Effective Date.

              1.17  "Eligible  Employee".    An  Employee  of an Employer,
                    except any Employee:

                    (a)  whose  compensation  and conditions of employment
                         are  covered by a collective bargaining agreement
                         to  which  an  Employer  is  a  party  unless the
                         agreement  calls for the Employee's participation
                         in the Plan; 








                                         3<PAGE>





                    (b)  who  is  treated as an Employee because he or she
                         is a Leased Employee; or

                    (c)  who   is  a  nonresident  alien  who  (i)  either
                         receives  no earned income (within the meaning of
                         Code  section 911(d)(2)), from sources within the
                         United  States  under  Code section 861(a)(3); or
                         (ii)   receives  such  earned  income  from  such
                         sources  within the United States but such income
                         is  exempt from United States income tax under an
                         applicable income tax convention.

              1.18  "Eligible  Retirement Plan".  An individual retirement
                    a c c o unt  described  in  Code  section  408(a),  an
                    i n dividual  retirement  annuity  described  in  Code
                    section  408(b),  an  annuity  plan  described in Code
                    section 403(a), or a qualified trust described in Code
                    section  401(a), that accepts a Distributee's Eligible
                    Rollover  Distribution,  except that with regard to an
                    Eligible  Rollover Distribution to a surviving spouse,
                    a n    E ligible  Retirement  Plan  is  an  individual
                    retirement account or individual retirement annuity.

              1.19  "Eligible  Rollover Distribution".   A distribution of
                    all  or  any portion of the balance to the credit of a
                    Distributee, excluding a distribution that is one of a
                    series  of  substantially equal periodic payments (not
                    less  frequently  than annually) made for the life (or
                    life  expectancy)  of a Distributee or the joint lives
                    (or  joint life expectancies) of a Distributee and the
                    D i s tributee's  designated  Beneficiary,  or  for  a
                    specified  period of ten years or more; a distribution
                    to the extent such distribution is required under Code
                    section  401(a)(9);  and the portion of a distribution
                    that  is  not  includible  in gross income (determined
                    without  regard  to  the  exclusion for net unrealized
                    appreciation with respect to Employer securities).

              1.20  "Employee".  An individual who is: 

                    (a)  directly  employed by any Related Company and for
                         whom any income for such employment is subject to
                         withholding  of  income or social security taxes,
                         or 

                    (b)  a Leased Employee.

              1.21  "Employer".    The Company and any Subsidiary or other
                    Related  Company of either the Company or a Subsidiary
                    which  adopts  this  Plan  with  the  approval  of the
                    Company.

              1.22  "ERISA".   The Employee Retirement Income Security Act
                    of  1974,  as  amended.    Reference  to  any specific
                    s e c tion  shall  include  such  section,  any  valid
                    regulation  promulgated thereunder, and any comparable
                    p r o v ision  of  any  future  legislation  amending,
                    supplementing or superseding such section.













                                         4<PAGE>





              1.23  "Execution  Date".    The  date on which this Plan and
                    Trust document is executed.

              1.24  "HCE"  or  "Highly Compensated Employee".  An Employee
                    described  as a Highly Compensated Employee in Section
                    12.

              1.25  "Ineligible".  The Plan status of an individual during
                    the  period in which he or she is (1) an Employee of a
                    Related  Company which is not then an Employer, (2) an
                    Employee,  but not an Eligible Employee, or (3) not an
                    Employee.

              1.26  "Investment  Fund"  or  "Fund".  An investment fund as
                    described  in  Section  16.2.    The  Investment Funds
                    authorized  by  the  Administrator to be offered as of
                    the  Execution  Date to Participants and Beneficiaries
                    are as set forth in Appendix A.

              1.27  "Leased  Employee".  An individual who is deemed to be
                    an employee of any Related Company as provided in Code
                    section 414(n) or (o).

              1.28  "Leave   of  Absence".    A  period  during  which  an
                    individual  is deemed to be an Employee, but is absent
                    from active employment, provided that the absence:

                    (a)  was authorized by a Related Company; or

                    (b)  was  due to military service in the United States
                         armed forces and the individual returns to active
                         employment  within  the period during which he or
                         she retains employment rights under federal law.

              1.29  "NHCE"  or  "Non-Highly  Compensated  Employee".    An
                    E m p loyee  described  as  a  Non-Highly  Compensated
                    Employee in Section 12.

              1.30  "Normal Retirement Date".  The date of a Participant's
                    65th birthday.

              1.31  "Owner".    A person with an ownership interest in the
                    capital, profits, outstanding stock or voting power of
                    a  Related  Company within the meaning of Code section
                    318 or 416 (which exclude indirect ownership through a
                    qualified plan).

              1.32  "Participant".    An  Eligible  Employee who begins to
                    p a r t icipate  in  the  Plan  after  completing  the
                    eligibility  requirements as described in Section 2.1.
                    An Eligible Employee who makes a Rollover Contribution
                    prior  to  completing  the eligibility requirements as
                    described  in  Section  2.1 shall also be considered a
                    Participant  except for purposes of provisions related
                    to Contributions (other than a Rollover Contribution).
                    A  Participant's  participation continues until his or
                    her employment with all Related Companies ends and his
                    or her Account is distributed or forfeited.













                                         5<PAGE>





              1.33  "Pay".    All  cash  compensation  paid to an Eligible
                    Employee by an Employer while a Participant during the
                    current  period.  Pay excludes reimbursements or other
                    expense allowances, cash and non-cash fringe benefits,
                    moving  expenses,  deferred  compensation  and welfare
                    benefits.

                    Pay  is  neither increased nor decreased by any salary
                    credit  or  reduction pursuant to Code sections 125 or
                    402(e)(3).  Pay is limited to $200,000 (as indexed for
                    t h e   cost  of  living  pursuant  to  Code  sections
                    401(a)(17)  and 415(d)) per Plan Year.  Pay is limited
                    to  $150,000  (as  indexed  for  the  cost  of  living
                    pursuant  to  Code sections 401(a)(17) and 415(d)) per
                    Plan  Year  effective  for  Plan Years beginning after
                    December 31, 1993.

              1.34  "Period  of  Employment".  The period beginning on the
                    date an Employee first performs an hour of service and
                    ending  on  the  date  his  or  her  employment  ends.
                    Employment  ends  on  the  date  the  Employee  quits,
                    retires, is discharged, dies or (if earlier) the first
                    anniversary  of  his  or  her  absence  for  any other
                    reason.   The period of absence starting with the date
                    an  Employee's  employment temporarily ends and ending
                    on  the  date  he or she is subsequently reemployed is
                    (1) included in his or her Period of Employment if the
                    period  of  absence  does not exceed one year, and (2)
                    excluded if such period exceeds one year. 

                    An  Employee's  service with a predecessor or acquired
                    company  shall only be counted in the determination of
                    his or her Period of Employment for eligibility and/or
                    vesting  purposes  if  (1)  the  Company  directs that
                    credit for such service be granted, or (2) a qualified
                    plan   of  the  predecessor  or  acquired  company  is
                    subsequently  maintained  by  any  Employer or Related
                    Company.

              1.35  "Plan".    The Southdown, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan
                    set  forth  in  this  document,  as  from time to time
                    amended.

              1.36  "Plan Year".  The annual accounting period of the Plan
                    and Trust which ends on each December 31.

              1.37  " Q DRO".    A  domestic  relations  order  which  the
                    A d ministrator  has  determined  to  be  a  qualified
                    domestic  relations  order  within the meaning of Code
                    section 414(p).  

              1.38  "Related Company".  With respect to any Employer, that
                    Employer  and any corporation, trade or business which
                    is,  together with that Employer, a member of the same
                    controlled  group of corporations, a trade or business
                    under  common  control, or an affiliated service group
                    within the meaning of Code section 414(b), (c), (m) or
                    (o).

              1.39  " S e t tlement  Date".      The  date  on  which  the
                    transactions  from  the  most  recent  Trade  Date are
                    settled.  Effective April 1, 1992 for each Trade Date,
                    the Trustee's next business day.








                                         6<PAGE>





              1.40  "Spousal  Consent".    The  written consent given by a
                    spouse  to  a  Participant's   election or waiver of a
                    specified  form  of  benefit,  including a loan or in-
                    service  withdrawal,  or Beneficiary designation.  The
                    spouse's  consent  must  acknowledge the effect on the
                    spouse   of  the  Participant's  election,  waiver  or
                    d e s i gnation  and  be  duly  witnessed  by  a  Plan
                    representative  or  notary  public.    Spousal Consent
                    shall  be  valid  only  with respect to the spouse who
                    signs  the Spousal Consent and only for the particular
                    choice  made by the Participant which requires Spousal
                    Consent.    A  Participant may revoke (without Spousal
                    Consent)  a prior election, waiver or designation that
                    required  Spousal  Consent at any time before payments
                    begin.   Spousal Consent also means a determination by
                    the  Administrator that there is no spouse, the spouse
                    cannot  be located, or such other circumstances as may
                    be established by applicable law.

              1.41  "Subsidiary".    A company which is 50% or more owned,
                    directly or indirectly, by the Company.

              1.42  "Sweep  Account".    The  subsidiary  Account for each
                    P a r ticipant  through  which  all  transactions  are
                    processed,  which  is  invested  in  interest  bearing
                    deposits of the Trustee.

              1.43  "Sweep Date".  The cut off date and time for receiving
                    instructions  for  transactions to be processed on the
                    next Trade Date.

              1.44  "Taxable Income".  Compensation in the amount reported
                    by  the  Employer as "Wages, tips, other compensation"
                    on  Form  W-2,  or  any  successor method of reporting
                    under Code section 6041(d).

              1.45  "Trade  Date".    Each  day  the  Investment Funds are
                    valued,  which  is the last business day of the month.
                    Effective April 1, 1992, each day the Investment Funds
                    are  valued, which is normally every day the assets of
                    such Funds are traded.  

              1.46  "Trust".  The legal entity created by those provisions
                    of  this  document  which  relate to the Trustee.  The
                    Trust  is  part  of the Plan and holds the Plan assets
                    which  are comprised of the aggregate of Participants'
                    Accounts.

              1.47  "Trustee".  Wells Fargo Bank, National Association.






















                                         7<PAGE>





         2    ELIGIBILITY 

              2.1   Eligibility

                    Each  Eligible  Employee shall become a Participant on
                    the first January 1 or July 1 after the date he or she
                    completes  a  12  month  Period  of  Employment.   The
                    eligibility  period  begins  on the date an Employee's
                    Period of Employment commences.

                    Notwithstanding  the foregoing, each individual who is
                    an  Eligible  Employee  on July 1, 1990 shall become a
                    Participant on July 1, 1990 and each individual who is
                    an Eligible Employee on January 1, 1991 shall become a
                    Participant on January 1, 1991.

                    Effective August 15, 1991 each Eligible Employee shall
                    become  a Participant on October 1, 1991 or thereafter
                    on  the  first January 1, April 1, July 1 or October 1
                    after the date he or she completes a 3 month Period of
                    Employment.  The eligibility period begins on the date
                    an Employee's Period of Employment commences.

              2.2   Ineligible Employees

                    I f   an  Employee  completes  the  above  eligibility
                    r e q u i rements,  but  is  Ineligible  at  the  time
                    participation would otherwise begin (if he or she were
                    not  Ineligible), he or she shall become a Participant
                    on  the first subsequent date on which he or she is an
                    Eligible Employee.  

              2.3   Ineligible or Former Participants      

                    A    P articipant  may  not  make  or  share  in  Plan
                    Contributions,  nor  generally  be  eligible for a new
                    Plan  loan, during the period he or she is Ineligible,
                    but  he  or  she shall continue to participate for all
                    other  purposes.   An Ineligible Participant or former
                    Participant   shall  automatically  become  an  active
                    Participant  on  the  date  he or she again becomes an
                    Eligible Employee.





























                                         8<PAGE>





         3    PARTICIPANT CONTRIBUTIONS

              3.1   Pre-Tax Contribution Election

                    Upon  becoming a Participant, an Eligible Employee may
                    elect to reduce his or her Pay by an amount which does
                    not  exceed  the Contribution Dollar Limit, within the
                    limits described in the Contribution Percentage Limits
                    paragraph  of  this  Section  3,  and have such amount
                    contributed  to  the Plan by the Employer as a Pre-Tax
                    Contribution.    The election shall be made as a whole
                    percentage of Pay in such manner and with such advance
                    notice  as  prescribed  by  the  Administrator.  In no
                    event  shall an Employee's Pre-Tax Contributions under
                    t h e    P lan  and  all  other  plans,  contracts  or
                    arrangements  of  all  Related  Companies  exceed  the
                    Contribution  Dollar  Limit for the Employee's taxable
                    year beginning in the Plan Year.

              3.2   After-Tax Contribution Election

                    Upon  becoming a Participant, an Eligible Employee may
                    elect  to  make After-Tax Contributions to the Plan in
                    an  amount  which does not exceed the limits described
                    in  the  Contribution  Percentage  Limits paragraph of
                    this Section 3.  The election shall be made as a whole
                    percentage of Pay in such manner and with such advance
                    notice as prescribed by the Administrator.

              3.3   Changing a Contribution Election

                    A  Participant  who is an Eligible Employee may change
                    his  or  her  Pre-Tax  and/or  After-Tax  Contribution
                    election  as  of  any  January  1, April 1, July 1, or
                    October  1 in such manner and with such advance notice
                    as  prescribed  by  the  Administrator.    The changed
                    percentage  shall  become  effective  with  the  first
                    p a y r oll  paid  after  such  date.    Participants'
                    Contribution  election percentages shall automatically
                    apply to Pay increases or decreases.  

              3.4   Revoking and Resuming a Contribution Election

                    A  Participant  may  revoke  his  or  her Contribution
                    election  at  any  time  in  such manner and with such
                    advance notice as prescribed by the Administrator, and
                    such  election  shall  be  effective  with  the  first
                    payroll paid after such date.

                    A Participant may resume Contributions by making a new
                    Contribution  election  at  the  same  time in which a
                    Participant  may  change  his  or her election in such
                    manner  and  with such advance notice as prescribed by
                    t h e   Administrator,  and  such  election  shall  be
                    effective with the first payroll paid after such date.


              3.5   Contribution Percentage Limits

                    The  Administrator  may establish and change from time
                    to  time,  without the necessity of amending this Plan
                    and    Trust   document,   the   separate   minimum,if
                    a p p l icable,  and  maximum  Pre-Tax  and  After-Tax
                    Contribution  percentages,  and/or  a maximum combined
                    Pre-Tax   and   After-Tax   Contribution   percentage,
                    prospectively or retrospectively (for the current Plan
                    Year),   for  all  Participants.    In  addition,  the
                    Administrator   may  establish  any  lower  percentage
                    limits  for  Highly  Compensated Employees as it deems


                                         9<PAGE>





                    necessary.    As  of  the  Effective Date, the maximum
                    Contribution percentages are:

                                            Highly
                         Contribution     Compensated     All Other
                             Type          Employees    Participants

                            Pre-Tax           16%            16%
                           After-Tax          16%            16%
                          Sum of Both         16%            16%


                    Irrespective  of the limits that may be established by
                    the  Administrator  in accordance with this paragraph,
                    in  no  event  shall  the  contributions made by or on
                    behalf  of  a  Participant  for a Plan Year exceed the
                    maximum allowable under Code section 415.

              3.6   Refunds When Contribution Dollar Limit Exceeded

                    A  Participant  who  makes Pre-Tax Contributions for a
                    calendar  year to this and any other qualified defined
                    contribution plan in excess of the Contribution Dollar
                    Limit  may  notify the Administrator in writing by the

                    following  March  1 (or as late as April 14 if allowed
                    by the Administrator) that an excess has occurred.  In
                    this  event, the amount of the excess specified by the
                    Participant,  adjusted  for  investment  gain or loss,
                    shall  be refunded to him or her by April 15 and shall
                    not  be  included  as  an  Annual  Addition under Code
                    section  415  for the year contributed.  Refunds shall
                    not  include  investment  gain  or loss for the period
                    between  the  end  of the applicable Plan Year and the
                    date  of  distribution. However, for Plan Years ending
                    before   December  31,  1993,  refunds  shall  include
                    investment gain or loss for the period between the end
                    o f    the  applicable  Plan  Year  and  the  date  of
                    distribution.  Any Matching Contributions attributable

                    to  refunded excess Pre-Tax Contributions as described
                    in this Section shall be deemed a Contribution made by
                    reason  of  a  mistake  of  fact  and removed from the
                    Participant's Account.

              3.7   Timing, Posting and Tax Considerations

                    P a rticipants'  Contributions,  other  than  Rollover
                    Contributions,   may  only  be  made  through  payroll
                    deduction.   Such amounts shall be paid to the Trustee
                    in cash and posted to each Participant's Account(s) as
                    soon  as such amounts can reasonably be separated from
                    the Employer's general assets and balanced against the
                    specific  amount  made  on behalf of each Participant.

                    In  no  event,  however, shall such amounts be paid to
                    the  Trustee  more than 90 days after the date amounts
                    are  deducted  from  a  Participant's  Pay.    Pre-Tax
                    C o ntributions   shall   be   treated   as   employer
                    contributions in determining tax deductions under Code
                    section 404(a).










                                         10<PAGE>





         4    ROLLOVERS & TRUST-TO-TRUST TRANSFERS

              4.1   Rollovers

                    The  Administrator may authorize the Trustee to accept
                    a rollover contribution in cash, within the meaning of
                    Code section 402(c) or 408(d)(3)(A)(ii), directly from
                    an  Eligible Employee or effective January 1, 1993, as
                    a  Direct  Rollover  from  another  qualified  plan on
                    behalf  of the Eligible Employee, even if he or she is
                    not   yet  a  Participant.    The  Employee  shall  be
                    responsible  for  furnishing satisfactory evidence, in
                    such  manner  as prescribed by the Administrator, that
                    the  amount  is  eligible  for  rollover treatment.  A
                    r o llover  contribution  received  directly  from  an
                    Eligible  Employee must be paid to the Trustee in cash
                    within 60 days after the date received by the Eligible
                    Employee  from  a qualified plan or conduit individual
                    retirement  account.   Contributions described in this
                    paragraph shall be posted to the applicable Employee's
                    Rollover  Account  as  of  the  date  received  by the
                    Trustee.

                    If  it  is later determined that an amount contributed
                    pursuant  to  the  above  paragraph  did  not  in fact
                    qualify  as a rollover contribution under Code section
                    402(c)  or  408(d)(3)(A)(ii),  the balance credited to
                    the  Employee's  Rollover Account shall immediately be
                    (1) segregated from all other Plan assets, (2) treated
                    as  a  nonqualified  trust  established by and for the
                    benefit  of  the  Employee, and (3) distributed to the
                    Employee.    Any  such nonqualifying rollover shall be
                    deemed never to have been a part of the Plan.

              4.2   Transfers From Other Qualified Plans

                    The  Administrator may instruct the Trustee to receive
                    assets  in  cash  or  in  kind  directly  from another
                    qualified plan.  The Trustee may refuse the receipt of
                    any transfer if:

                    (a)  t h e    Trustee   finds   the   in-kind   assets
                         unacceptable;

                    (b)  instructions for posting amounts to Participants'
                         Accounts are incomplete;

                    (c)  any  amounts  are  not  exempted  by Code section
                         401(a)(11)(B)  from  the  annuity requirements of
                         Code section 417; or

                    (d)  any  amounts  include  benefits protected by Code
                         section  411(d)(6)  which  would not be preserved
                         under applicable Plan provisions.

                    Such  amounts  shall  be  posted  to  the  appropriate
                    Accounts  of  Participants  as of the date received by
                    the Trustee.













                                         11<PAGE>





         5    EMPLOYER CONTRIBUTIONS

              5.1   Matching Contributions
                    
                    (a)  Frequency  and  Eligibility.  For each period for
                         which  Participants'  Contributions are made, the
                         Employer  shall  make  Matching  Contributions as
                         described  in  the  following  Allocation  Method
                         paragraph  on  behalf  of  each  Participant  who
                         contributed during the period.

                    (b)  Allocation  Method.    The Matching Contributions
                         for  each  period  shall  total 50% of the sum of
                         each eligible Participant's Pre-Tax and After-Tax
                         Contributions  for  the  period, provided that no
                         Matching Contributions shall be made based upon a
                         Participant's  Contributions  in  excess of 6% of
                         his or her Pay.

                    (c)  Timing,  Medium  and Posting.  The Employer shall
                         make  each period's Matching Contribution in cash
                         as  soon  as  is feasible, and not later than the
                         Employer's  federal  tax  filing  date, including
                         extensions, for deducting such Contribution.  The
                         T r u s t ee  shall  post  such  amount  to  each
                         Participant's  Matching  Account  once  the total
                         Contribution  received  has been balanced against
                         the  specific  amount  to  be  credited  to  each
                         Participant's Matching Account.










































                                         12<PAGE>





         6    ACCOUNTING

              6.1   Individual Participant Accounting

                    The  Administrator shall maintain an individual set of
                    Accounts  for  each  Participant  in  order to reflect
                    t r a nsactions  both  by  type  of  Contribution  and
                    investment  medium.    Financial transactions shall be
                    accounted  for  at  the  individual  Account  level by
                    posting each transaction to the appropriate Account of
                    each affected Participant.  Participant Account values
                    shall be maintained in shares for the Investment Funds
                    and  in  dollars  for their Sweep and Participant loan
                    Accounts.    At  any  point in time, the Account value
                    shall  be  determined using the most recent Trade Date
                    values provided by the Trustee.

              6.2   Sweep Account is Transaction Account

                    All  transactions related to amounts being contributed
                    to  or  distributed  from the Trust shall be posted to
                    each affected Participant's Sweep Account.  Any amount
                    held  in  the  Sweep  Account  will  be  credited with
                    interest up until the date on which it is removed from
                    the Sweep Account.

              6.3   Trade Date Accounting and Investment Cycle

                    Participant  Account  values shall be determined as of
                    each  Trade Date.  For any transaction to be processed
                    a s   of  a  Trade  Date,  the  Trustee  must  receive
                    instructions  for  the  transaction by the Sweep Date.
                    Such  instructions  shall apply to amounts held in the
                    Account on that Sweep Date.  Financial transactions of
                    the  Investment Funds shall be posted to Participants'
                    Accounts  as  of  the Trade Date, based upon the Trade
                    Date  values  provided  by the Trustee, and settled on
                    the Settlement Date.

              6.4   Accounting for Investment Funds

                    I n v e stments  in  each  Investment  Fund  shall  be
                    maintained  in shares.  The Trustee is responsible for
                    determining  the  share values of each Investment Fund
                    as  of  each  Trade Date.  To the extent an Investment
                    Fund  is  comprised  of collective investment funds of
                    the  Trustee,  or any other fiduciary to the Plan, the
                    share  values  shall  be determined in accordance with
                    the  rules governing such collective investment funds,
                    which are incorporated herein by reference.  All other
                    share  values shall be determined by the Trustee.  The
                    share  value of each Investment Fund shall be based on
                    the fair market value of its underlying assets. 

              6.5   Payment of Fees and Expenses

                    Except to the extent Plan fees and expenses related to
                    Account  maintenance,  transaction and Investment Fund
                    management  and  maintenance,  as set forth below, are
                    paid  by  the  Employer  directly, or indirectly, such
                    fees  and  expenses  shall be paid as set forth below.
                    The  Employer  may pay a lower portion of the fees and
                    expenses allocable to the Accounts of Participants who
                    are no longer Employees.

                    (a)  Account  Maintenance:    Account maintenance fees
                         and expenses, may include but are not limited to,
                         administrative, Trustee, government annual report
                         p r eparation,  audit,  legal,  nondiscrimination
                         testing, and fees for any other special services.

                                         13<PAGE>





                         Account  maintenance  fees  shall  be  charged to
                         Participants  on a per Participant basis provided
                         that  no fee shall reduce a Participant's Account
                         balance below zero.  

                    (b)  Transaction:  Transaction  fees and expenses, may
                         i n clude  but  are  not  limited  to,  recurring
                         payment, Investment Fund election change and loan
                         fees.    Transaction fees shall be charged to the
                         Participant's Account involved in the transaction
                         provided that no fee shall reduce a Participant's
                         Account balance below zero.

                    (c)  I n vestment  Fund  Management  and  Maintenance:
                         Management  and  maintenance  fees  and  expenses
                         related  to the Investment Funds shall be charged
                         at the Investment Fund level and reflected in the
                         net gain or loss of each Fund.

                    As  of  the  Effective Date, a breakdown of which Plan
                    fees  and  expenses  shall  generally  be borne by the
                    T r u st  (and  charged  to  individual  Participants'
                    Accounts)   and  those  that  shall  be  paid  by  the
                    Employer,  directly  or  indirectly,  is  set forth in
                    Appendix  B  and  may  be  changed  from time to time,
                    without  the necessity of amending this Plan and Trust
                    Document.

                    The  Trustee  shall have the authority to pay any such
                    fees and expenses, which remain unpaid by the Employer
                    for 60 days, from the Trust. 

              6.6   Accounting for Participant Loans

                    Participant  loans shall be held in a separate Account
                    of  the Participant and accounted for in dollars as an
                    e a r marked  asset  of  the  borrowing  Participant's
                    Account.

              6.7   Error Correction

                    The  Administrator may correct any errors or omissions
                    in  the  administration  of  the Plan by restoring any
                    Participant's  Account  balance  with  the amount that
                    would  be  credited  to  the  Account  had no error or
                    omission  been  made.    Funds  necessary for any such
                    restoration  shall be provided through payment made by
                    the  Employer,  or  by  the  Trustee to the extent the
                    error  or  omission  is  attributable  to  actions  or
                    inactions of the Trustee.





















                                         14<PAGE>





              6.8   Participant Statements

                    The  Administrator  shall  provide  Participants  with
                    statements  of their Accounts as soon after the end of
                    each  quarter  of the Plan Year as is administratively
                    feasible.  

              6.9   Special Accounting During Conversion Period

                    The  Administrator  and Trustee may use any reasonable
                    accounting  methods  in  performing  their  respective
                    duties  during  the  period  of  converting  the prior
                    accounting  system of the Plan and Trust to conform to
                    the individual Participant accounting system described
                    in  this  Section.   This includes, but is not limited
                    to,  the method for allocating net investment gains or
                    losses  and the extent, if any, to which contributions
                    received  by  and  distributions  paid  from the Trust
                    during this period share in such allocation.  

              6.10  Accounts for QDRO Beneficiaries

                    A   separate  Account  shall  be  established  for  an
                    a l t ernate  payee  entitled  to  any  portion  of  a
                    Participant's  Account under a QDRO as of the date and
                    in  accordance  with  the  directions specified in the
                    QDRO.     In  addition,  a  separate  Account  may  be
                    established    during   the   period   of   time   the
                    Administrator,  a  court  of competent jurisdiction or
                    other  appropriate  person  is  determining  whether a
                    domestic  relations order qualifies as a QDRO.  Such a
                    separate  Account shall be valued and accounted for in
                    the same manner as any other Account.  

                    (a)  Distributions  Pursuant  to  QDROs.  If a QDRO so
                         provides,  the portion of a Participant's Account
                         payable to an alternate payee may be distributed,
                         in  a  form as permissible under the Distribution
                         Once  Employment  Ends  Section, to the alternate
                         p a yee  at  the  time  specified  in  the  QDRO,
                         regardless of whether the Participant is entitled
                         to a distribution from the Plan at such time.

                    (b)  Participant Loans.  Except to the extent required
                         by  law,  an  alternate  payee, on whose behalf a
                         separate  Account has been established, shall not
                         be  entitled  to  borrow  from such Account. If a
                         QDRO   specifies  that  the  alternate  payee  is
                         entitled  to  any  portion  of  the  Account of a
                         Participant  who has an outstanding loan balance,
                         all outstanding loans shall generally continue to
                         be  held  in  the Participant's Account and shall
                         not  be  divided  between  the  Participant's and
                         alternate payee's Accounts.

                    (c)  Investment  Direction.   Where a separate Account
                         has  been  established  on behalf of an alternate
                         payee  and  has  not  yet  been  distributed, the
                         alternate payee may direct the investment of such
                         Account in the same manner as if he or she were a
                         Participant.










                                         15<PAGE>





         7    INVESTMENT FUNDS AND ELECTIONS

              7.1   Investment Funds

                    Except  for Participants' Sweep and loan Accounts, the
                    Trust shall be maintained in various Investment Funds.
                    The  Administrator  shall  select the Investment Funds
                    offered  to  Participants and may change the number or
                    composition  of  the  Investment Funds, subject to the
                    terms  and  conditions agreed to with the Trustee.  As

                    of  the Execution Date, a list of the Investment Funds
                    offered  to  Participants  is set forth in Appendix A,
                    and  may  be  changed  from  time to time, without the
                    necessity of amending this Plan and Trust document.

              7.2   Investment Fund Elections 

                    Each Participant shall direct the investment of all of
                    his  or  her  Contribution  Accounts  except for these
                    Accounts:

                         Matching Account

                    which  shall  be  entirely  invested in the Investment
                    Fund  specified by the Administrator, which Investment

                    Fund as of the Execution Date is set forth in Appendix
                    A.   Effective June 30, 1992 and anytime thereafter, a
                    Participant who has attained age 59-1/2 may direct the
                    investment  of  the  balances  in  his or her Matching
                    Account.    Future  amounts  allocated  to  his or her
                    Matching Account will continue to be entirely invested
                    in the Investment Fund specified by the Administrator,
                    until otherwise directed by the Participant. 

                    A   Participant  shall  make  his  or  her  investment
                    election  in  any  combination of one or any number of
                    the  Investment  Funds  offered in accordance with the
                    p r ocedures  established  by  the  Administrator  and
                    Trustee.  However, during the period of converting the

                    prior  accounting  system  of  the  Plan  and Trust to
                    conform   to  the  individual  Participant  accounting
                    system  described  in  Section  6, Trust assets may be
                    held  in any investment vehicle permitted by the Plan,
                    as  directed  by  the  Administrator,  irrespective of
                    Participant investment elections. 

                    The  Administrator may set a maximum percentage of the
                    total  election that a Participant may direct into any
                    specific  Investment  Fund,  which maximum, if any, is
                    set  forth in Appendix A, and may be changed from time
                    to  time,  without the necessity of amending this Plan
                    and Trust document.


              7.3   Responsibility for Investment Choice

                    Each  Participant  shall be solely responsible for the
                    selection  of  his or her Investment Fund choices.  No
                    fiduciary  with  respect  to  the Plan is empowered to
                    advise  a Participant as to the manner in which his or
                    her  Accounts are to be invested, and the fact that an
                    Investment  Fund  is offered shall not be construed to
                    be a recommendation for investment.





                                         16<PAGE>





              7.4   Default if No Election

                    The Administrator shall specify an Investment Fund for
                    the  investment  of  that  portion  of a Participant's
                    Account  which  is  not yet held in an Investment Fund
                    and for which no valid investment election is on file.
                    The Investment Fund specified as of the Execution Date
                    is as set forth in Appendix A, and may be changed from
                    time  to  time, without the necessity of amending this
                    Plan and Trust document.

              7.5   Timing

                    A Participant shall make his or her initial investment
                    election  upon  becoming  a Participant and may change
                    his or her election at any time in accordance with the
                    p r ocedures  established  by  the  Administrator  and
                    Trustee.  Investment elections received by the Trustee
                    by  the  Sweep Date will be effective on the following
                    Trade Date.

              7.6   Investment Fund Election Change Fees

                    A reasonable processing fee may be charged directly to
                    a  Participant's  Account for Investment Fund election
                    changes  in  excess  of a specified number per year as
                    determined by the Administrator.












































                                         17<PAGE>





         8    VESTING

              8.1   Fully Vested Contribution Accounts

                    A Participant shall be fully vested in all Accounts at
                    all times.

































































                                         18<PAGE>





         9    PARTICIPANT LOANS

              9.1   Participant Loans Permitted

                    Loans  to  Participants  are permitted pursuant to the
                    terms and conditions set forth in this Section.

              9.2   Loan Application, Note and Security

                    A  Participant shall apply for any loan in such manner
                    and  with  such  advance  notice  as prescribed by the
                    Administrator.    All  loans  shall  be evidenced by a
                    promissory  note,  secured  only by the portion of the
                    Participant's Account from which the loan is made, and
                    the  Plan  shall have a lien on this portion of his or
                    her Account.

              9.3   Spousal Consent

                    A  Participant  is  not  required  to  obtain  Spousal
                    Consent in order to take out a loan under the Plan.

              9.4   Loan Approval

                    T h e  Administrator,  or  the  Trustee  if  otherwise
                    authorized  by  the Administrator and expressly agreed
                    to by the Trustee, is responsible for determining that
                    an loan request conforms to the requirements described
                    in this Section and granting such request.

              9.5   Loan Funding Limits

                    The  loan amount must meet all of the following limits
                    as  determined  as  of  the  Sweep  Date  the  loan is
                    processed:

                    (a)  Plan  Minimum  Limit.  The minimum amount for any
                         loan is $1,000.

                    (b)  Plan  Maximum  Limit.  Subject to the legal limit
                         described in (c) below, the maximum a Participant
                         may  borrow, including the outstanding balance of
                         existing  Plan  loans,  is  100% of the following
                         Accounts which are fully vested:

                              Pre-Tax Account
                              Rollover Account
                              After-Tax Account

                    (c)  Legal  Maximum  Limit.  The maximum a Participant
                         may  borrow, including the outstanding balance of
                         existing  Plan loans, is 50% of his or her vested
                         Account balance, not to exceed $50,000.  However,
                         the   $50,000   maximum   is   reduced   by   the
                         Participant's  highest  outstanding  loan balance
                         during  the  12  month  period  ending on the day
                         before  the  Sweep  Date  as of which the loan is
                         made.    For  purposes  of  this  paragraph,  the
                         qualified plans of all Related Companies shall be
                         treated  as  though they are part of this Plan to
                         the  extent  it  would  decrease the maximum loan
                         amount.









                                         19<PAGE>





              9.6   Maximum Number of Loans

                    A  Participant  may  have only one loan outstanding at
                    any given time.

              9.7   Source and Timing of Loan Funding

                    A  loan to a Participant shall be made solely from the
                    assets  of  his  or  her  own Accounts.  The available
                    assets  shall  be determined first by Account type and
                    then  by  investment type within each type of Account.
                    The  hierarchy  for  loan  funding  by type of Account
                    shall  be  the  order  listed  in  the  preceding Plan
                    Maximum Limit paragraph.  Within each Account used for
                    funding  a loan, amounts shall first be taken from the
                    Sweep  Account and then taken by type of investment in
                    d i r ect  proportion  to  the  market  value  of  the
                    Participant's  interest  in each Investment Fund as of
                    the Trade Date on which the loan is processed.

                    Loans  will be funded on the Settlement Date following
                    the Trade Date as of which the loan is processed.  The
                    Trustee  shall make payment to the Participant as soon
                    thereafter as administratively feasible.

              9.8   Interest Rate

                    The  interest  rate charged on Participant loans shall
                    be  a  fixed  reasonable  rate of interest, determined
                    from time to time by the Administrator, which provides
                    t h e   Plan  with  a  return  commensurate  with  the
                    prevailing  interest  rate  charged  by persons in the
                    business  of  lending  money  for loans which would be
                    made under similar circumstances.  As of the Effective
                    Date,  the interest rate is determined as set forth in
                    Appendix  C,  and  may  be  changed from time to time,
                    without  the necessity of amending this Plan and Trust
                    document.

              9.9   Repayment

                    Substantially  level amortization shall be required of
                    each   loan  with  payments  made  at  least  monthly,
                    generally  through  payroll  deduction.   Loans may be
                    prepaid  in  full  or  in  part  at  any  time.    The
                    Participant  may choose the loan repayment period, not
                    to exceed five years.

              9.10  Repayment Hierarchy

                    Loan  principal  repayments  shall  be credited to the
                    Participant's  Accounts  in  the  inverse of the order
                    used  to  fund  the  loan.    Loan  interest  shall be
                    credited  to  the  Participant's  Accounts  in  direct
                    proportion  to  the  principal payment.  Loan payments
                    are   credited  by  investment  type  based  upon  the
                    Participant's  current  investment  election  for  new
                    Contributions.













                                         20<PAGE>





              9.11  Repayment Suspension

                    The  Administrator  may  agree to a suspension of loan
                    payments  for up to 12 months for a Participant who is
                    on  a  Leave of Absence.  During the suspension period
                    interest  shall  continue to accrue on the outstanding
                    loan  balance.    At  the expiration of the suspension
                    period  all  outstanding  loan  payments  and  accrued
                    interest  thereon shall be due unless otherwise agreed
                    upon by the Administrator.

              9.12  Loan Default

                    A  loan  is  treated  as  a  default if scheduled loan
                    payments  are  more than 90 days late.   A Participant
                    shall  then  have  30  days  from  the  time he or she
                    receives  written  notice  of the default and a demand
                    for  past  due  amounts  to cure the default before it
                    becomes final.

                    In  the event of default, the Administrator may direct
                    the  Trustee  to  report  the  default  as  a  taxable
                    distribution.    As  soon  as  a  Plan  withdrawal  or
                    distribution  to  such  Participant would otherwise be
                    permitted,  the Administrator may instruct the Trustee
                    t o    execute  upon  its  security  interest  in  the
                    Participant's  Account by distributing the note to the
                    Participant.

              9.13  Call Feature

                    The  Administrator  shall  have  the right to call any
                    Participant  loan once a Participant's employment with
                    all Related Companies has terminated or if the Plan is
                    terminated.




































                                         21<PAGE>





         10   IN-SERVICE WITHDRAWALS

              10.1  In-Service Withdrawals Permitted

                    In-service  withdrawals  to  a  Participant  who is an
                    Employee  are  permitted  pursuant  to  the  terms and
                    conditions  set  forth in this Section and as required
                    by law as set forth in Section 11.6.

              10.2  In-Service Withdrawal Application and Notice

                    A    P a rticipant  shall  apply  for  any  in-service
                    withdrawal in such manner and with such advance notice
                    as prescribed by the Administrator.  Effective for in-
                    service  withdrawals  applied  for  after December 31,
                    1992,  the  Participant  shall  be provided the notice
                    prescribed by Code section 402(f).

                    If  an  in-service  withdrawal  is  one  to which Code
                    sections  401(a)(11)  and  417  do not apply, such in-
                    service  withdrawal  may  commence  less  than 30 days
                    after the aforementioned notice is provided, if:

                    (a)  the  Participant  is  clearly informed that he or
                         she has the right to a period of at least 30 days
                         after  receipt  of such notice to consider his or
                         her  option  to  elect  or  not  elect  a  Direct
                         Rollover  for  the portion, if any, of his or her
                         in-service  withdrawal  which  will constitute an
                         Eligible Rollover Distribution; and 

                    (b)  the  Participant  after  receiving  such  notice,
                         affirmatively  elects  a  Direct Rollover for the
                         portion,   if  any,  of  his  or  her  in-service
                         withdrawal  which  will  constitute  an  Eligible
                         Rollover  Distribution or alternatively elects to
                         have such portion made payable directly to him or
                         her, thereby not electing a Direct Rollover. 

              10.3  Spousal Consent

                    A  Participant  is  not  required  to  obtain  Spousal
                    Consent  in  order  to  make  an in-service withdrawal
                    under the Plan.

              10.4  In-Service Withdrawal Approval

                    T h e  Administrator,  or  the  Trustee  if  otherwise
                    authorized  by  the Administrator and expressly agreed
                    to by the Trustee, is responsible for determining that
                    an  in-service  withdrawal  request  conforms  to  the
                    requirements  described  in  this Section and granting
                    such request.

              10.5  Minimum Amount, Payment Form and Medium

                    There is no minimum amount for any type of withdrawal.














                                         22<PAGE>





                    For  withdrawals  made  after  December 31, 1992, with
                    regard  to the portion of a withdrawal representing an
                    Eligible  Rollover  Distribution,  a  Participant  may
                    elect  a  Direct Rollover.  The form of payment for an
                    in-service  withdrawal  shall be a single lump sum and
                    payment shall be made in cash.

              10.6  Source and Timing of In-Service Withdrawal Funding

                    An  in-service  withdrawal  to  a Participant shall be
                    made solely from the assets of his or her own Accounts
                    and  will  be  based  on  the Account values as of the
                    Trade    Date  the in-service withdrawal is processed.
                    The  available  assets  shall  be  determined first by
                    Account  type  and then by investment type within each
                    type of Account.  Within each Account used for funding
                    an in-service withdrawal, amounts shall first be taken
                    from  the  Sweep  Account  and  then  taken by type of
                    investment in direct proportion to the market value of
                    the  Participant's  interest  in  each Investment Fund
                    (which  excludes  Participant  loans)  as of the Trade
                    Date on which the in-service withdrawal is processed.

                    I n - S ervice  withdrawals  will  be  funded  on  the
                    Settlement  Date  following the Trade Date as of which
                    the  in-service  withdrawal is processed.  The Trustee
                    s h all   make   payment   as   soon   thereafter   as
                    administratively feasible.

              10.7  Hardship Withdrawals

                    (a)  Requirements.    A Participant who is an Employee
                         may  request  the  withdrawal of up to the amount
                         necessary  to  satisfy a financial need including
                         amounts  necessary  to  pay any federal, state or
                         l o cal  income  taxes  or  penalties  reasonably
                         anticipated  to result from the withdrawal.  Only
                         requests  for  withdrawals  (1)  on  account of a
                         Participant's    "Deemed   Financial   Need"   or
                         "Demonstrated  Financial Need", and (2) which are
                         " D emonstrated  as  Necessary"  to  satisfy  the
                         financial need will be approved.

                    (b)  "Deemed  Financial  Need".  Financial commitments
                         relating to:

                         (1)  t h e   payment  of  unreimbursable  medical
                              expenses described under Code section 213(d)
                              i n c urred  (or  to  be  incurred)  by  the
                              Employee, his or her spouse or dependents;

                         (2)  the  purchase  (excluding mortgage payments)
                              of the Employee's principal residence;

                         (3)  the  payment  of  unreimbursable tuition and
                              related  educational fees for up to the next
                              12  months  of  post-secondary education for
                              t h e    Employee,  his  or  her  spouse  or
                              dependents;

                         (4)  the   payment  of  funeral  expenses  of  an
                              Employee's family member;









                                         23<PAGE>





                         (5)  the  payment  of  amounts  necessary for the
                              Employee   to  prevent  losing  his  or  her
                              principal   residence  through  eviction  or
                              foreclosure on the mortgage; or

                         (6)  any    other    circumstance    specifically
                              p e r m i t t ed    under    Code    section
                              401(k)(2)(B)(i)(IV).

                    (c)  "Demonstrated  Financial  Need".  A determination
                         by  the  Administrator  that  a  severe financial
                         hardship to the Participant has resulted from:

                         (1)  a  sudden and unexpected illness or accident
                              to  the  Employee  or  his  or her spouse or
                              dependents;

                         (2)  the loss, due to casualty, of the Employee's
                              property  other  than  nonessential property
                              (such as a boat or a television); or

                         (3)  some   other   similar   extraordinary   and
                              unforeseeable  circumstances  arising  as  a
                              result  of  events beyond the control of the
                              Employee.

                    (d)  "Demonstrated  as  Necessary".    A withdrawal is
                         " d emonstrated  as  necessary"  to  satisfy  the
                         financial need only if the withdrawal amount does
                         not  exceed  the  financial  need,  the  Employee
                         represents  that  he  or she is unable to relieve
                         the   financial  need  (without  causing  further
                         hardship)  by  doing  any or all of the following
                         and   the  Administrator  does  not  have  actual
                         knowledge to the contrary:

                         (1)  receiving  any reimbursement or compensation
                              from insurance  or otherwise;

                         (2)  reasonably liquidating his or her assets and
                              the  assets  of  his  or her spouse or minor
                              children  that  are  reasonably available to
                              the Employee;

                         (3)  ceasing  all  of his or her contributions to
                              all  qualified  and  nonqualified  plans  of
                              deferred  compensation  and all stock option
                              o r   stock  purchase  plans  maintained  by
                              Related Companies;

                         (4)  obtaining all other possible withdrawals and
                              nontaxable  loans  available  from all plans
                              maintained by Related Companies; and

                         (5)  obtaining all possible loans from commercial
                              sources on reasonable commercial terms.















                                         24<PAGE>






                    (e)  Account  Sources  for  Withdrawal.  All available
                         a m o u n ts  must  first  be  withdrawn  from  a
                         Participant's  After-Tax  Account.  The remaining
                         withdrawal   amount  shall  come  only  from  the
                         Participant's   fully  vested  Accounts,  in  the
                         following priority order:

                              Rollover Account
                              Prior Plan Matching Account
                              Pre-Tax Account

                         T h e   amount  that  may  be  withdrawn  from  a

                         Participant's  Pre-Tax  Account shall not include
                         any  earnings  credited  to  his  or  her Pre-Tax
                         Contribution Account after the start of the first
                         Plan Year beginning after December 31, 1988.

                    (f)  Permitted  Frequency.  There is no restriction on
                         the number of Hardship withdrawals permitted to a
                         Participant.

                    (g)  Suspension  from  Further  Contributions.    Upon
                         making  a  Hardship  withdrawal a Participant may
                         not make additional Contributions for a period of
                         twelve   months  from  the  date  the  withdrawal
                         payment is made.

              10.8  After-Tax Account Withdrawals 


                    (a)  Requirements.    A Participant who is an Employee
                         may withdraw up to the entire balance from his or
                         her After-Tax Account.

                    (b)  Permitted  Frequency.    The  maximum  number  of
                         After-Tax  Account  withdrawals  permitted  to  a
                         Participant in any 12-month period is one.

                    (c)  Suspension  from  Further  Contributions.    Upon
                         m a k ing  an  After-Tax  Account  withdrawal,  a
                         Participant may not make additional Contributions
                         for  a  period  of three months from the date the
                         withdrawal payment is made.

              10.9  Over Age 59-1/2 Withdrawals

                    (a)  Requirements.    A Participant who is an Employee

                         and   over  age  59-1/2  may  withdraw  from  the
                         Accounts listed in paragraph (b) below.

                    (b)  Account  Sources  for Withdrawal.  The withdrawal
                         amount  shall  come  only  from the Participant's
                         fully  vested Accounts, in the following priority
                         order with the exception that the Participant may
                         instead  choose to have amounts taken from his or
                         her After-Tax Account first:

                              Pre-Tax Account
                              Rollover Account
                              Matching Account
                              Prior Plan Matching Account
                              After-Tax Account            







                                         25<PAGE>





                         Effective December 1, 1990, The withdrawal amount
                         shall  come  only  from  the  Participant's fully
                         vested  Accounts, in the following priority order
                         with  the  exception  that  the  Participant  may
                         instead  choose to have amounts taken from his or
                         her After-Tax Account first:

                              Rollover Account
                              Pre-Tax Account
                              Matching Account
                              Prior Plan Matching Account
                              After-Tax Account

                    (c)  Permitted  Frequency.  The maximum number of Over
                         Age 59-1/2 withdrawals permitted to a Participant
                         in any 12-month period is one.

                    (d)  Suspension  from  Further Contributions.  An Over
                         A g e   59-1/2  withdrawal  shall  not  affect  a
                         Participant's  ability  to make or be eligible to
                         receive further Contributions.


















































                                         26<PAGE>





         11   DISTRIBUTIONS ONCE EMPLOYMENT ENDS OR AS REQUIRED BY LAW 

              11.1  Benefit Information, Notices and Election

                    A  Participant,  or his or her Beneficiary in the case
                    o f    his  or  her  death,  shall  be  provided  with
                    information  regarding all optional times and forms of
                    d i s tribution  available,  to  include  the  notices
                    prescribed  by  Code section 402(f), effective January
                    1,  1993, and Code section 411(a)(11).  Subject to the
                    other  requirements of this Section, a Participant, or
                    his  or  her  Beneficiary  in  the  case of his or her
                    death, may elect, in such manner and with such advance
                    notice as prescribed by the Administrator, to have his
                    or  her  vested  Account  balance  paid  to him or her
                    beginning  upon  any  Settlement  Date  following  the
                    Participant's   termination  of  employment  with  all
                    Related  Companies or if earlier, at the time required
                    by law as set forth in Section 11.6. 

                    If  a  distribution  is  one  to  which  Code sections
                    401(a)(11) and 417 do not apply, such distribution may
                    commence  less  than  30 days after the aforementioned
                    notices are provided, if:

                    (a)  the  Participant  is  clearly informed that he or
                         she has the right to a period of at least 30 days
                         after  receipt  of  such  notices to consider the
                         decision  as  to  whether to elect a distribution
                         a n d  if  so  to  elect  a  particular  form  of
                         distribution  and  to elect or not elect a Direct
                         Rollover  for all or a portion, if any, of his or
                         h e r   distribution  which  will  constitute  an
                         Eligible Rollover Distribution; and 

                    (b)  the  Participant  after  receiving  such  notice,
                         affirmatively  elects a distribution and a Direct
                         Rollover  for all or a portion, if any, of his or
                         h e r   distribution  which  will  constitute  an
                         Eligible  Rollover  Distribution or alternatively
                         elects  to  have  all  or  a portion made payable
                         directly  to  him  or her, thereby not electing a
                         Direct Rollover for all or a portion thereof.
           
              11.2  Spousal Consent

                    A  Participant  is  not  required  to  obtain  Spousal
                    Consent  in  order to receive a distribution under the
                    Plan.

              11.3  Payment Form and Medium

                    A  Participant  shall  be paid in the form of a single
                    lump  sum.    Notwithstanding, a Participant who is an
                    Employee  at  the time he or she is required by law to
                    commence  distribution,  or  anytime  thereafter,  may
                    instead  elect  to  be  paid annually in a lump sum an
                    a m o unt  sufficient  to  comply  with  Code  section
                    401(a)(9).












                                         27<PAGE>





                    D i stributions  shall  generally  be  made  in  cash.
                    Alternatively,  a  lump  sum  payment may be made in a
                    combination  of cash and whole shares of Company Stock
                    (to  the  extent  invested in the Company Stock Fund).
                    For  distributions  made after December 31, 1992, with
                    regard  to  the portion of a distribution representing
                    an  Eligible  Rollover Distribution, a Distributee may
                    elect  a  Direct Rollover for all or a portion of such
                    amount.

              11.4  Small Amounts Paid Immediately 

                    If,  at  the  time a Participant's employment with all
                    Related   Companies  ends,  the  Participant's  vested
                    Account  balance  is $3,500 or less, the Participant's
                    benefit  shall be paid as a single lump sum as soon as
                    administratively  feasible after his or her employment
                    with  all  Related  Companies  ends in accordance with
                    procedures prescribed by the Administrator.

              11.5  Source and Timing of Distribution Funding

                    A  distribution  to a Participant shall be made solely
                    from the assets of his or her own Accounts and will be
                    based  on  the Account values as of the Trade Date the
                    distribution is processed.  The available assets shall
                    be  determined  first  by  Account  type  and  then by
                    investment  type  within each type of Account.  Within
                    each  Account used for funding a distribution, amounts
                    shall  first  be taken from the Sweep Account and then
                    taken  by  type  of investment in direct proportion to
                    the market value of the Participant's interest in each
                    Investment  Fund  as  of  the  Trade Date on which the
                    distribution is processed.

                    Distributions  will  be  funded on the Settlement Date
                    following  the Trade Date as of which the distribution
                    is  processed.  The Trustee shall make payment as soon
                    thereafter as administratively feasible.

              11.6  Latest Commencement Permitted

                    In  addition to any other Plan requirements and unless
                    a  Participant  elects  otherwise,  his or her benefit
                    payments  will  begin not later than 60 days after the
                    end of the Plan Year in which he or she attains his or
                    her  Normal  Retirement  Date or retires, whichever is
                    later.    However, if the amount of the payment or the
                    location   of  the  Participant  (after  a  reasonable
                    search)   cannot  be  ascertained  by  that  deadline,
                    payment  shall be made no later than 60 days after the
                    earliest  date  on  which  such  amount or location is
                    ascertained  but  in  no event later than as described
                    below.

                    Unless  the  Participant  is  subject  to an exception
                    below,  benefit  payments  shall  begin by the April 1
                    immediately  following the end of the calendar year in
                    which  the  Participant attains age 70-1/2 (whether or
                    not he or she is an Employee).  The exceptions to this
                    rule include the following:










                                         28<PAGE>





                    (a)  Birth  before  July 1, 1917.  Distribution for an
                         Employee  who  was  born before July 1, 1917 does
                         not  need  to  begin  until his or her employment
                         with all Related Companies ends; and

                    (b)  TEFRA Transitional Rule.  Where a Participant had
                         1)  accrued  a benefit under the Plan before July
                         1 ,    1 984,  and  2)  designated  a  method  of
                         distribution  which  would  not have disqualified
                         the  trust  under  Code  section  401(a)(9) as in
                         e f f ect  prior  to  amendment  by  the  Deficit
                         Reduction  Act  of  1984, and 3) such designation
                         was  in  writing signed by the Participant before
                         January 1, 1984, distribution to such Participant
                         (or  his  Beneficiary)  need  not  begin prior to
                         termination  of  his  or  her employment with all
                         Related Companies.

              11.7  Payment Within Life Expectancy

                    The  Participant's payment election must be consistent
                    with  the  requirement  of Code section 401(a)(9) that
                    all  payments  are to be completed within a period not
                    to  exceed  the  lives  or the joint and last survivor
                    life  expectancy  of  the  Participant  and his or her
                    Beneficiary.    The life expectancies of a Participant
                    and his or her Beneficiary, if such Beneficiary is his
                    or her spouse, may be recomputed annually. 

              11.8  Incidental Benefit Rule

                    The  Participant's payment election must be consistent
                    with the requirement that, if the Participant's spouse
                    is  not  his  or  her  sole  primary  Beneficiary, the
                    minimum  annual  distribution  for each calendar year,
                    beginning with the year in which he or she attains age
                    70-1/2  (or  such  later date as provided otherwise in
                    Section  11),  shall  not  be  less  than the quotient
                    obtained  by  dividing  (a)  the  Participant's vested
                    Account  balance  as  of  the  last  Trade Date of the
                    preceding  year  by  (b)  the  applicable  divisor  as
                    determined  under  the incidental benefit requirements
                    of Code section 401(a)(9).

              11.9  Payment to Beneficiary

                    Payment  to a Beneficiary must be completed by the end
                    o f    the  calendar  year  that  contains  the  fifth
                    anniversary of the Participant's death, except that:

                    (a)  If   the  Participant  dies  after  the  April  1
                         immediately  following  the  end  of the calendar
                         year  in  which  he  or  she  attains age 70-1/2,
                         payment to his or her Beneficiary must be made at
                         least as rapidly as provided in the Participant's
                         distribution election;

                    (b)  If  the  surviving  spouse  is  the  Beneficiary,
                         payments  need  not  begin  until  the end of the
                         calendar year in which the Participant would have
                         attained  age 70-1/2 and must be completed within
                         the spouse's life or life expectancy; and









                                         29<PAGE>





                    (c)  If  the  Participant and the surviving spouse who
                         is  the  Beneficiary  die  (1) before the April 1
                         immediately  following  the  end  of the calendar
                         year in which the Participant would have attained
                         age  70-1/2 and (2) before payments have begun to
                         the  spouse,  the  spouse  will be treated as the
                         Participant in applying these rules.

              11.10      Beneficiary Designation 

                    Each    Participant   may   complete   a   beneficiary
                    designation  form indicating the Beneficiary who is to
                    receive  the  Participant's remaining Plan interest at
                    the  time of his or her death.  The designation may be
                    changed  at any time.  However, a Participant's spouse
                    shall  be  the  sole  primary  Beneficiary  unless the
                    designation   includes  Spousal  Consent  for  another
                    Beneficiary.  If no proper designation is in effect at
                    t h e   time  of  a  Participant's  death  or  if  the
                    Beneficiary  does  not  survive  the  Participant, the
                    Beneficiary shall be, in the order listed, the:

                    (a)  Participant's surviving spouse,

                    (b)  Participant's  children,  in  equal  shares,  per
                         stirpes (by right of representation), or 

                    (c)  Participant's estate.











































                                         30<PAGE>





         12   ADP AND ACP TESTS

              12.1  Contribution Limitation Definitions

                    The  following  definitions  are  applicable  to  this
                    Section  12  (where  a definition is contained in both
                    Sections  1  and  12,  for  purposes of Section 12 the
                    Section 12 definition shall be controlling):

                    (a)  "ACP"  or "Average Contribution Percentage".  The
                         Average Percentage calculated using Contributions
                         allocated to Participants as of a date within the
                         Plan Year.

                    (b)  "ACP Test".  The determination of whether the ACP
                         is  in  compliance  with the Basic or Alternative
                         Limitation for a Plan Year (as defined in Section
                         12.2).

                    (c)  "ADP"  or  "Average  Deferral  Percentage".   The
                         Average  Percentage  calculated  using  Deferrals
                         allocated to Participants as of a date within the
                         Plan Year.

                    (d)  "ADP Test".  The determination of whether the ADP
                         is  in  compliance  with the Basic or Alternative
                         Limitation for a Plan Year (as defined in Section
                         12.2).

                    (e)  " A verage  Percentage".    The  average  of  the
                         calculated  percentages  for  Participants within
                         the  specified  group.  The calculated percentage
                         r e f e rs   to   either   the   "Deferrals"   or
                         "Contributions" (as defined in this Section) made
                         on  each  Participant's behalf for the Plan Year,
                         divided  by  his  or  her  Compensation  for  the
                         portion  of  the Plan Year in which he or she was
                         an  Eligible Employee while a Participant.  (Pre-
                         Tax  Contributions  which will be refunded solely
                         because they exceed the Contribution Dollar Limit
                         are  included in the percentage for the HCE Group
                         but not for the NHCE Group if such excess Pre-Tax
                         Contributions  were  made  to  plans  of  Related
                         Companies.)

                    (f)  "Contributions" shall include Matching and After-
                         Tax  Contributions.    In addition, Contributions
                         may  include  Pre-Tax  Contributions, but only to
                         the  extent  that  (1) the Employer elects to use
                         them, (2) they are not used or counted in the ADP
                         Test,  and (3) they are necessary to meet the ACP
                         Test  Alternative  Limitation (defined in Section
                         12.2 (b)) or the Multiple Use Test.

                    (g)  "Deferrals"  shall include Pre-Tax Contributions.
                         In   addition,  Deferrals  may  include  Matching
                         Contributions,  but  only  to the extent that (1)
                         the Employer elects to use them, (2) they are not
                         used  or  counted  in  the ACP Test, and (3) such
                         Contributions  are fully vested when made and not
                         withdrawable  by  an  Employee  before  he or she
                         attains age 59-1/2.









                                         31<PAGE>





                    (h)  "Family Member".  An Employee who is, at any time
                         during  the Plan Year or Lookback Year, a spouse,
                         lineal  ascendant  or  descendant, or spouse of a
                         lineal  ascendant  or descendant of (1) an active
                         or  former  Employee  who at any time during Plan
                         Year  or  Lookback  Year  is a more than 5% Owner
                         (within  the  meaning of Code section 414(q)(3)),
                         or  (2) an HCE who is among the 10 Employees with
                         the highest Compensation for such Year.
          
                    (i)  "HCE"  or  "Highly  Compensated  Employee".  With
                         r e s pect  to  each  Employer  and  its  Related
                         Companies,  an  Employee  during the Plan Year or
                         Lookback   Year  who  (in  accordance  with  Code
                         section 414(q)):

                         (1)  Was  a more than 5% Owner at any time during
                              the Lookback Year or Plan Year;

                         (2)  Received  Compensation  during  the Lookback
                              Year  (or  in the Plan Year if among the 100
                              Employees  with the highest Compensation for
                              such  Year)  in  excess  of  (i) $75,000 (as
                              adjusted  for  such  Year  pursuant  to Code
                              sections  414(q)(1)  and  415(d)),  or  (ii)
                              $50,000  (as adjusted for such Year pursuant
                              to  Code  sections  414(q)(1) and 415(d)) in
                              the case of a member of the "top-paid group"
                              ( w i t hin  the  meaning  of  Code  section
                              414(q)(4))   for   such   Year),   provided,
                              however,  that  if  the  conditions  of Code
                              s e ction  414(q)(12)(B)(ii)  are  met,  the
                              Company may elect for any Plan Year to apply
                              clause   (i)  by  substituting  $50,000  for
                              $75,000 and not to apply clause (ii);

                         (3)  Was  an  officer  of  a  Related Company and
                              received  Compensation  during  the Lookback
                              Year  (or  in the Plan Year if among the 100
                              Employees  with the highest Compensation for
                              such  Year)  that is greater than 50% of the
                              dollar   limitation  in  effect  under  Code
                              section  415(b)(1)(A)  and (d) for such Year
                              (or if no officer has Compensation in excess
                              of  the  threshold,  the  officer  with  the
                              highest  Compensation),  provided  that  the
                              number  of  officers  shall be limited to 50
                              Employees (or, if less, the greater of three
                              Employees or 10% of the Employees); or

                         (4)  Was  a  Family Member at any time during the
                              Lookback  Year  or  Plan Year, in which case
                              the  Contributions  and  Compensation of the
                              HCE  and  his or her Family Members shall be
                              aggregated  and  they  shall be treated as a
                              single HCE.

                         A  former  Employee shall be treated as an HCE if
                         (1)  such  former  Employee  was  an  HCE when he
                         separated   from  service,  or  (2)  such  former
                         Employee  was an HCE in service at any time after
                         attaining age 55.









                                         32<PAGE>





                         The determination of who is an HCE, including the
                         determinations  of  the  number  and  identity of
                         Employees  in  the  top-paid  group,  the top 100
                         Employees  and the number of Employees treated as
                         officers  shall  be  made in accordance with Code
                         section 414(q).

                    (j)  "HCE  Group"  and  "NHCE Group".  With respect to
                         each  Employer  and  its  Related  Companies, the
                         respective  group  of  HCEs  and  NHCEs  who  are
                         eligible  to  have  amounts  contributed on their
                         behalf for the Plan Year, including Employees who
                         would  be  eligible but for their election not to
                         participate  or  to  contribute, or because their
                         Pay  is  greater  than zero but does not exceed a
                         stated minimum.

                         (1)  If  the  Related  Companies  maintain two or
                              more  plans  which are subject to the ADP or
                              ACP  Test and are considered as one plan for
                              purposes   of  Code  sections  401(a)(4)  or
                              410(b),  all  such plans shall be aggregated
                              and  treated  as  one  plan  for purposes of
                              meeting  the  ADP  and  ACP  Tests, provided
                              t h a t,  for  Plan  Years  beginning  after
                              D e cember  31,  1989,  plans  may  only  be
                              aggregated if they have the same Plan Year.

                         (2)  If  an  HCE,  who  is one of the top 10 paid
                              Employees  or  a more than 5% Owner, has any
                              Family Members, the Deferrals, Contributions
                              and  Compensation of such HCE and his or her
                              Family Members shall be combined and treated
                              as  a single HCE. Such amounts for all other
                              Family  Members  shall  be  removed from the
                              NHCE  Group  percentage  calculation  and be
                              combined with the HCE's.

                         (3)  If  an  HCE is covered by more than one cash
                              or  deferred  arrangement  maintained by the
                              Related  Companies,  all such plans shall be
                              aggregated  and  treated  as  one  plan  for
                              purposes   of   calculating   the   separate
                              percentage  for the HCE which is used in the
                              determination of the Average Percentage.

                    (k)  "Lookback   Year".    Pursuant  to  Code  section
                         414(q),  the  Company elects as the Lookback Year
                         the  current  calendar year (ending with the Plan
                         Year).    Effective  for  Plan Years ending on or
                         after December 31, 1992, pursuant to Code section
                         414(q),  the  Company elects as the Lookback Year
                         the  12  months  ending  immediately prior to the
                         start of the Plan Year.

                    (l)  "Multiple  Use  Test".    The  test  described in
                         Section  12.4  which  a  Plan must meet where the
                         Alternative   Limitation  (described  in  Section
                         12.2(b))  is  used  to  meet both the ADP and ACP
                         Tests.

                    (m)  "NHCE"  or "Non-Highly Compensated Employee".  An
                         Employee who is not an HCE.








                                         33<PAGE>





              12.2  ADP and ACP Tests

                    For  each Plan Year, the ADP and ACP for the HCE Group
                    must  meet  either the Basic or Alternative Limitation
                    when  compared  to  the respective ADP and ACP for the
                    NHCE Group, defined as follows:

                    (a)  B a s ic  Limitation.    The  HCE  Group  Average
                         Percentage  may  not  exceed  1.25 times the NHCE
                         Group Average Percentage.

                    (b)  Alternative  Limitation.    The HCE Group Average
                         Percentage  is  limited  by reference to the NHCE
                         Group Average Percentage as follows:

                          If the NHCE Group        Then the Maximum HCE
                               Average           Group Average Percentage
                            Percentage is:                  is:

                             Less than 2%           2 times NHCE Group
                               2% to 8%                  Average %
                             More than 8%          NHCE Group Average %
                                                          plus 2%
                                                   NA - Basic Limitation
                                                          applies

              12.3  Correction of ADP and ACP Tests

                    If the ADP or ACP Tests are not met, the Administrator
                    shall  determine,  no  later  than the end of the next
                    Plan Year, a maximum percentage to be used in place of
                    the  calculated  percentage  for  all  HCEs that would
                    reduce  the  ADP  and/or  ACP  for  the HCE group by a
                    sufficient amount to meet the ADP and ACP Tests.

                    (a)  ADP  Correction.  Pre-Tax Contributions shall, by
                         the  end  of  the  next  Plan  Year,  be refunded
                         (including  amounts  previously  refunded because
                         they  exceeded  the Contribution Dollar Limit) to
                         the  Participant in an amount equal to the actual
                         Deferrals   minus  the  product  of  the  maximum
                         percentage  and  the  HCE's  Compensation.    Any
                         Matching  Contributions  attributable to refunded
                         excess Pre-Tax Contributions as described in this
                         Section  12.3(a)  shall  be deemed a Contribution
                         made  by  reason of a mistake of fact and removed
                         from the Participant's Account.

                    (b)  ACP  Correction.  Contributions shall, by the end
                         of  the  next  Plan  Year,  be  refunded  to  the
                         Participant  in  an  amount  equal  to the actual
                         Contributions  minus  the  product of the maximum
                         percentage  and  the  HCE's  Compensation.    The
                         e x c ess  amounts  shall  first  be  taken  from
                         unmatched  After-Tax  Contributions and then as a
                         proportional combination of matched After-Tax and
                         Matching Contributions.

                    (c)  Investment  Fund  Sources.    Once  the amount of
                         excess    Deferrals   and/or   Contributions   is
                         d e termined,   and   with   regard   to   excess
                         Contributions, allocated by type of Contribution,
                         amounts shall then be taken by type of investment
                         in  direct  proportion to the market value of the
                         Participant's  interest  in  each Investment Fund
                         (which  excludes  Participant  loans) at the time
                         the correction is made.

                    (d)  Family  Member  Correction.    To  the extent any


                                         34<PAGE>





                         reduction is necessary with respect to an HCE and
                         his or her Family Members that have been combined
                         and  treated  for  testing  purposes  as a single
                         Employee,  the excess Deferrals and Contributions
                         from  the  ADP  and/or ACP Test shall be prorated
                         among  each such Participant in direct proportion
                         to his or her Deferrals or Contributions included
                         in each Test.

              12.4  Multiple Use Test

                    If  the  Alternative  Limitation  (defined  in Section
                    12.2)  is used to meet both the ADP and ACP Tests, the
                    ADP  and  ACP  for the HCE Group must also comply with
                    the  requirements of Code section 401(m)(9). Such Code
                    section  requires  that the sum of the ADP and ACP for
                    the  HCE  Group  (as  determined after any corrections
                    needed  to  meet the ADP and ACP Tests have been made)
                    not  exceed the sum (which produces the most favorable
                    result) of:

                    (a)  the  Basic  Limitation  (defined in Section 12.2)
                         applied  to  either  the  ADP or ACP for the NHCE
                         Group, and

                    (b)  the  Alternative  Limitation applied to the other
                         NHCE Group percentage.

              12.5  Correction of Multiple Use Test

                    I f    t h e  multiple  use  limit  is  exceeded,  the
                    Administrator  shall determine a maximum percentage to
                    be  used in place of the calculated percentage for all
                    HCEs  that  would reduce either or both the ADP or ACP
                    for  the  HCE Group by a sufficient amount to meet the
                    multiple  use  limit.   Any excess shall be handled in
                    the  same  manner  that  the  distribution  of  excess
                    Deferrals or Contributions are handled.

              12.6  Adjustment for Investment Gain or Loss

                    Any  excess  Deferrals or Contributions to be refunded
                    to  a  Participant  in accordance with Section 12.3 or
                    12.5  shall  be  adjusted for investment gain or loss.
                    Refunds  shall not include investment gain or loss for
                    the period between the end of the applicable Plan Year
                    and the date of distribution.  However, for Plan Years
                    ending before December 31, 1993, refunds shall include
                    investment gain or loss for the period between the end
                    o f    the  applicable  Plan  Year  and  the  date  of
                    distribution.




















                                         35<PAGE>





              12.7  Testing Responsibilities and Required Records

                    The  Administrator  shall  be responsible for ensuring
                    that  the  Plan  meets  the  ADP, ACP and Multiple Use
                    Tests  and  that  the Contribution Dollar Limit is not
                    exceeded.    In carrying out its responsibilities, the
                    Administrator  shall  have sole discretion to limit or
                    reduce  Deferrals  or  Contributions at any time.  The
                    A d m inistrator  shall  maintain  records  which  are
                    sufficient  to  demonstrate  that  the  ADP,  ACP  and
                    Multiple  Use  Tests  have been met for each Plan Year
                    for  at  least as long as the Employer's corresponding
                    tax year is open to audit.

              12.8  Separate Testing

                    (a)  Multiple  Employers:   The determination of HCEs,
                         NHCEs,  and  the  performance of the ADP, ACP and
                         Multiple  Use  Tests  and  any  corrective action
                         resulting therefrom shall be made separately with
                         regard to the Employees of each Employer (and its
                         Related  Companies) that is not a Related Company
                         with the other Employer(s).

                    (b)  Collective  Bargaining  Units:    For  Plan Years
                         beginning    after   December   31,   1992,   the
                         performance  of  the ADP Test, and if applicable,
                         the  ACP  Test  and  Multiple  Use  Test  and any
                         corrective  action  resulting  therefrom shall be
                         applied  separately to Employees who are eligible
                         to  participate  in  the  Plan  as  a result of a
                         collective bargaining agreement.

                    In  addition,  separate testing may be applied, at the
                    discretion  of  the  Administrator  and  to the extent
                    permitted  under Treasury regulations, to any group of
                    Employees for whom separate testing is permissible.


































                                         36<PAGE>





         13   MAXIMUM CONTRIBUTION AND BENEFIT LIMITATIONS

              13.1  "Annual Addition" Defined

                    The  sum of all amounts allocated to the Participant's
                    A c c o u n t  for  a  Plan  Year.    Amounts  include
                    contributions  (except for rollovers or transfers from
                    another  qualified  plan),  forfeitures  and,  if  the
                    Participant is a Key Employee (pursuant to Section 14)
                    for  the  applicable  or  any prior Plan Year, medical
                    benefits provided pursuant to Code section 419A(d)(1).
                    For  purposes  of  this  Section  13.1, "Account" also
                    includes  a Participant's account in all other defined
                    contribution  plans currently or previously maintained
                    by  any  Related Company.  The Plan Year refers to the
                    year  to  which the allocation pertains, regardless of
                    when  it  was  allocated.   The Plan Year shall be the
                    Code section 415 limitation year.

              13.2  Maximum Annual Addition

                    The  Annual Addition to a Participant's accounts under
                    this  Plan  and  any  other  defined contribution plan
                    maintained  by  any  Related Company for any Plan Year
                    shall  not  exceed the lesser of (1) 25% of his or her
                    Taxable  Income  or (2) the greater of $30,000 or one-
                    quarter  of the dollar limitation in effect under Code
                    section 415(b)(1)(A).  

              13.3  Avoiding an Excess Annual Addition

                    If,  at any time during a Plan Year, the allocation of
                    any  additional  Contributions would produce an excess
                    Annual  Addition  for  such  year, Contributions to be
                    made  for  the  remainder  of  the  Plan Year shall be
                    limited   to  the  amount  needed  for  each  affected
                    Participant to receive the maximum Annual Addition.

              13.4  Correcting an Excess Annual Addition

                    Upon  the  discovery of an excess Annual Addition to a
                    Participant's  Account  (resulting  from  forfeitures,
                    a l locations,   reasonable   error   in   determining
                    Participant  compensation  or  the  amount of elective
                    c o ntributions,  or  other  facts  and  circumstances
                    acceptable to the Internal Revenue Service) the excess
                    amount  (adjusted  to  reflect investment gains) shall
                    first  be returned to the Participant to the extent of
                    his  or  her  After-Tax Contributions, and then to the
                    extent of his or her Pre-Tax Contributions (however to
                    the extent After-Tax and/or Pre-Tax Contributions were
                    matched,  the  applicable Matching Contributions shall
                    be  forfeited  in  proportion  to the returned matched
                    A f ter-Tax  and/or  Pre-Tax  Contributions)  and  the
                    remaining  excess,  if  any,  plus  returned  Matching
                    Contributions,  shall  be forfeited by the Participant
                    and used to reduce subsequent Contributions as soon as
                    is administratively feasible.













                                         37<PAGE>





              13.5  Correcting a Multiple Plan Excess

                    If  a  Participant,  whose Account is credited with an
                    excess  Annual  Addition, received allocations to more
                    than  one  defined contribution plan, the excess shall
                    be  corrected  by reducing the Annual Addition to this
                    Plan only after all possible reductions have been made
                    to the other defined contribution plans.

              13.6  "Defined Benefit Fraction" Defined

                    The  fraction,  for any Plan Year, where the numerator

                    is  the "projected annual benefit" and the denominator
                    is  the  greater  of  125%  of  the "protected current
                    accrued  benefit"  or  the  normal  limit which is the
                    lesser  of  (1)  125% of the maximum dollar limitation
                    provided  under Code section 415(b)(1)(A) for the Plan
                    Year or (2) 140% of the amount which may be taken into
                    account  under  Code section 415(b)(1)(B) for the Plan
                    Year, where a Participant's:

                    (a)  "projected  annual benefit" is the annual benefit
                         provided  by the Plan determined pursuant to Code
                         section 415(e)(2)(A), and

                    (b)  "protected  current accrued benefit" in a defined
                         benefit  plan  in  existence on (1) July 1, 1982,
                         shall  be the accrued annual benefit provided for
                         under  Public  Law  97-248, section 235(g)(4), as

                         amended,  or  (2)  on  May  6, 1986, shall be the
                         accrued  annual benefit provided for under Public
                         Law 99-514, section 1106(i)(3).

              13.7  "Defined Contribution Fraction" Defined

                    The  fraction  where  the  numerator is the sum of the
                    Participant's  Annual  Addition  for each Plan Year to
                    date  and  the  denominator  is the sum of the "annual
                    amounts"  for  each  year in which the Participant has
                    performed service with a Related Company.  The "annual
                    amount" for any Plan Year is the lesser of (1) 125% of
                    t h e  Code  section  415(c)(1)(A)  dollar  limitation
                    (determined  without  regard  to subsection (c)(6)) in
                    effect  for  the  Plan  Year  and (2) 140% of the Code
                    section  415(c)(1)(B)  amount  in  effect for the Plan
                    Year, where:


                    (a)  each  Annual  Addition  is determined pursuant to
                         the  Code section 415(c) rules in effect for such
                         Plan Year, and

                    (b)  the  numerator is adjusted pursuant to Public Law
                         97-248,  section 235(g)(3), as amended, or Public
                         Law 99-514, section 1106(i)(4).

              13.8  Combined Plan Limits and Correction

                    If  a  Participant  has also participated in a defined
                    benefit  plan maintained by a Related Company, the sum
                    of  the  Defined  Benefit  Fraction  and  the  Defined
                    Contribution Fraction for any Plan Year may not exceed
                    1.0.    If  the  combined fraction exceeds 1.0 for any

                    Plan Year, the Participant's benefit under any defined
                    b e n efit  plan  (to  the  extent  it  has  not  been
                    distributed  or  used to purchase an annuity contract)
                    shall  be  limited  so that the combined fraction does

                                         38<PAGE>





                    not  exceed 1.0 before any defined contribution limits
                    will be enforced.





































































                                         39<PAGE>





         14   TOP HEAVY RULES

              14.1  Top Heavy Definitions

                    When capitalized, the following words and phrases have
                    the following meanings when used in this Section:

                    (a)  "Aggregation  Group".    The  group consisting of
                         each  qualified  plan  of  an  Employer  (and its
                         Related Companies) (1) in which a Key Employee is
                         a  participant  or  was  a participant during the
                         determination  period (regardless of whether such

                         plan   has  terminated),  or  (2)  which  enables
                         a n o t h er  plan  in  the  group  to  meet  the
                         requirements   of  Code  sections  401(a)(4)  and
                         410(b).    The  Employer may also treat any other
                         qualified  plan as part of the group if the group
                         would  continue  to meet the requirements of Code
                         sections  401(a)(4)  and  410(b)  with  such plan
                         being taken into account.

                    (b)  "Determination Date".  The last Trade Date of the
                         preceding Plan Year or, in the case of the Plan's
                         first year, the last Trade Date of the first Plan
                         Year.

                    (c)  "Key Employee".  A current or former Employee (or
                         his  or  her  Beneficiary) who at any time during
                         the  five year period ending on the Determination

                         Date was:

                         (1)  an   officer  of  a  Related  Company  whose
                              Compensation  (i)  exceeds 50% of the amount
                              in  effect  under  Code section 415(b)(1)(A)
                              and  (ii)  places  him  within the following
                              highest paid group of officers:


                                    Number of               Number of
                                    Employees             Highest Paid
                               not Excluded Under       Officers Included
                                      Code
                                Section 414(q)(8)

                                  Less than 30                  3
                                    30 to 500           10% of the number
                                                               of
                                                          Employees not
                                                            excluded
                                  More than 500        under Code section
                                                            414(q)(8)
                                                               50

                         (2)  a more than 5% Owner,

                         (3)  a  more  than  1%  Owner  whose Compensation
                              exceeds $150,000, or 

                         (4)  a  more  than 0.5% Owner who is among the 10
                              Employees  owning  the largest interest in a

                              R e lated  Company  and  whose  Compensation
                              exceeds  the  amount  in  effect  under Code
                              section 415(c)(1)(A).





                                         40<PAGE>





                    (d)  "Plan  Benefit".  The sum as of the Determination
                         Date  of  (1)  an  Employee's  Account,  (2)  the
                         present   value  of  his  or  her  other  accrued
                         benefits  provided  by all qualified plans within
                         the  Aggregation  Group,  and  (3)  the aggregate
                         distributions  made  within  the five year period
                         ending on such date.  Plan Benefits shall exclude
                         rollover contributions and plan to plan transfers
                         made  after  December  31,  1983  which  are both
                         employee  initiated and from a plan maintained by
                         a non-related employer.

                    (e)  "Top  Heavy".    The  Plan's status when the Plan
                         Benefits  of  Key Employees account for more than
                         60%  of  the  Plan  Benefits of all Employees who

                         have  performed  services  at any time during the
                         five  year  period  ending  on  the Determination
                         Date.    The Plan Benefits of Employees who were,
                         but  are  no  longer, Key Employees (because they
                         have not been an officer or Owner during the five
                         year period), are excluded in the determination.

              14.2  Special Contributions

                    (a)  Minimum  Contribution Requirement.  For each Plan
                         Year in which the Plan is Top Heavy, the Employer
                         shall  not  allow any contributions (other than a
                         Rollover Contribution) to be made by or on behalf
                         of  any  Key Employee unless the Employer makes a
                         contribution  (other  than  Pre-Tax  and Matching
                         Contributions)  on behalf of all Participants who
                         were Eligible Employees as of the last day of the
                         Plan  Year  in  an amount equal to at least 3% of
                         each  such  Participant's  Taxable  Income.   The
                         Administrator shall remove any such contributions

                         (including  applicable  investment  gain or loss)
                         credited to a Key Employee's Account in violation
                         of  the  foregoing  rule  and  return them to the
                         Employer  or  Employee to the extent permitted by
                         the  Limited Return of Contributions paragraph of
                         Section 18.

                    (b)  Overriding  Minimum  Benefit.    Notwithstanding,
                         contributions shall be permitted on behalf of Key
                         Employees   if  the  Employer  also  maintains  a
                         defined benefit plan which automatically provides
                         a   benefit  which  satisfies  the  Code  section
                         416(c)(1) minimum benefit requirements, including
                         the   adjustment   provided   in   Code   section
                         416(h)(2)(A),  if  applicable.    If this Plan is
                         part  of  an  aggregation  group  in  which a Key
                         Employee is receiving a benefit and no minimum is
                         provided   in   any   other   plan,   a   minimum
                         contribution  of  at  least  3% of Taxable Income
                         shall  be  provided to the Employees specified in

                         the   preceding  paragraph  of  this  plan.    In
                         addition,  the  Employer  may  offset  a  defined
                         benefit minimum by contributions (other than Pre-
                         Tax  and  Matching  Contributions)  made  to this
                         Plan.

              14.3  Adjustment to Combined Limits for Different Plans

                    For  each  Plan  Year  in which the Plan is Top Heavy,
                    100%  shall be substituted for 125% in determining the
                    Defined  Benefit Fraction and the Defined Contribution


                                         41<PAGE>





                    Fraction.


         15   PLAN ADMINISTRATION

              15.1  Plan Delineates Authority and Responsibility

                    P l a n   fiduciaries   include   the   Company,   the
                    Administrator,  the  Committee  and/or the Trustee, as
                    applicable,  whose  specific  duties are delineated in
                    this  Plan  and  Trust.  In addition, Plan fiduciaries
                    also include any other person to whom fiduciary duties
                    or  responsibility  is  delegated  with respect to the
                    Plan.   Any person or group may serve in more than one
                    fiduciary  capacity  with respect to the Plan.  To the
                    extent permitted under ERISA section 405, no fiduciary
                    shall be liable for a breach by another fiduciary.

              15.2  Fiduciary Standards

                    Each fiduciary shall:

                    (a)  discharge  his  or  her duties in accordance with
                         this  Plan  and  Trust  to  the  extent  they are
                         consistent with ERISA;

                    (b)  use  that  degree  of  care,  skill, prudence and
                         diligence  that a prudent person acting in a like
                         capacity and familiar with such matters would use
                         in  the  conduct  of  an  enterprise  of  a  like
                         character and with like aims;

                    (c)  act  with  the  exclusive  purpose  of  providing
                         benefits to Participants and their Beneficiaries,
                         and     defraying    reasonable    expenses    of
                         administering the Plan;

                    (d)  diversify  Plan  investments,  to the extent such
                         f i duciary  is  responsible  for  directing  the
                         investment  of Plan assets, so as to minimize the
                         r i s k    of  large  losses,  unless  under  the
                         circumstances it is clearly prudent not to do so;
                         and

                    (e)  treat   similarly   situated   Participants   and
                         Beneficiaries  in a uniform and nondiscriminatory
                         manner. 

              15.3  Company is ERISA Plan Administrator

                    The  Company  is  the  plan  administrator, within the
                    meaning  of  ERISA section 3(16), which is responsible
                    for  compliance  with  all  reporting  and  disclosure
                    requirements,  except  those  that  are explicitly the
                    responsibility  of  the  Trustee under applicable law.
                    The  Administrator  and/or  Committee  shall  have any
                    necessary   authority  to  carry  out  such  functions
                    t h rough  the  actions  of  the  Administrator,  duly
                    a p p ointed  officers  of  the  Company,  and/or  the
                    Committee.











                                         42<PAGE>





              15.4  Administrator Duties

                    T h e   Administrator  shall  have  the  discretionary
                    authority  to construe this Plan and Trust, other than
                    the  provisions which relate to the Trustee, and to do
                    all  things  necessary  or  convenient  to  effect the
                    intent  and  purposes of the Plan, whether or not such
                    powers  are  specifically  set  forth in this Plan and
                    T r u s t.    Actions  taken  in  good  faith  by  the
                    Administrator  shall  be conclusive and binding on all
                    interested  parties,  and  shall  be given the maximum
                    possible deference allowed by law.  In addition to the
                    duties  listed  elsewhere  in this Plan and Trust, the
                    Administrator's  authority  shall  include, but not be
                    limited to, the discretionary authority to:

                    (a)  determine  who  is  eligible to participate, if a
                         contribution     qualifies    as    a    rollover
                         contribution,  the  allocation  of Contributions,
                         and  the  eligibility  for loans, withdrawals and
                         distributions;
                    
                    (b)  provide  each  Participant  with  a  summary plan
                         description no later than 90 days after he or she
                         has  become  a  Participant (or such other period
                         permitted under ERISA section 104(b)(1)), as well
                         as  informing  each  Participant  of any material
                         modification to the Plan in a timely manner;

                    (c)  make  a copy of the following documents available
                         to  Participants  during  normal work hours: this
                         Plan and Trust (including subsequent amendments),
                         all  annual  and  interim  reports of the Trustee
                         related  to  the  entire  Plan, the latest annual
                         report and the summary plan description;

                    (d)  determine  the  fact of a Participant's death and
                         o f   any  Beneficiary's  right  to  receive  the
                         deceased  Participant's  interest based upon such
                         proof and evidence as it deems necessary; 

                    (e)  establish  and review at least annually a funding
                         policy  bearing  in  mind  both the short-run and
                         long-run  needs  and  goals  of the Plan.  To the
                         e x t e nt  Participants  may  direct  their  own
                         investments,  the  funding  policy shall focus on
                         w h i c h  Investment  Funds  are  available  for
                         Participants to use; and

                    (f)  a d j u dicate  claims  pursuant  to  the  claims
                         procedure described in Section 18.

              15.5  Advisors May be Retained

                    The  Administrator may retain such agents and advisors
                    (including    attorneys,    accountants,    actuaries,
                    consultants,  record  keepers,  investment counsel and
                    administrative  assistants)  as it considers necessary
                    to  assist  it  in the performance of its duties.  The
                    Administrator  shall  also  comply  with  the  bonding
                    requirements of ERISA section 412.










                                         43<PAGE>





              15.6  Delegation of Administrator Duties

                    The   Company,  as  Administrator  of  the  Plan,  has
                    appointed  a  Committee  to administer the Plan on its
                    behalf.    The  Company shall provide the Trustee with
                    the  names  and  specimen  signatures  of  any persons
                    authorized to serve as Committee members and act as or
                    on  its behalf.  Any Committee member appointed by the
                    Company  shall  serve  at the pleasure of the Company,
                    but  may  resign  by  written  notice  to the Company.
                    Committee  members  shall  serve  without compensation
                    from the Plan for such services.  Except to the extent
                    that the Company otherwise provides, any delegation of
                    duties  to  a  Committee  shall carry with it the full
                    d i scretionary  authority  of  the  Administrator  to
                    complete such duties.

              15.7  Committee Operating Rules

                    (a)  Actions  of  Majority.   Any act delegated by the
                         Company  to  the  Committee  may  be  done  by  a
                         majority  of  its  members.   The majority may be
                         expressed  by  a  vote at a meeting or in writing
                         without a meeting, and a majority action shall be
                         equivalent to an action of all Committee members.

                    (b)  Meetings.  The Committee shall hold meetings upon
                         such  notice,  place  and  times as it determines
                         necessary to conduct its functions properly.

                    (c)  Reliance by Trustee.  The Committee may authorize
                         one  or  more of its members to execute documents
                         on  its  behalf  and may authorize one or more of
                         its  members  or  other  individuals  who are not
                         members  to give written direction to the Trustee
                         in  the performance of its duties.  The Committee
                         shall  provide  such  authorization in writing to
                         the Trustee with the name and specimen signatures
                         of  any  person  authorized to act on its behalf.
                         The  Trustee shall accept such direction and rely
                         upon  it  until  notified  in  writing  that  the
                         Committee  has  revoked the authorization to give
                         such  direction.  The Trustee shall not be deemed
                         to  be  on notice of any change in the membership
                         of  the  Committee,  parties authorized to direct
                         the  Trustee in the performance of its duties, or
                         the  duties  delegated  to  and  by the Committee
                         until notified in writing.























                                         44<PAGE>





         16   MANAGEMENT OF INVESTMENTS

              16.1  Trust Agreement

                    All Plan assets shall be held by the Trustee in trust,
                    in  accordance  with those provisions of this Plan and
                    Trust   which  relate  to  the  Trustee,  for  use  in
                    providing  Plan  benefits and paying Plan expenses not
                    paid  directly by the Employer.  Plan benefits will be
                    drawn solely from the Trust and paid by the Trustee as
                    directed  by  the  Administrator. Notwithstanding, the
                    Administrator  may  appoint,  with the approval of the
                    Trustee,  another  trustee to hold and administer Plan
                    assets  which  do not meet the requirements of Section
                    16.2.

              16.2  Investment Funds

                    The  Administrator  is  hereby  granted  authority  to
                    direct  the  Trustee  to invest Trust assets in one or
                    more  Investment Funds.  The number and composition of
                    Investment  Funds  may  be  changed from time to time,
                    without  the necessity of amending this Plan and Trust
                    document.  The Trustee may establish reasonable limits
                    on  the  number  of  Investment  Funds  as well as the
                    acceptable  assets for any such Investment Fund.  Each
                    of the Investment Funds may be comprised of any of the
                    following:

                    (a)  s h ares  of  a  registered  investment  company,
                         whether   or  not  the  Trustee  or  any  of  its
                         affiliates  is  an  advisor  to, or other service
                         provider to, such company;   

                    (b)  collective  investment  funds  maintained  by the
                         Trustee,  or  any  other  fiduciary  to the Plan,
                         which  are  available  for  investment  by trusts
                         which  are  qualified  under Code sections 401(a)
                         and 501(a); 

                    (c)  individual  equity  and  fixed  income securities
                         which are readily tradeable on the open market; 

                    (d)  guaranteed  investment contracts issued by a bank
                         or insurance company;

                    (e)  interest bearing deposits of the Trustee; and

                    (f)  Company Stock.

                    Any  Investment  Fund  assets invested in a collective
                    i n v estment  fund,  shall  be  subject  to  all  the
                    p r o visions  of  the  instruments  establishing  and
                    governing such fund.  These instruments, including any
                    subsequent  amendments,  are  incorporated  herein  by
                    reference. 















                                         45<PAGE>





              16.3  Authority to Hold Cash

                    The  Trustee  shall  have  the  authority to cause the
                    investment manager of each Investment Fund to maintain
                    sufficient deposit or money market type assets in each
                    Investment  Fund  to  handle  the Fund's liquidity and
                    disbursement    needs.      Each   Participant's   and
                    Beneficiary's  Sweep  Account,  which  is used to hold
                    assets   pending  investment  or  disbursement,  shall
                    consist of interest bearing deposits of the Trustee.  

              16.4  Trustee to Act Upon Instructions

                    The  Trustee  shall  carry  out instructions to invest
                    assets  in the Investment Funds as soon as practicable
                    a f t er  such  instructions  are  received  from  the
                    Administrator,  Participants,  or Beneficiaries.  Such
                    instructions  shall  remain in effect until changed by
                    the Administrator, Participants or Beneficiaries.

              16.5  Administrator  Has Right to Vote Registered Investment
                    Company Shares
                    
                    The Administrator shall be entitled to vote proxies or
                    exercise  any  shareholder  rights  relating to shares
                    held  on behalf of the Plan in a registered investment
                    company.    Notwithstanding,  the  authority  to  vote
                    proxies  and  exercise  shareholder  rights related to
                    such  shares  held  in  a  Custom  Fund  is  vested as
                    provided otherwise in Section 16.

              16.6  Custom Fund Investment Management 

                    The  Administrator  may designate, with the consent of
                    the  Trustee, an investment manager for any Investment
                    Fund   established   by   the   Trustee   solely   for
                    Participants  of  this  Plan  (a  "Custom Fund").  The
                    investment  manager  may be the Administrator, Trustee
                    or  an  investment  manager  pursuant to ERISA section
                    3(38).   The Administrator shall advise the Trustee in
                    writing  of  the  appointment of an investment manager
                    and  shall cause the investment manager to acknowledge
                    to  the Trustee in writing that the investment manager
                    is a fiduciary to the Plan.

                    A Custom Fund shall be subject to the following:  

                    (a)  Guidelines.    Written  guidelines, acceptable to
                         the  Trustee,  shall  be established for a Custom
                         Fund.    If  a  Custom  Fund  consists  solely of
                         collective   investment  funds  or  shares  of  a
                         registered  investment  company  (and  sufficient
                         deposit or money market type assets to handle the
                         Fund's  liquidity  and  disbursement needs), its'
                         u n derlying  instruments  shall  constitute  the
                         guidelines. 

                    (b)  Authority  of Investment Manager.  The investment
                         manager of a Custom Fund shall have the authority
                         to  vote or execute proxies, exercise shareholder
                         rights,  manage,  acquire,  and  dispose of Trust
                         assets.    Notwithstanding, the authority to vote
                         proxies  and  exercise shareholder rights related
                         to  shares of Company Stock held in a Custom Fund
                         is vested as provided otherwise in Section 16.

                    (c)  Custody  and  Trade Settlement.  Unless otherwise
                         expressly  agreed  to by the Trustee, the Trustee
                         shall  maintain custody of all Custom Fund assets
                         and  be  responsible  for  the  settlement of all

                                         46<PAGE>





                         Custom   Fund  trades.    For  purposes  of  this
                         section,  shares of a collective investment fund,
                         shares  of  a  registered  investment company and
                         guaranteed  investment contracts issued by a bank
                         or  insurance  company,  shall be regarded as the
                         Custom  Fund  assets  instead  of  the underlying
                         assets of such instruments.

                    (d)  Limited Liability of Co-Fiduciaries.  Neither the
                         Administrator  nor the Trustee shall be obligated
                         to  invest  or  otherwise  manage any Custom Fund
                         assets  for which the Trustee or Administrator is
                         n o t   the  investment  manager  nor  shall  the
                         Administrator  or  Trustee  be liable for acts or
                         omissions  with  regard to the investment of such
                         assets except to the extent required by ERISA.

              16.7  Authority to Segregate Assets

                    The  Company  may  direct  the  Trustee  to  split  an
                    Investment  Fund  into  two or more funds in the event
                    any  assets  in  the Fund are illiquid or the value is
                    not  readily  determinable.    In  the  event  of such
                    segregation,  the  Company  shall give instructions to
                    the  Trustee  on  what  value to use for the split-off
                    assets,  and  the Trustee shall not be responsible for
                    confirming such value.

              16.8  Maximum Permitted Investment in Company Stock

                    If  the  Company provides for a Company Stock Fund the
                    Fund  may  be  comprised entirely of Company Stock and
                    the  Fund  may be as large as necessary to comply with
                    Participants' and Beneficiaries' investment elections,
                    if   the  Company  Stock  Fund  is  authorized  as  an
                    Investment Fund available to Participants, as well the
                    total  investment  of Participants' and Beneficiaries'
                    Matching Accounts. 

              16.9  Participants  Have  Right  to  Vote and Tender Company
                    Stock

                    Each  Participant  or Beneficiary shall be entitled to
                    instruct  the Trustee as to the voting or tendering of
                    any  full  or  partial shares of Company Stock held on
                    his or her behalf in the Company Stock Fund.  Prior to
                    such  voting  or  tendering  of  Company  Stock,  each
                    Participant or Beneficiary shall receive a copy of the
                    proxy  solicitation or other material relating to such
                    vote  or  tender  decision  and  a  blank form for the
                    Participant   or   Beneficiary   to   complete   which
                    confidentially instructs the Trustee to vote or tender
                    s u c h    shares  in  the  manner  indicated  by  the
                    Participants  or  Beneficiaries.  Upon receipt of such
                    instructions,  the  Trustee  shall act with respect to
                    such  shares  as  instructed.  The Administrator shall
                    instruct  the  Trustee  with respect to how to vote or
                    tender  any  shares  for  which  instructions  are not
                    received from Participants or Beneficiaries.












                                         47<PAGE>





              16.10      Registration and Disclosure for Company Stock

                    The Administrator shall be responsible for determining
                    the applicability (and, if applicable, complying with)
                    the  requirements  of  the  Securities Act of 1933, as
                    amended,  the  California  Corporate Securities Law of
                    1968,  as  amended,  and any other applicable blue sky
                    law.    The  Administrator  shall  also  specify  what
                    restrictive legend or transfer restriction, if any, is
                    required  to  be set forth on the certificates for the
                    securities  and  the  procedure  to be followed by the
                    Trustee to effectuate a resale of such securities.



























































                                         48<PAGE>





         17   TRUST ADMINISTRATION

              17.1  Trustee to Construe Trust

                    The  Trustee shall have the discretionary authority to
                    construe those provisions of this Plan and Trust which
                    relate  to  the Trustee and to do all things necessary
                    or  convenient  to  the  administration  of the Trust,
                    whether  or not such powers are specifically set forth
                    in  this  Plan and Trust.  Actions taken in good faith
                    by  the Trustee shall be conclusive and binding on all
                    interested  parties,  and  shall  be given the maximum
                    possible deference allowed by law.

              17.2  Trustee To Act As Owner of Trust Assets

                    Subject to the specific conditions and limitations set
                    forth  in  this Plan and Trust, the Trustee shall have
                    all  the power, authority, rights and privileges of an
                    absolute  owner  of  the  Trust  assets  and,  not  in
                    limitation but in amplification of the foregoing, may:

                    (a)  receive, hold, manage, invest and reinvest, sell,
                         t e nder,   exchange,   dispose   of,   encumber,
                         h y pothecate,  pledge,  mortgage,  lease,  grant
                         options  respecting,  repair,  alter,  insure, or
                         distribute any and all property in the Trust;

                    (b)  borrow money, participate in reorganizations, pay
                         calls  and  assessments, vote or execute proxies,
                         exercise  subscription  or conversion privileges,
                         exercise  options  and register any securities in
                         the  Trust in the name of the nominee, in federal
                         book  entry  form  or  in  any other form as will
                         permit title thereto to pass by delivery;

                    (c)  renew,   extend   the   due   date,   compromise,
                         arbitrate,  adjust, settle, enforce or foreclose,
                         by  judicial  proceedings or otherwise, or defend
                         against  the  same,  any obligations or claims in
                         favor of or against the Trust; and

                    (d)  lend,  through  a collective investment fund, any
                         securities  held  in  such  collective investment
                         fund  to  brokers, dealers or other borrowers and
                         to  permit such securities to be transferred into
                         the name and custody and be voted by the borrower
                         or others.

              17.3  United States Indicia of Ownership

                    T h e  Trustee  shall  not  maintain  the  indicia  of
                    ownership of any Trust assets outside the jurisdiction
                    of  the  United  States, except as authorized by ERISA
                    section 404(b).
















                                         49<PAGE>





              17.4  Tax Withholding and Payment

                    (a)  Withholding.  Effective for taxable distributions
                         made  on  or before December 31, 1992 the Trustee
                         shall  calculate  and  withhold  federal (and, if
                         applicable,  state)  income  taxes  in accordance
                         w i t h  a  Participant's  withholding  election.
                         Effective  for  taxable  distributions made after
                         December  31,  1992,  the Trustee shall calculate
                         and  withhold federal (and, if applicable, state)
                         income taxes with regard to any Eligible Rollover
                         Distribution   that  is  not  paid  as  a  Direct
                         Rollover.      With   regard   to   any   taxable
                         distribution  that  is  not  an Eligible Rollover
                         Distribution,  the  Trustee  shall  calculate and
                         withhold  federal  (and,  if  applicable,  state)
                         income taxes in accordance with the Participant's
                         withholding election.

                    (b)  Taxes  Due  From  Investment  Funds.  The Trustee
                         shall  pay  from the Investment Fund any taxes or
                         assessments imposed by any taxing or governmental
                         authority  on  such Fund or its income, including
                         related interest and penalties.

              17.5  Trustee Duties and Limitations

                    Unless   otherwise  agreed  to  by  the  Trustee,  the
                    Trustee's  duties  shall be confined to construing the
                    terms  of  the  Plan  and  Trust as they relate to the
                    Trustee,  receiving  funds  on  behalf  of  and making
                    payments  from  the  Trust,  safeguarding  and valuing
                    Trust  assets,  and  investing  and  reinvesting Trust
                    assets  in  the  Investment  Funds  as directed by the
                    Administrator or Participants.  The Trustee shall have
                    no    duty   or   authority   to   ascertain   whether
                    Contributions  are  in  compliance  with  the Plan, to
                    enforce   collection  or  to  compute  or  verify  the
                    accuracy or adequacy or any amount to be paid to it by
                    the Employer.  The Trustee shall not be liable for the
                    proper  application  of  any  part  of  the Trust with
                    respect  to  any disbursement made at the direction of
                    the Administrator.

              17.6  Trust Accounting

                    (a)  A n nual  Report.    Within  60  days  (or  other
                         reasonable  period)  following  the  close of the
                         P l a n  Year,  the  Trustee  shall  provide  the
                         Administrator  with an annual accounting of Trust
                         a s s ets   and   information   to   assist   the
                         Administrator in meeting ERISA's annual reporting
                         and audit requirements.  

                    (b)  Periodic  Reports.    The  Trustee shall maintain
                         records and provide sufficient reporting to allow
                         the Administrator to properly monitor the Trust's
                         assets and activity.

                    (c)  Administrator  Approval.  Approval of any Trustee
                         accounting will automatically occur 90 days after
                         s u c h  accounting  has  been  received  by  the
                         Administrator,  unless  the Administrator files a
                         written  objection  with  the Trustee within such
                         time  period.  Such approval shall be final as to
                         all  matters  and  transactions  stated  or shown
                         therein and binding upon the Administrator.




                                         50<PAGE>












































































                                         51<PAGE>





              17.7  Valuation of Certain Assets

                    If  the  Trustee  determines the Trust holds any asset
                    which is not readily tradable and listed on a national
                    securities  exchange  registered  under the Securities
                    Exchange  Act  of  1934,  as  amended, the Trustee may
                    engage  a qualified independent appraiser to determine
                    the  fair  market  value  of  such  property,  and the
                    appraisal  fees shall be paid from the Investment Fund
                    containing the asset.  

              17.8  Legal Counsel

                    The  Trustee  may  consult  with  legal counsel of its
                    choice,  including counsel for the Employer or counsel
                    of  the  Trustee,  upon any question or matter arising
                    under  this  Plan  and Trust.  When relied upon by the
                    Trustee, the opinion of such counsel shall be evidence
                    that the Trustee has acted in good faith. 

              17.9  Fees and Expenses

                    The  Trustee's  fees for its services as Trustee shall
                    be  such as may be mutually agreed upon by the Company
                    and  the  Trustee.    Trustee  fees and all reasonable
                    expenses  of  counsel  and  advisors  retained  by the
                    Trustee shall be paid in accordance with Section 6.












































                                         52<PAGE>





         18   RIGHTS, PROTECTION, CONSTRUCTION AND JURISDICTION

              18.1  Plan Does Not Affect Employment Rights

                    The Plan does not provide any employment rights to any
                    Employee.    The Employer expressly reserves the right
                    to  discharge an Employee at any time, with or without
                    cause,  without  regard  to  the effect such discharge
                    would have upon the Employee's interest in the Plan.

              18.2  Limited Return of Contributions

                    Except  as provided in this paragraph, (1) Plan assets
                    shall  not  revert to the Employer nor be diverted for
                    any  purpose  other  than  the  exclusive  benefit  of
                    P a rticipants  or  their  Beneficiaries;  and  (2)  a
                    Participant's  vested interest shall not be subject to
                    divestment.    As provided in ERISA section 403(c)(2),
                    the  actual  amount  of  a  Contribution  made  by the
                    Employer  (or the current value of the Contribution if
                    a  net  loss  has occurred) may revert to the Employer
                    if:

                    (a)  such  Contribution is made by reason of a mistake
                         of fact;

                    (b)  initial  qualification  of  the  Plan  under Code
                         section  401(a) is not received and a request for
                         such   qualification  is  made  within  the  time
                         p r e scribed  under  Code  section  401(b)  (the
                         existence of and Contributions under the Plan are
                         hereby conditioned upon such qualification); or

                    (c)  such  Contribution  is  not deductible under Code
                         s e ction  404  (such  Contributions  are  hereby
                         conditioned   upon  such  deductibility)  in  the
                         taxable  year  of  the  Employer  for  which  the
                         Contribution is made.

                    The reversion to the Employer must be made (if at all)
                    within  one  year  of  the  mistaken  payment  of  the
                    Contribution,  the date of denial of qualification, or
                    the date of disallowance of deduction, as the case may
                    be.  A Participant shall have no rights under the Plan
                    with respect to any such reversion.

              18.3  Assignment and Alienation

                    As  provided  by  Code  section  401(a)(13) and to the
                    extent  not  otherwise  required  by  law,  no benefit
                    provided  by  the Plan may be anticipated, assigned or
                    alienated, except:

                    (a)  to  create,  assign  or  recognize a right to any
                         benefit with respect to a Participant pursuant to
                         a QDRO, or

                    (b)  to  use a Participant's vested Account balance as
                         security  for  a  loan  from  the  Plan  which is
                         permitted pursuant to Code section 4975.











                                         53<PAGE>





              18.4  Facility of Payment

                    If  a  Plan benefit is due to be paid to a minor or if
                    the  Administrator  reasonably believes that any payee
                    is  legally  incapable  of  giving a valid receipt and
                    discharge   for  any  payment  due  him  or  her,  the
                    Administrator  shall  have the payment of the benefit,
                    or any part thereof, made to the person (or persons or
                    institution) whom it reasonably believes is caring for
                    or  supporting  the  payee, unless it has received due
                    notice   of  claim  therefor  from  a  duly  appointed
                    guardian  or  conservator  of  the payee.  Any payment
                    shall  to  the extent thereof, be a complete discharge
                    of any liability under the Plan to the payee.

              18.5  Reallocation of Lost Participant's Accounts

                    If  the  Administrator cannot locate a person entitled
                    to  payment  of  a  Plan  benefit  after  a reasonable
                    search,  the  Administrator may at any time thereafter
                    treat  such person's Account as forfeited and use such
                    amount  to offset any Employer Contributions.  If such
                    person  subsequently presents the Administrator with a
                    valid claim for the benefit, such person shall be paid
                    the  amount  treated  as  forfeited, plus the interest
                    that  would  have  been earned in the Sweep Account to
                    the  date  of  determination.  The Administrator shall
                    p a y   the  amount  through  an  additional  Employer
                    Contribution.

              18.6  Claims Procedure
                    
                    (a)  Right  to  Make  Claim.   An interested party who
                         disagrees  with the Administrator's determination
                         of  his or her right to Plan benefits must submit
                         a  written claim and exhaust this claim procedure
                         before legal recourse of any type is sought.  The
                         claim  must  include  the  important  issues  the
                         interested party believes support the claim.  The
                         Administrator, pursuant to the authority provided
                         in  this  Plan,  shall either approve or deny the
                         claim.

                    (b)  Process for Denying a Claim.  The Administrator's
                         partial  or  complete  denial of an initial claim
                         must  include an understandable, written response
                         covering  (1)  the specific reasons why the claim
                         is  being denied (with reference to the pertinent
                         Plan  provisions)  and (2) the steps necessary to
                         perfect the claim and obtain a final review.

                    (c)  A p p eal  of  Denial  and  Final  Review.    The
                         interested party may make a written appeal of the
                         Administrator's   initial   decision,   and   the
                         Administrator  shall  respond  in the same manner
                         and  form  as  prescribed  for  denying  a  claim
                         initially.














                                         54<PAGE>





                    (d)  Time  Frame.    The  initial  claim,  its review,
                         appeal and final review shall be made in a timely
                         fashion, subject to the following time table:

                                                           Days to Respond
                         Action                           From Last Action

                         Administrator determines benefit               NA
                         Interested party files initial request    60 days
                         Administrator's initial decision          90 days

                         Interested party requests final review    60 days
                         Administrator's final decision            60 days

                         However,  the  Administrator may take up to twice
                         the  maximum  response  time  for its initial and
                         final review if it provides an explanation within
                         the  normal  period of why an extension is needed
                         and when its decision will be forthcoming.

              18.7  Construction

                    Headings  are  included  for reading convenience.  The
                    text  shall  control if any ambiguity or inconsistency
                    exists  between  the  headings  and  the  text.    The
                    singular  and  plural  shall  be interchanged wherever

                    appropriate.   References to Participant shall include
                    Beneficiary when appropriate and even if not otherwise
                    already expressly stated. 

              18.8  Jurisdiction and Severability

                    The  Plan  and Trust shall be construed, regulated and
                    administered  under ERISA and other applicable federal
                    laws  and,  where not otherwise preempted, by the laws
                    of  the State of California.  If any provision of this
                    Plan  and Trust shall become invalid or unenforceable,
                    t h a t    fact  shall  not  affect  the  validity  or
                    enforceability of any other provision of this Plan and
                    Trust.  All provisions of this Plan and Trust shall be

                    so  construed  as to render them valid and enforceable
                    in accordance with their intent.

              18.9  Indemnification by Employer

                    The  Employers  hereby  agree  to  indemnify  all Plan
                    fiduciaries  against any and all liabilities resulting
                    from   any  action  or  inaction,  (including  a  Plan
                    termination  in which the Company fails to apply for a
                    favorable  determination  from  the  Internal  Revenue
                    Service  with respect to the qualification of the Plan
                    upon  its  termination),  in  relation  to the Plan or
                    Trust  (1)  including  (without  limitation)  expenses
                    reasonably  incurred  in  the  defense  of  any  claim

                    relating  to  the Plan or its assets, and amounts paid
                    in  any settlement relating to the Plan or its assets,
                    but  (2) excluding liability resulting from actions or
                    inactions  made  in  bad  faith, or resulting from the
                    negligence  or willful misconduct of the Trustee.  The
                    Company  shall have the right, but not the obligation,
                    to  conduct  the  defense  of any action to which this
                    Section   applies.    The  Plan  fiduciaries  are  not
                    entitled to indemnity from the Plan assets relating to
                    any such action.




                                         55<PAGE>





         19   AMENDMENT, MERGER AND TERMINATION

              19.1  Amendment

                    The  Company reserves the right to amend this Plan and
                    Trust  at any time, to any extent and in any manner it
                    may  deem  necessary or appropriate.  The Company (and
                    not the Trustee) shall be responsible for adopting any
                    amendments  necessary to maintain the qualified status
                    of  this Plan and Trust under Code sections 401(a) and

                    501(a).  The Administrator shall have the authority to
                    a d opt  Plan  and  Trust  amendments  which  have  no
                    substantial  adverse financial impact upon an Employer
                    or the Plan.  All interested parties shall be bound by
                    any amendment, provided that no amendment shall:

                    (a)  become  effective until it is accepted in writing
                         by   the  Trustee  (which  acceptance  shall  not
                         unreasonably be withheld);

                    (b)  except  to the extent permissible under ERISA and
                         the Code, make it possible for any portion of the
                         Trust  assets  to  revert to an Employer or to be
                         used  for, or diverted to, any purpose other than
                         for  the  exclusive  benefit  of Participants and

                         Beneficiaries  entitled  to  Plan benefits and to
                         defray  reasonable  expenses of administering the
                         Plan; 

                    (c)  decrease  the  rights of any Employee to benefits
                         accrued  (including  the  elimination of optional
                         forms  of  benefits)  to  the  date  on which the
                         amendment  is adopted, or if later, the date upon
                         which  the amendment becomes effective, except to
                         the  extent  permitted  under ERISA and the Code;
                         nor

                    (d)  permit  an Employee to be paid the balance of his
                         or  her  Pre-Tax Account unless the payment would

                         otherwise be permitted under Code section 401(k).

              19.2  Merger

                    This  Plan and Trust may not be merged or consolidated
                    with, nor may its assets or liabilities be transferred
                    t o ,    another  plan  unless  each  Participant  and
                    Beneficiary  would,  if  the  resulting plan were then
                    terminated,  receive  a benefit just after the merger,
                    consolidation  or  transfer which is at least equal to
                    the benefit which would be received if either plan had
                    terminated just before such event.

              19.3  Plan Termination


                    The  Company  may,  at  any  time  and for any reason,
                    t e r m inate  the  Plan,  or  completely  discontinue
                    contributions.  Upon either of these events, or in the
                    event  of a partial termination of the Plan within the
                    meaning  of  Code  section  411(d)(3), the Accounts of
                    e a c h  affected  Employee  shall  be  fully  vested.
                    D i s t ributions  or  withdrawals  will  be  made  in
                    accordance  with the terms of the Plan as in effect at
                    the  time  of  the Plan's termination or as thereafter
                    amended  provided  that  a  post-termination amendment
                    will  not  be effective to the extent that it violates


                                         56<PAGE>





                    Section  19.1  unless  it  is  required  in  order  to
                    maintain  the  qualified  status  of the Plan upon its
                    termination.    The Trustee's and Employer's authority
                    shall  continue  beyond  the  Plan's  termination date
                    until  all  Trust  assets  have  been  liquidated  and
                    distributed.

              19.4  Termination of Employer's Participation

                    Any Employer may terminate its Plan participation upon

                    written  notice executed by the Employer and delivered
                    to  the  Company.    Upon  the Employer's request, the
                    Company  may instruct the Trustee and Administrator to
                    spin  off  all affected Accounts and underlying assets
                    into   a  separate  qualified  plan  under  which  the
                    Employer  shall  assume  the  powers and duties of the
                    Company.    Alternatively,  the  Company may treat the
                    event  as  a  partial  termination  described above or
                    continue to maintain the Accounts under the Plan.

              19.5  Replacement of the Trustee

                    The  Trustee may resign as Trustee under this Plan and
                    Trust  or  may  be  removed by the Company at any time
                    upon  at  least  90  days  written  notice (or less if

                    agreed  to  by  both  parties).    In  such event, the
                    Company  shall  appoint a successor trustee by the end
                    of  the  notice  period.   The successor trustee shall
                    then  succeed  to  all  the  powers  and duties of the
                    Trustee  under  this  Plan and Trust.  If no successor
                    trustee  has  been  named  by  the  end  of the notice
                    period,  the  Company's  chief executive officer shall
                    become  the  trustee,  or  if  he or she declines, the
                    Trustee  may petition the court for the appointment of
                    a successor trustee.  

              19.6  Final Settlement and Accounting of Trustee

                    (a)  Final Settlement.  As soon as is administratively

                         feasible  after  its  resignation  or  removal as
                         Trustee,   the  Trustee  shall  transfer  to  the
                         successor  trustee all property currently held by
                         the Trust.  However, the Trustee is authorized to
                         reserve   such  sum  of  money  as  it  may  deem
                         a d visable  for  payment  of  its  accounts  and
                         expenses in connection with the settlement of its
                         accounts or other fees or expenses payable by the
                         Trust.    Any  balance remaining after payment of
                         such  fees  and  expenses  shall  be  paid to the
                         successor trustee.

                    (b)  Final  Accounting.    The Trustee shall provide a
                         final  accounting  to the Administrator within 90

                         days  of the date Trust assets are transferred to
                         the successor trustee.

                    (c)  Administrator  Approval.    Approval of the final
                         accounting will automatically occur 90 days after
                         s u c h  accounting  has  been  received  by  the
                         Administrator,  unless  the Administrator files a
                         written  objection  with  the Trustee within such
                         time  period.  Such approval shall be final as to
                         all  matters  and  transactions  stated  or shown
                         therein and binding upon the Administrator.



                                         57<PAGE>





                           APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT FUNDS


         I.   Investment Funds Available

              The   Investment   Funds   offered   to   Participants   and
              Beneficiaries  as  of the Execution Date include this set of
              daily valued funds:


                         Category           Funds

                         Income             Income Accumulation

                         Balanced           Asset Allocation

                         Equity             S&P 500 Stock


         II.  Default Investment Fund

              The  default Investment Fund as of the Execution Date is the
              Income Accumulation Fund.


         III. Contribution Accounts For Which Investment is Restricted

              A  Participant  or  Beneficiary may direct the investment of
              h i s  or  her  entire  Account  except  for  the  following
              Contribution  Accounts,  and except as otherwise provided in
              Section 7,  which shall be invested as of the Effective Date
              as follows:

                         Matching           Company Stock Fund


         IV.  M a ximum  Percentage  Restrictions  Applicable  to  Certain
         Investment Funds

              As  of  the  Effective Date, there are no maximum percentage
              restrictions applicable to any Investment Funds.






























                                         58<PAGE>





                   APPENDIX B - PAYMENT OF PLAN FEES AND EXPENSES


         As of the Effective Date, payment of Plan fees and expenses shall
         be as follows: 

         1)   Investment  Management Fees:  These are paid by Participants
              in   that  management  fees  reduce  the  investment  return
              reported  and  credited  to  Participants,  except  that the
              Employer  shall  pay  the  fees related to the Company Stock
              Fund. These are paid by the Employer on a quarterly basis. 

         2)   Recordkeeping  Fees:  These  are  paid  by the Employer on a
              quarterly basis.

         3)   Loan   Fees:    A  $3.50  per  month  fee  is  assessed  and
              b i l led/collected  quarterly  from  the  Account  of  each
              Participant who has an outstanding loan balance.

         4)   Investment  Fund Election Changes:  For each Investment Fund
              election change by a Participant, in excess of 4 changes per
              year,  a  $10  fee  will  be  assessed  and billed/collected
              quarterly from the Participant's Account.  

         5)   Additional  Fees  Paid  by Employer:  All other Plan related
              fees  and  expenses  shall  be paid by the Employer.  To the
              extent  that  the  Administrator  later elects that any such
              fees  shall  be borne by Participants, estimates of the fees
              shall  be  determined and reconciled, at least annually, and
              the  fees will be assessed monthly and billed/collected from
              Accounts quarterly.








































                                         59<PAGE>





                          APPENDIX C - LOAN INTEREST RATE


         A s   of  the  Effective  Date,  the  interest  rate  charged  on
         Participant  loans shall be equal to the U.S. Treasury rate for a
         note of the same maturity, plus 3%.

         The  rate  may  be determined once for all loans made in a month,
         and the maturity may be determined to the nearest year.






























































                                         60<PAGE>


© 2022 IncJournal is not affiliated with or endorsed by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission